Today’s News 14th August 2019

  • "We Are Struggling:" Air Cargo Performance Slumps Across Major European Air Ports 

    The German ZEW headline number on Tuesday crashed to -44.1 versus -28.5 expectations and -24.5 last. The indicator measures economic sentiment shows the Germany economy could be teetering on the edge of a manufacturing recession.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The most recent escalation in trade disputes between the US and China, the risk of a full-blown trade war and competitive devaluations, has put extreme pressure on the European economy, that is visible in declining freight performance at major airport cargo hubs.

    Data from the Airports Council International (ACI) reports freight performance at Europe’s airports in 1H19 has been faltering, with only 30% of the top ten cargo gateways reporting YoY growth, reported JOC.

    In 1H19, Madrid, Barcelona, and London were the only airports to record YoY growth. Frankfurt, the top air cargo hub in Europe, registered a drop of -2.5% YoY.

    ACI said cargo gateways at airports across Europe, on an overall basis, recorded a -3.5% fall in 1H19.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Olivier Jankovec, director-general of ACI Europe, said European air freight data experienced significant deterioration in June, indicates that the rest of the summer through early fall could remain in decline.

    “The slump in freight traffic is where it really bites at the moment,” he said.

    “And it is not getting any better, with June registering a drop of 7.1%, the worst monthly performance in more than seven years.”

    Air France-KLM freight data from July show freight markets continued to slump. Transported tonnage for the Franco-Dutch carrier declined 6% YoY last month.

    Denmark’s DSV reported a drop of 5% YoY in 1H9 of its air freight segment, mainly due to recessionary conditions in the European auto sector.

    The German economy is in decline, and that is also damaging Italy, France, Poland, and Spain.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Europe’s automobile industry plunged 8% in sales in June, the ninth monthly decline in the last ten months.

    “The fact that the air freight market is down 5% year to date is worrying,” said Jens Bjørn Andersen, CEO of DSV.

    “We are struggling to figure out what is driving this negative volume in air freight apart from automotive. You speak to one customer and he tells you one thing, but speak to another and he tells you almost the opposite. I think that some of the emergency shipments that we saw a year ago have gone and their supply chains are being managed more efficiently now.”

    Growth rates in air freight cargo prices have remained depressed across all major global shipping routes this year. The most significant declines can be seen in Frankfurt to South East Asia, -28% YTD; Hong Kong to North America, -23.5% YTD; and Hong Kong to North America, -23.5% YTD.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    International Air Transport Association (IATA) reported global air freight volumes in 1H19 fell for the eighth consecutive month. Demand, measured in freight ton-kilometers, dropped 4.8% in June YoY.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Global trade continues to suffer as trade tensions — particularly between the US and China — deepen. As a result, air cargo markets continue to contract,” said Alexandre de Juniac, IATA director general and CEO.

    European air freight data suggests that the probability of an economic recovery in Europe in 2H19 is low. What could be around the bend is a recession that starts, or has already stared in Germany.

  • Bulldog Britain Hears Master's Voice

    Authored by Finian Cunningham via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    Since Boris Johnson took over as Britain’s new prime minister three weeks ago he has been holding intensive phone calls with US President Donald Trump, according to media reports. There is a buzz that the much-vaunted “special relationship” between the US and Britain is finding new ardor.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But this supposed special alliance is never about equals, despite pretensions. It’s all about Britain doing the bidding of its master in Washington. So when the pair are patting each other’s backs that means potential trouble for the rest of the world from abuse of power by Washington and its enabling British lackey.

    The intensity of renewed alignment between Washington and London saw Trump’s National Security Advisor John Bolton visit the UK capital this week. During two days, Bolton had a flurry of meetings with top figures in Johnson’s hardline Brexit cabinet. It was reportedly the most senior American delegation to Britain since Johnson took over in 10 Downing Street on July 23.

    Last week, Dominic Raab, the new British foreign secretary, was in Washington where he was greeted at the White House by Trump. Raab subsequently gushed to media about how “effusive” the American president was towards Britain’s plans under Johnson to quit the European Union on October 31 without a departure deal. The so-called “hard Brexit” option.

    Johnson is expected to have his first meeting as British PM with Trump later this month during the G7 summit to be held in Biarritz, France.

    Trump has gone out of his way to compliment Johnson as Britain’s new leader, in particular praising his harder line towards the EU over separation terms. The American president had a fraught relationship with former PM Theresa May, and was often scathing about her proposed “soft Brexit” from the EU involving a transition customs and trade deal with the European bloc.

    Trump’s contempt for the EU is in line with Boris Johnson’s and that of his hard Brexit cabinet. Johnson’s Downing Street office and acolytes like Dominic Raab and Brexit planner Michael Gove are gunning for an abrupt exit in which Britain will not have any transitional trading relations with the EU. It will instead be moving to World Trade Organization rules as a sole trading nation.

    That’s partly why Johnson and his government are assiduously courting the Trump administration. London needs to find favor with the White House in order to avail of a US-British trade deal as a substitute for the EU, which has up to now been Britain’s biggest market for imports and exports.

    With several predictions of economic turmoil facing Britain in the event of a hard Brexit, Johnson is desperately relying on Trump to throw a trade life-line to the UK. That acute reliance on Washington by Britain makes Johnson an even more pliable British leader to American demands.

    Already the American master is calling the tune for London’s merry dancing. When foreign secretary Dominic Raab was summoned to the White House last week, the two main topics on the president’s agenda were “trade” and “security”. That coupling suggests a quid quo pro is being furnished. Then the British diplomat had meetings with Secretary of State Mike Pompeo and John Bolton. Their discussions were said to revolve around Iran and Hong Kong.

    This week in London, Bolton underscored the linkage between post-Brexit trade talks with Britain and international security issues. But the American side is intensifying its “price” for Britain to avail of a US trade deal. Bolton forcefully let it be known that the White House wants Britain to take a much tougher line in the Persian Gulf towards Iran and also towards China, in accordance with US demands.

    That tougher line outlined by Bolton is thought to involve Britain deploying more naval forces along with the US in a maritime show of strength towards Iran. Former British foreign secretary Jeremy Hunt, who was ousted by Johnson, had pushed for a European naval mission for commercial shipping security in the Gulf. Now, however, Johnson’s cabinet is throwing their naval lot in with the Americans. And Bolton is upping the ante for Britain to show more muscle. It is understood that Bolton is seeking for Britain to break with the EU line on supporting the international nuclear accord with Iran. If Britain walks away from the Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action (JCPOA), as the Trump administration seems to be demanding, then that will undermine Europe’s position of supporting the JCPOA, and will embolden Washington’s “maximum pressure” policy towards Tehran. That, in turn, dangerously escalates tensions towards a military confrontation.

    Another “price” being extracted from Britain by Washington in return for a post-Brexit trade deal is for London to join US sanctions on China’s telecoms firm Huawei. The Trump administration is demanding that the Johnson government cancel plans to partner with Huawei in setting up advanced telecoms infrastructure across Britain. Washington claims its objection to Chinese involvement in Britain and Europe is motivated by “national security” concerns.

    Washington also wants Britain to take a more critical position towards China over the weeks-long Hong Kong protests. Beijing has already decried “interference” in its internal affairs by Washington and London. Relations are thus set to become even more torrid.

    What this all means is that Britain is set to pander even more than usual to Washington’s imperious foreign policy. The Anglo-American axis has been responsible for numerous criminal wars in the Middle East and countless other subterfuges. Washington and London have worked together to escalate hostility and tensions towards Russia.

    With the unscrupulous Johnson as prime minister and Britain’s post-Brexit desperation for American economic favors, the British bulldog will not merely be attentively hearing its master’s voice. It will be snapping and yapping to please too. That’s a bad sign for international relations and peace.

  • Who Inflicts The Most Gun Violence In America? The US Government And Its Police Force

    Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “It is often the case that police shootings, incidents where law enforcement officers pull the trigger on civilians, are left out of the conversation on gun violence. But a police officer shooting a civilian counts as gun violence. Every time an officer uses a gun against an innocent or an unarmed person contributes to the culture of gun violence in this country.” – Journalist Celisa Calacal

    Yes, gun violence is a problem in America, although violent crime generally remains at an all-time low.

    Yes, mass shootings are a problem in America, although while they are getting deadlier, they are not getting more frequent.

    Yes, mentally ill individuals embarking on mass shooting sprees are a problem in America.

    However, tighter gun control laws and so-called “intelligent” background checks fail to protect the public from the most egregious perpetrator of gun violence in America: the U.S. government.

    Consider that five years after police shot and killed an unarmed 18-year-old man in Ferguson, Missouri, there has been no relief from the government’s gun violence.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here’s what we’ve learned about the government’s gun violence since Ferguson, according to The Washington Post: If you’re a black American, you’ve got a greater chance of being shot by police. If you’re an unarmed black man, you’re four times more likely to be killed by police than an unarmed white man. Most people killed by police are young men. Since 2015, police have shot and killed an average of 3 people per day. More than 2,500 police departments have shot and killed at least one person since 2015. And while the vast majority of people shot and killed by police are armed, their weapons ranged from guns to knives to toyguns.

    Clearly, the U.S. government is not making America any safer.

    Indeed, the government’s gun violence—inflicted on unarmed individuals by battlefield-trained SWAT teams, militarized police, and bureaucratic government agents trained to shoot first and ask questions later—poses a greater threat to the safety and security of the nation than any mass shooter.

    According to journalist Matt Agorist, “mass shootings … have claimed the lives of 339 people since 2015… [D]uring this same time frame, police in America have claimed the lives of 4,355 citizens.

    That’s 1200% more people killed by police than mass shooters since 2015.

    For example, in Texas, a police officer sent to do a welfare check on a 30-year-old woman seen lying on the grass near a shopping center, took aim at the woman’s dog as it ran towards him barking, fired multiple times, and killed the woman instead.

    In Chicago, a SWAT team—wearing “army fatigues with black cloth covering their faces and wearing goggles,” armed with automatic rifles, and throwing flash-bang grenades—crashed through the doors of a suburban home and proceeded to storm into bedrooms, holding the children of the household at gunpoint. One child, 13-year-old Amir, was “accidentally” shot in the knee by police while sitting on his bed.

    In St. Louis, Missouri, a SWAT team on a mission to deliver an administrative warrant carried out a no-knock raid that ended with police kicking in the homeowner’s front door, and shooting and killing her dog—all over an unpaid gas bill. Taxpayers will have to find $750,000 to settle the lawsuit arising over the cops’ overzealous tactics.

    In South Carolina, a 62-year-old homeowner was shot four times through his front door by police who were investigating a medical-assist alarm call that originated from a cell phone inside the home. Dick Tench, believing his house was being broken into, was standing in the foyer of his home armed with a handgun when police, peering through the front door, fired several shots through the door, hitting Tench in the pelvis and the aortic artery. Tench survived, but the bullet lodged in his pelvis will stay there for life.

    In Kansas, a SWAT team, attempting to carry out a routine search warrant (the suspect had already been arrested), showed up at a residence around dinnertime, dressed in tactical gear with weapons drawn, and hurled a flash-bang grenade into the house past the 68-year-old woman who was in the process of opening the door to them and in the general direction of a 2-year-old child.

    These are just a few recent examples among hundreds this year alone.

    Curiously enough, in the midst of the finger-pointing over the latest round of mass shootings, Americans have been so focused on debating who or what is responsible for gun violence—the guns, the gun owners, the Second Amendment, the politicians, or our violent culture—that they have overlooked the fact that the systemic violence being perpetrated by agents of the government has done more collective harm to the American people and their liberties than any single act of terror or mass shooting.

    Violence has become our government’s calling card, starting at the top and trickling down, from the more than 80,000 SWAT team raids carried out every year on unsuspecting Americans by heavily armed, black-garbed commandos and the increasingly rapid militarization of local police forces across the country to the drone killings used to target insurgents.

    The government even exports violence worldwide, with one of this country’s most profitable exports being weapons. Indeed, the United States, the world’s largest exporter of arms, has been selling violence to the world for too long now. Controlling more than 50 percent of the global weaponry market, the U.S. has sold or donated weapons to at least 96 countries in the past five years, including the Middle East. The U.S. also provides countries such as Israel, Egypt, Jordan, Pakistan and Iraq with grants and loans through the Foreign Military Financing program to purchase military weapons.

    At the same time that the U.S. is equipping nearly half the world with deadly weapons, profiting to the tune of $36.2 billion, its leaders have also been lecturing American citizens on the dangers of gun violence and working to enact measures that would make it more difficult for Americans to acquire certain weapons.

    Talk about an absurd double standard.

    If we’re truly going to get serious about gun violence, why not start by scaling back the American police state’s weapons of war?

    I’ll tell you why: because  the government has no intention of scaling back on its weapons.

    In fact, all the while gun critics continue to clamor for bans on military-style assault weapons, high-capacity magazines and armor-piercing bullets, the U.S. military is passing them out to domestic police forces.

    Under the auspices of a military “recycling” program, which allows local police agencies to acquire military-grade weaponry and equipment, more than $4.2 billion worth of equipment has been transferred from the Defense Department to domestic police agencies since 1990. Included among these “gifts” are tank-like, 20-ton Mine Resistant Ambush Protected (MRAP) vehicles, tactical gear, and assault rifles.

    There are now reportedly more bureaucratic (non-military) government agents armed with high-tech, deadly weapons than U.S. Marines.

    While Americans have to jump through an increasing number of hoops in order to own a gun, the government is arming its own civilian employees to the hilt with guns, ammunition and military-style equipment, authorizing them to make arrests, and training them in military tactics.

    Among the agencies being supplied with night-vision equipment, body armor, hollow-point bullets, shotguns, drones, assault rifles and LP gas cannons are the Smithsonian, U.S. Mint, Health and Human Services, IRS, FDA, Small Business Administration, Social Security Administration, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, Education Department, Energy Department, Bureau of Engraving and Printing and an assortment of public universities.

    Seriously, why do IRS agents need AR-15 rifles?

    For that matter, why do police need armored personnel carriers with gun ports, compact submachine guns with 30-round magazines, precision battlefield sniper rifles, and military-grade assault-style rifles and carbines?

    Short answer: they don’t.

    In the hands of government agents, whether they are members of the military, law enforcement or some other government agency, these weapons have become routine parts of America’s day-to-day life, a byproduct of the rapid militarization of law enforcement over the past several decades.

    Over the course of 30 years, police officers in jack boots holding assault rifles have become fairly common in small town communities across the country. As investigative journalists Andrew Becker and G.W. Schulz reveal, “Many police, including beat cops, now routinely carry assault rifles. Combined with body armor and other apparel, many officers look more and more like combat troops serving in Iraq and Afghanistan.”

    Does this sound like a country under martial law?

    You want to talk about gun violence? While it still technically remains legal for the average citizen to own a firearm in America, possessing one can now get you pulled oversearchedarrested, subjected to all manner of surveillancetreated as a suspect without ever having committed a crime, shot at and killed by police.

    You don’t even have to have a gun or a look-alike gun, such as a BB gun, in your possession to be singled out and killed by police.

    There are countless incidents that happen every day in which Americans are shot, stripped, searched, choked, beaten and tasered by police for little more than daring to frown, smile, question, or challenge an order.

    Growing numbers of unarmed people are being shot and killed for just standing a certain way, or moving a certain way, or holding something—anything—that police could misinterpret to be a gun, or igniting some trigger-centric fear in a police officer’s mind that has nothing to do with an actual threat to their safety.

    With alarming regularity, unarmed men, women, children and even pets are being gunned down by twitchy, hyper-sensitive, easily-spooked police officers who shoot first and ask questions later, and all the government does is shrug, and promise to do better, all the while the cops are granted qualified immunity.

    Killed for standing in a “shooting stance.” In California, police opened fire on and killed a mentally challenged—unarmed—black man within minutes of arriving on the scene, allegedly because he removed a vape smoking device from his pocket and took a “shooting stance.”

    Killed for holding a cell phone. Police in Arizona shot a man who was running away from U.S. Marshals after he refused to drop an object that turned out to be a cellphone. Similarly, police in Sacramento fired 20 shots at an unarmed, 22-year-old black man who was standing in his grandparents’ backyard after mistaking his cellphone for a gun.

    Killed for carrying a baseball bat. Responding to a domestic disturbance call, Chicago police shot and killed 19-year-old college student Quintonio LeGrier who had reportedly been experiencing mental health problems and was carrying a baseball bat around the apartment where he and his father lived.

    Killed for opening the front door. Bettie Jones, who lived on the floor below LeGrier, was also fatally shot—this time, accidentally—when she attempted to open the front door for police.

    Killed for running towards police with a metal spoon. In Alabama, police shot and killed a 50-year-old man who reportedly charged a police officer while holding “a large metal spoon in a threatening manner.”

    Killed for running while holding a tree branch. Georgia police shot and killed a 47-year-old man wearing only shorts and tennis shoes who, when first encountered, was sitting in the woods against a tree, only to start running towards police holding a stick in an “aggressive manner.

    Killed for crawling around naked. Atlanta police shot and killed an unarmed man who was reported to have been “acting deranged, knocking on doors, crawling around on the ground naked.” Police fired two shots at the man after he reportedly started running towards them.

    Killed for wearing dark pants and a basketball jersey. Donnell Thompson, a mentally disabled 27-year-old described as gentle and shy, was shot and killed after police—searching for a carjacking suspect reportedly wearing similar clothing—encountered him lying motionless in a neighborhood yard. Police “only” opened fire with an M4 rifle after Thompson first failed to respond to their flash bang grenades and then started running after being hit by foam bullets.

    Killed for driving while deaf. In North Carolina, a state trooper shot and killed 29-year-old Daniel K. Harris—who was deaf—after Harris initially failed to pull over during a traffic stop.

    Killed for being homeless. Los Angeles police shot an unarmed homeless man after he failed to stop riding his bicycle and then proceeded to run from police.

    Killed for brandishing a shoehorn. John Wrana, a 95-year-old World War II veteran, lived in an assisted living center, used a walker to get around, and was shot and killed by police who mistook the shoehorn in his hand for a 2-foot-long machete and fired multiple beanbag rounds from a shotgun at close range.

    Killed for having your car break down on the road. Terence Crutcher, unarmed and black, was shot and killed by Oklahoma police after his car broke down on the side of the road. Crutcher was shot in the back while walking towards his car with his hands up.

    Killed for holding a garden hose. California police were ordered to pay $6.5 million after they opened fire on a man holding a garden hose, believing it to be a gun. Douglas Zerby was shot 12 times and pronounced dead on the scene.

    Killed for calling 911. Justine Damond, a 40-year-old yoga instructor, was shot and killed by Minneapolis police, allegedly because they were startled by a loud noise in the vicinity just as she approached their patrol car. Damond, clad in pajamas, had called 911 to report a possible assault in her neighborhood.

    Killed for looking for a parking spot. Richard Ferretti, a 52-year-old chef, was shot and killed by Philadelphia police who had been alerted to investigate a purple Dodge Caravan that was driving “suspiciously” through the neighborhood.

    Shot seven times for peeing outdoors. Eighteen-year-old Keivon Young was shot seven times by police from behind while urinating outdoors. Young was just zipping up his pants when he heard a commotion behind him and then found himself struck by a hail of bullets from two undercover cops. Allegedly officers mistook Young—5’4,” 135 lbs., and guilty of nothing more than taking a leak outdoors—for a 6’ tall, 200 lb. murder suspect whom they later apprehended. Young was charged with felony resisting arrest and two counts of assaulting a peace officer.

    This is what passes for policing in America today, folks, and it’s only getting worse.

    In every one of these scenarios, police could have resorted to less lethal tactics.

    They could have acted with reason and calculation instead of reacting with a killer instinct.

    They could have attempted to de-escalate and defuse whatever perceived “threat” caused them to fear for their lives enough to react with lethal force.

    That police instead chose to fatally resolve these encounters by using their guns on fellow citizens speaks volumes about what is wrong with policing in America today, where police officers are being dressed in the trappings of war, drilled in the deadly art of combat, and trained to look upon “every individual they interact with as an armed threat and every situation as a deadly force encounter in the making.”

    Remember, to a hammer, all the world looks like a nail.

    Yet as I point out in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, “we the people” are not just getting hammered.

    We’re getting killed, execution-style.

    Violence begets violence: until we start addressing the U.S. government’s part in creating, cultivating and abetting a culture of violence, we will continue to be a nation plagued by violence in our homes, in our schools, on our streets and in our affairs of state, both foreign and domestic.

  • Petition Calls For Joe Rogan To Moderate The 2020 Presidential Debate

    A petition that began nearly three months ago urges the Commission on Presidential Debates to elect comedian and podcast superstar Joe Rogan as one of the moderators for the upcoming presidential debates in 2020, has gained massive amounts of signatures on Monday and Tuesday.

    As of Tuesday evening, the petition, called “Get Joe Rogan to Moderate the 2020 Presidential Debate,” has more than 85,000 signatures, with a goal of 150,000.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The petition explains Rogan has interviewed both progressive and conservative politicians, such as Andrew Yang (D), Tulsi Gabbard (D), Kyle Kulinski (D), Gary Johnson (L), Benjamin Shapiro (R), and Candace Owens (R), have all recently appeared on “The Joe Rogan Experience” program.

    “Joe Rogan has an audience containing viewers from all areas of the political spectrum. Joe Rogan is not registered under any political party and is well-known for having civil, productive, and interesting, conversations about political issues without partisan bias,” the petition said.

    Bernie Sanders (I) made headlines last week when he was on Rogan’s show discussing free healthcare, free college, and open access to classified government documents about aliens.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Dozens of comments on the “News & discussion” tab of the petition’s Change.Org page, said the current debate structure is broken and outdated. Some said Rogan would talk about the real issues rather than letting cable news networks and their corporate sponsors dictate the topics and questions. Here are some of the comments:

    “I believe Joe Rogan would be an impartial, yet highly enlightened choice to moderate the debates. He would see through the lies and get down to the REAL issues in the debate,” one commenter said.

    “Joe Rogan is a very good interviewer, so naturally would be a good moderator.. He is very un-biased and really can sit and listen to two opposing sides with an open mind. Not unfairly coming into the interview with his mind already made up and his opinions set in stone. In other words Joe will really listen to what people have to say (with no political agenda in mind) and agree with the morally right people and when he agrees with a policy or an idea its cause he truly believes in it and not cause the Democrat party supports it or visa versa .. joe rogan is an overall good person at heart and Intelegiant and he is closer to the people than any of these news anchors or even politicians, so I think he naturally fits in this moderator position if he even wants to do it , which there is a strong chance he does not lol ..,” another said.

    “Joe Rogan is fair, unbiased, direct and would ask the relevant questions most Americans want real answers to, minus all the fluff and bi-partisanship many past moderators have subscribed to. He resonates much closer to “the voice of the people” than any interviewer I have seen. Go Joe! We need ya buddy!” a commenter said.

    With lots of interest sparking up in the last several days, the petition has about 56% of signatures needed by 7 pm est. Tuesday.

    While over 85,000 signatures are only a small majority of Americans, the petition could spread like wildfire around the internet and achieve the 150,000 goal in the coming days, if not weeks.

    This is one of the first movements where we’ve seen a grassroots effort to boot corporate media whores out of hosting presidential debates and have someone from the outside who might want to discuss the real issues that plague the bottom 90% of Americans.

    Here are some topics Rogan could talk about: the wealth inequality gap, 50% of Americans don’t have $500 in their bank accounts, the housing affordability crisis, abolishing the Federal Reserve, endless wars in the Middle East, the national debt, and possibly how to stop the rise of the military-industrial complex.

  • Becoming The "Gray Man"

    Authored by Mac Slavo via SHTFplan.com,

    The “gray man” survival concept isn’t new in preppers’ circles, but it’s also something a lot of questions are asked about. Becoming a “gray man” essentially means strategically not drawing attention to yourself to avoid conflict.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Being a “gray man” is easier said than done.  Since it’s impossible to predict what the future will hold, especially the future of survivalism, we can only speculate how to best achieve “gray man” status.  That said, it is a skill that can be practiced now though, before the SHTF. Blending in, laying low, recognizing dangers, and situational awareness all play a role in this concept. Going unnoticed can keep you out of harm’s way.

    It’s been said that an ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure. So if you can avoid conflict or any need for self-defense, you’ll have an added advantage when the SHTF. This is one skill that actually costs nothing.  All it takes is some rational thought and heightened awareness.

    HOW TO BE A “GRAY MAN”

    The first step is to observe others.  Start to notice things like attire and how people speak to each other.  Observe how people interact with each other and begin to recognize their mannerisms and inclinations.  This requires you to first has some decent situational awareness skill – which is also free.  After you’ve observed others, your goal is to fit in and avoid creating a stimulus (something that can be embedded in someone else’s memory and creates an impression).  Be like those around you. If you stick out, you could become a target. Be remarkably unremarkable and unmemorable.

    You want to be as invisible as possible, so while keeping with the general tone of attire others are wearing, you’ll want to make sure you wear muted colors, avoid prints (yes, even camouflage), and don’t accessorize. Avoid any military-style clothing.  That makes a statement and ensures you will not appear invisible to others. Hide any distinguishable markings such as a birthmark or tattoos.  These will make you easily identifiable.

    You also want to appear non-threatening and make sure your demeanor matches your attire. Don’t go all out and cover your face with a bandanna under a hood. That will suggest that you’re up to no good. Instead, wear a baseball cap and give off the “vibes” of someone who is not doing anything at all except existing. Be boring, but walk as though you have a purpose.

    Minimize interactions with all people, especially those you do not know.  Once the SHTF, you’ll have more enemies than friends especially if your friends have failed to effectively prepare for the bad times.

    Most importantly, you will want to learn to think like a “gray man.” Changing the way we think is difficult, and impossible for some. But if you want a chance at avoiding as many altercations as possible in dire situations, you’ll need to make the attempt. Watch the video below for some great advice:

    Learning to be a “gray man” could save your life.  Blending in while being forgettable and not leaving an impression on anyone will allow you to go about your business with very limited altercations. This is one skill that is ranked up there with situational awareness.

    Both situational awareness and being a “gray man” are essential to a proper prepping mentality.  Both are free, and in addition to this article, I suggest you read as much as you can about both and begin to use them in your everyday life as practice.

     Gray Man: Camouflage for Crowds, Cities, and Civil Crisis

    The Gray Man is the forgettable face, the ghost guy, the hidden human. Implementing the concepts is more than looking less tactical, less hostile, or less threatening. It is the willful abandonment of anything and everything that defines oneself as different. Using his unique “S” word conceptual approach featured in Appear to Vanish, camouflage and concealment expert Matthew Dermody discusses the concepts, tactics, and mindset necessary to assimilate into any urban environment. From the safety-conscious international traveler to the SERE contingencies of the deep cover foreign operative, GRAY MAN is the definitive urban concealment resource.

  • USPS Reports First Drop In Package Volume In Nearly A Decade 

    The US Postal Service (USPS) is in a dangerous death spiral as it could run out of cash by the mid-2020s. The postmaster general warned in May that unless significant reforms are made to the quasigovernmental agency, it could soon collapse.

    A new report from The Wall Street Journal suggests that the downfall of the USPS could be more imminent than thought. Package delivery volume declined in 2Q19 for the first time since 2009. The cause of the drop is due to Amazon, United Parcel Service, and FedEx increasingly delivering online packages to homes.

    The USPS has experienced diminishing revenues for years even though they deliver packages to at least a million new addresses per year. The increased competition, largely from private shippers, has made the marketplace more competitive, leading to lower shipping rates that have financially stressed USPS.

    The Journal said USPS delivered 3.2% fewer packages for the quarter ended June 30.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Postmaster General Megan Brennan said Friday that other delivery players are convincing shippers to switch to their networks, noting that they’re “aggressively pricing their products and services in order to fill their networks and grow package density.”

    Brennan added, “That said, we are constantly adapting our competitive posture to counter emerging developments.”

    The USPS will likely notice higher package volume declines through 2020. FedEx plans on shifting 2 million of its daily packages that are diverted to USPS for “last-mile delivery” into its Ground network next year.

    Overall for 2Q, USPS posted a modest drop in revenue to $17.09 billion. It lost money on first-class mail, marketing mail, and periodicals.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Total operating expenses fell by 4.3% to $19.3 billion for the quarter.

    The total loss for the period was $2.26 billion, compared with $1.49 billion a year earlier.

    USPS has avoided collapse by defaulting on $48 billion in mandated payments over the past several years, Brennan said at a recent hearing called by the House Committee on Oversight and Reform.

    Brennan has called for legislative and regulatory changes to correct USPS’ busted business model, where its largest and most profitable business of first-class mail remains in a slump.

    “We anticipate that given our ongoing liquidity concerns, and without legislative action and regulatory reform, we may not be able to pay all legally required obligations and also invest in much-needed capital expenditures in 2019 and future years that are necessary to ensure our ability to fulfill our primary mission,” USPS said Friday.

    Early indications show that the USPS is headed for a credit crunch sometime in the early 2020s. The one question that we have: Could the government let the USPS fail in a push towards privatization?

  • China Factory Output Weakest In 17 Years, Everything Missed

    With currency turmoil and social unrest, China’s economic assault tonight was supposed be the great equalizer – confirming that a few trillion here or there and everything looks awesome and happy, and not a tiny bit angry (and that the Americans are not to blame for everything).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ahead of today’s data, broadly speaking, macro data globally has been weak, but in China, recent credit growth numbers slumped and steel production slowed, suggesting graver concerns. And so here it is…

    • China Industrial Production BIG MISS +4.8% (+6.0% exp, +6.3% prior)

    • China Retail Sales BIG MISS +7.6% (+8.6% exp, +9.8% prior)

    • China Fixed Asset Investment MISS +5.7% (+5.8% exp, +5.8% prior)

    • China Property Investment MISS +10.6% (+10.9% prior)

    • China Surveyed Jobless Rate MISS +5.3% (+6.0% exp, +6.3% prior)

    Now all that is left is to figure out if bad news is good news, or not…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    It might seem that President Trump is ‘winning’ this race for now.

    Some notables include:

    • Car sales weighed on retail

    • Jobless rise is significant

    • And Factory Output slowed to its weakest since 2002.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    The struggling autos sector seems to be the main brake on the Chinese economy:

    • Auto manufacturing (by industry) down 4.4% y/y

    • Motor vehicles (by product) down 11.5% y/y

    • and for retail, car sales dropped 2.6% y/y

    (The principle of “housing is for living in, not for speculation” was mentioned at the politburo meeting again last month.)

    Finally, for a few minutes/seconds the world spiked after China set the yuan fix slightly stronger; we are not so impressed, nor is the yuan or US equity futures…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And stocks and bond yields tumbling…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    So with inflation spiking, currency crashing, social-unrest; will the PBOC flood the nation with cash to ensure happiness at October’s CCP Anniversary?

    It’s just that the sugar high from the injection is getting shorter…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Chen Yuan, former deputy governor of PBOC warned that “the trade war is evolving into a financial war and a currency war.”

    And the yuan is getting weaker since this data…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Zhaopeng Xing, markets economist at ANZ Bank China:

    “The pretty weak data will offset the risk-on sentiment from tariff delays. Data today also show the PBOC needs to ease, such as through targeted RRR cuts or a policy rate cut. With the yuan exchange rate stable at around the 7 per dollar level, the window for easing is open.”

    As goes China, so goes the world.

  • Escobar: How Tehran Fits Into Russia-China Strategy

    Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Saker blog,

    Complex doesn’t even begin to describe the positioning of Iran-Russia in the geopolitical chessboard. What’s clear in our current, volatile moment is that they’re partners, as I previously reported. Although not strategic partners, as in the Russia-China tie-up, Russia-China-Iran remain the crucial triad in the ongoing, multi-layered, long-term Eurasia integration process.

    A few days after our Asia Times report, an article – based on “senior sources close to the Iranian regime” and crammed with fear-mongering, baseless accusations of corruption and outright ignorance about key military issues – claimed that Russia would turn the Iranian ports of Bandar Abbas and Chabahar into forward military bases complete with submarines, Spetsnaz special forces and Su-57 fighter jets, thus applying a “stranglehold” to the Persian Gulf.

    For starters, “senior sources close to the Iranian regime” would never reveal such sensitive national-security details, much less to Anglo-American foreign media. In my own case, even though I have made several visits to Iran while consistently reporting on Iran for Asia Times, and even though authorities at myriad levels know where I’m coming from, I have not managed to get answers from Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps generals to 16 detailed questions I sent nearly a month ago. According to my interlocutors, these are deemed “too sensitive” and, yes, a matter of national security.

    Predictably, the report was fully debunked. One of my top Tehran sources, asked about its veracity, was blunt: “Absolutely not.” After all, Iran’s constitution decisively forbids foreign troops stationed on national soil. The Majlis – Iranian parliament – would never approve such a move barring an extreme case, as in the follow-up to a US military attack.

    As for Russia-Iran military cooperation, the upcoming joint military exercises in the “northern part of the Indian Ocean,” including the Strait of Hormuz, are a first-ever such occasion, made possible only by a special agreement.

    Analyst Gennady Nechaev is closer to reality when he notes that in the event of growing Russia-Iran cooperation, the possibility would be open for “permanent basing of the Russian Navy in one of the Iranian ports with the provision of an airfield nearby – the same type of arrangement as Tartus and Hmeimim on the Mediterranean coast of Syria.”  To get there, though, would be a long and winding road.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And that brings us to Chabahar, which poses an interesting question. Chabahar is a deep sea port, on the Gulf of Oman and the key plank in India’s mini-Silk Road vision. India invested a lot in Chabahar, to have it connected by highway to Afghanistan and Central Asia and in the future by rail to the Caucasus. All that so India may bypass Pakistan as far as trade routes are concerned.

    Chabahar, though, may also become an important node of the New Silk Roads, or Belt and Road Initiative. India and China – as well as Russia – are members of the Shanghai Cooperation Organization. Iran, sooner or later, will also become a full SCO member. Only then the possibility “might” – and the emphasis is on “might” – open for the Russian or Chinese navy occasionally to dock at Chabahar, but still not to use it as a forward military base.

    Got oil, will travel

    On Iran, the Russia-China strategic partnership is working in parallel. China’s priority is energy supplies – and Beijing works the chessboard accordingly. The Chinese ambassador to the United Arab Emirates just issued a trial balloon, mentioning that Beijing might consider escorting oil tankers across the Persian Gulf and the Strait of Hormuz. That could happen independently or – the dangling carrot – as part of Washington’s Operation Sentinel, which for the moment has managed to find only one “coalition of the willing” member: the UK.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What’s actually happening right now in the Persian Gulf is way more entertaining. As I confirmed with energy traders in Doha late last month, demand for oil right now is higher than in 2018. And in consequence Iran continues to sell most of its oil.

    A tanker leaves Iran with transponder off; the oil is transferred to another tanker on the high seas; and then it is relabeled.

    According to a trader, “If you take two to three million barrels a day off the market by sanctions on Venezuela and Iran, plus the OPEC cutbacks, you would have to see a higher price.”

    There is no higher price. Brent crude remains near a seven-month low, around US$60 a barrel. This means that Iran continues to sell, mostly to China. That trial balloon floated in the UAE might well be China camouflaging its continued purchase of Iranian oil.

    Iranian Foreign Minister Javad Zarif has been proving again and again his diplomatic mastery, running rings around the Donald Trump administration. But all major decisions in Iran come from Supreme Leader Ayatollah Khamenei. That also applies to Tehran’s position in relation to multi-level forms of support from the Russia-China strategic partnership.

    What the past few months have made crystal clear is how Russia-China’s magnetic pull is attracting key Eurasia players Iran, Turkey and Pakistan. And make no mistake: As much as Tehran may be extremely proud of its political independence, it is reassuring to know that Iran is, and will continue to be, a definitive red line for Russia-China.

  • China Mocks Trump Tariff Delay As Proof He Is Losing The Trade War

    On Tuesday Trump pulled off another signature twitter shock, when just after noon, the President bowed to pressure from U.S. businesses, the stock market and concerns over the economic fallout of his trade war with China, delaying the imposition of new tariffs until December on a majority of consume goods including cell phones, laptop computers, video game consoles, certain toys, computer monitors, footwear, clothing, textiles, kitchen utensils, cookware, some watches, musical instruments, paper clips, children’s chairs, bouncers, some sporting goods, fishing tackle, combs, brushes, cigarette lighters and pipes, vacuum flasks and diapers. As we said earlier, it is almost as if Trump realized that a surge in prices of consumer goods which would inevitably have taken place had the tariffs kicked in on Sept 1…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … would have ruined any plans the Fed may have to cut rates further, just as Trump demanded.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tuesday’s move to hit the pause button in his fight with China came as senior officials on both sides had their first phone conversation since Trump threatened the tariffs at the beginning of this month. It also cheered markets that had been growing increasingly concerned over the impact of trade tensions on a slowing global economy, and in response, stocks halted a steep two-day slide.

    There were some question how Trump picked the list of goods he did to delay tariffs on. According to Axios, “the list of goods from China that won’t be subject to a 10% tariff until Dec. 15 is made up of “products where 75% or more of the 2018 U.S. imports of that product were from China,” according to an email sent to trade groups from the U.S. Trade Representative Office. And while the significance of the 75% cutoff is unclear, it is likely the threshold level for substitute goods beyond which the USTR finds that the risk of an inflationary spike is too high.

    So what happens next?

    According to Standard Chartered’s Steven Englander, the US will now expect China to reciprocate by buying US agricultural products in the coming weeks. That may very well not happen.But while it is unclear if the lack of a reciprocal “olive branch” would be a dealbreaker for Trump, what is likely is that any widespread shift in sentiment that Trump retreated and waved a white flag of surrender, could very quickly undo the tariff delay as the last thing Trump wants, is to be seen as weak and ineffectual, or his trade war strategy as inefficient, not by his base, and certainly not by his opponent, China.

    And yet, in the first reactions to Trump’s announced tariff delay, this is precisely how China is describing today’s event.

    As the state-owned, nationalist tabloid Global Times “explains” to the Chinese population, “Chinese experts said the sudden postponing of impending tariffs showed that the maximum pressure tactics of the US are losing their bite when it comes to China.”

    As the Chinese tabloid further notes, “these measures are set to greatly reduce the weight of US tariffs, as electronics goods alone account for about $130 billion” and adds that according to “Chinese experts reached by the Global Times on Tuesday night the latest development showed the US maximum pressure tactic is not working on China, but they said it could pave the way for trade talks scheduled for September. However, they were cautious about the potential for any flip-flopping.”

    “The US has realized that its maximum pressure strategy to force China back to the negotiating table has not worked as expected. Washington knows that only through talks can the two sides reach a deal,” Wang Jun, chief economist at Zhongyuan Bank, told the Global Times on Tuesday.

    The quoted “expert” also said he doubted (correctly) whether the decision would stand, given Washington’s flip-flop approach in trade negotiations: “Trump is looking for a way out. It also shows that both China and the US are highly dependent on each other, and the practice of imposing tariffs does not necessarily bring China to its knees,” said Liang Qi, a professor from Nankai University.

    Liang then added that “we also can see that imposing tariffs may harm the interests of the US, making it hard for Trump’s re-election”, suggesting that not only is the tariff delay a tacit ceasefire offer, if not outright surrender, it is also a political gambit that hands over all the leverage to China, which now will have the upper hand to determine the fate of Trump’s re-election depending on how it proceeds with trade negotiations.

    Bai Ming, a research fellow at the Chinese Academy of International Trade and Economic Cooperation said that the tariff increase delay shows the US is not willing to cut off the two countries’ negotiation channels when talks are on the verge of failure.

    But Bai warned that it might also be a stalling tactic as the US has found that its extreme pressure on China has not generated the results it had hoped for.

    And so, with the Global Times repeating no less than three times that the US tactic of “extreme (or maximum) pressure” has failed, the implication is simple: Trump’s trade war strategy has led him to a dead end, and the result is that China now has the upper hand.

    That could be a problem, because even if the Global Times is right in its assessment of the balance of power, all that would take for Trump to change his mind is to be perceived as failing – or worse, weak – in his campaign against China. And that’s precisely what the top power echelon in Beijing is now telegraphing to the population via the state-owned media.

    Which leads us to believe that with Navarro still firmly in control of the trade war strategy, it is only a matter of days if not hours, before Trump once again flip flops, just as he did after the G-20 summit where the two nations allegedly reached a “ceasefire” only for it to crash and burn just weeks later.

    And so, unless China buys a lot of US agri products in the coming weeks, and we don’t see any specific reason why Xi would want to “bend the knee” to a president Trump who is according to the Chinese media losing the trade war, we fully expect today’s relief rally to reverse quickly as Trump realizes that delay or no delay, a deal with China is simply impossible, as the “trade war” is not about trade at all, but an ever escalating conflict of two civilizations, one which may be resolved on the battlefield, either literally or metaphorically, but will never be decided on a piece of paper.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 13th August 2019

  • Dear Democrats – This Is What Happens When You Nationalize Healthcare

    Day after day, hour after hour, Americans are spoon-fed some utopian vision of a future of Medicare-for-all (anyone really who can make it across the border) as the solution to all that ails the health system across all states.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, for anyone who has actually lived under nationalized healthcare, reality is far uglier.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As Statista’s Martin Armstrong notes, a new survey of 901 GPs in England by industry publication Pulse has revealed average waiting times for routine appointments to have risen over two weeks for the first time. As our infographic shows, the average wait in 2016 was 12.8 days and has risen since then to 14.8 days in 2019.

    Infographic: GP waiting times now exceed 2 weeks | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    The research also revealed that 22 percent of GPs said their patients had to wait for more than three weeks. As Pulse reports, the demand for GPs has been rising in recent years, while the number of GPs has fallen.

    One GP who recorded a four to five week waiting list said:

    “Our list size continues to grow because there are so many housing developments. We are poorly remunerated under the GMS contract for the hard work that we do. Patient demand continues to soar with higher expectations despite dreadful government funding. MPs have a lot to answer for.”

    Professor Helen Stokes-Lampard, chair of the Royal College of GPs, said:

    “The College has long been raising the alarm about escalating resource and workforce pressures in general practice, and the negative impact this is having on our patients. GPs and our teams are making more consultations than ever before – more than a million a day across the UK – but as our population grows and more people present with multiple conditions, we desperately need more GPs and more time to give our patients the care they deserve.”

    Dear Democrat, how long did you have to wait – just to see the doctor – the last time you fell ill?

  • Can Salvini Beat The Italian Troika?

    Authored by Tom Luongo,

    Italian leader Matteo Salvini is in the headlines again, now openly threatening divorce with his coalition partner, Five Star Movement (M5S).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Salvini unleashed another round of rhetorical bombs at M5S to get on them board with his part of the agenda. But that seems to have failed and he is now prepared to go to Parliament and withdraw his party, Lega, from the coalition government which will lead to new elections.

    He had put off any kind of talk of new elections in the past because the opinion polling wasn’t strong enough to grant Lega the kind of majority it needed to govern without strings.

    The coalition is dead but it may not matter.

    The biggest problem Salvini faced, however, wasn’t M5S’s internal strife and contradictions. His biggest obstacle lies in the Troika of Technocrats that hold all the real power in Italy as it pertains to the European Union.

    That Troika is President Sergei Mattarella, Prime Minister Giuseppe Conte and Finance Minister Giovanni Tria and they are the problem, as I wrote back in June.

    Prime Minister Giuseppe Conti and Economy Minister Giovanni Tria are in open revolt against the coalition leaders over the upcoming budget fight with the EU.

    Reuters is reporting this morning that these two are working together to undermine the internal reforms Salvini is proposing to spur economic growth from the ground up by instituting a flat tax and spending a whopping $3 billion more than Brussels wants them to on rebuilding crumbling Italian infrastructure.

    Conte and Tria were essentially hand-picked by Mattarella to slow the current government’s roll and make nice with Brussels if they painted outside the lines. It was Mattarella who nixed Paolo Savona as the coalition’s pick for Finance Minister and it nearly saw him impeached for overstepping his authority.

    Savona was deeply anti-euro.

    Conte was also a compromise pick to get the coalition formed and deal with the fallout later. The latest threats by Salvini to take down the government is something he has been goaded into doing in the past when the polls were less definitive.

    But today his threat is a much bigger one. When Lega was polling 32-34% there was no election calculus that would allow them to take control and still not be saddled with an albatross; either a spiteful M5S or a coalition of minor parties with deep state Italian ties, like Forza Italia.

    Today, however, the calculus is different. Lega is polling at 38-40%,

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And that puts them in a much different position. Remember that the Italian Deep State pushed forward under former Prime Minister Matteo Renzi the new election law that allocates one-third of parliamentary seats by marjoritarian, or first-past-the-post, voting. The remaining two-thirds are allocated proportionally.

    Now, this was done to blunt the rise of Euroskeptic parties like M5S and create over-representation for establishment parties. But that only works if the establishment parties’ support doesn’t collapse.

    Oops.

    Look at what just happened in Ukraine, with a similar system. Volodymyr Zelensky’s Servant of the People took less than a majority of the votes but won more than 55% of the seats. Now, Ukraine’s internal politics are such that controlling the Verkovna Rada doesn’t that much, but it’s a good start that Zelensky won’t have to govern with a coalition partner.

    I don’t have any idea of the internal, regional numbers for Italy but if Lega pulls more than 40% in a general election it is likely they will have enough seats to form a majority government without partners. That’s what Salvini is banking on. And he should be confident given he trends in polling and the frustration with M5S, who were the recipients of support out of pure protest.

    Now that there is competition for that protest vote and a leader with a clear path for Italy, it’s no surprise that they have fallen and Lega risen.

    The worst-case scenario I can see for Salvini would be having to coalition with the ideologically aligned Brothers of Italy (FdL).

    Silvio Berlusconi’s Forza Italia (FI) is failing quickly, as is M5S, whose support has halved since last March’s election.

    This election calculus creates a much more stable situation that what shook out of 2018’s election. And it is the reason why Salvini looks ready to take the fight to the Italian Troika.

    The key here is President Mattarella whose job it is to keep in place people loyal to Europe and defeat Salvini in any real reforms. So, color me shocked that there’s a hit piece on Bloomberg attacking his lack of accomplishmentswhile over-stating his promises.

    Most importantly, Salvini appears more interested in his popularity than in policy. He revels in tweeting on pretty much anything – from the beer he is drinking to celebrating the birthday of the Virgin Mary – and in DJ-ing shirtless in a beach club on Italy’s coast. But when one looks at how much of the League’s program he has actually implemented, voters have little to celebrate.

    Take economic policy. The League has failed to deliver on its pledge to bring in a “flat tax” to lower Italy’s notoriously high rates. Instead, the tax burden has increased in the first three months of this year to 38% of gross domestic product from 37.7% in the same period of 2018, according to Italy’s statistics office. Salvini has also failed to deliver on a law which would give greater autonomy to Italy’s northern regions – the League’s electoral base – because of opposition from Five Star, which fears losing support in the South.

    Yes, Salvini has failed to deliver on his promises as the junior member of a coalition government run by inept leftists and sabotaged by his own Prime Minister, Finance Minister and President.

    The writer, Ferdinando Giugliano, then states that Salvini promised to get Italy out of the euro, which he explicitly did not campaign on nor has he talked about openly since being in power. That Salvini wants to get Italy out of the euro without concessions and changes to the EU’s finance rules is well known. But it’s not something he’s agitating for.

    Laying the plans for leaving the euro through the mini-BOT? Of course.

    Is that a bargaining chip to use in negotiations with Brussels? Absolutely.

    If you look at what Giugliano is saying it’s clear that his opening statement is the most accurate in the entire piece. “Matteo Salvini… likes to play the long game.”

    Which is exactly what he should be doing, as I’ve pointed out consistently for nearly two years now (hereherehere). At every turn Salvini must cast others as the problem if he wants to win politically, which isn’t hard because it’s the truth.

    And the more he does this the higher in the polls Lega rises.

    With numbers where they are Salvini is looking at the opportunity to force the Troika to back down. This was why the rumors of forcing a cabinet reshuffle sound plausible. Now that he’s calling for a new election they could all be out of jobs.

    The best outcome was for Brussels to keep Salvini saddled to M5S, retaining the status quo for as long as possible. Oops.

    But Salvini, in constant contact with his fellow Euroskeptic leaders like Viktor Orban in Hungary, Nigel Farage in the U.K., Marine Le Pen in France, knows that timing in politics is everything. Poking this snake now, going for a consolidation of power the people seem to want of him, while Brussels is up to its neck in Brexit, new divisions within the EU parliament, and financial markets becoming more unmoored from reality every day is the right move.

    If he pulls this off he could change the face of Italian politics for a generation and the face of Europe for a century.

  • 'Fall Armyworm' Invades China; Wreaks Havoc On Agriculture Lands

    China’s agriculture ministry warned in June that it found fall armyworms in 21 provinces, across 333,000 hectares of crops.

    Fall armyworms (Spodoptera frugiperda) are a destructive garden pest that can destroy a variety of crops as well as grasses.

    Chinese officials are worried about prevention and control measures of the pest might be failing, which could lead to crop losses this year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Beijing warned fall armyworms could damage hundreds, if not thousands of hectares of crops, leading to possible food security issues for the country.

    To counter the pest, China has requested farmers in the 21 provinces to use government-approved pesticides.

    The “heart-devouring worm” – as locals call it – has spread almost 1,900 miles north since migrating from neighboring Myanmar earlier this year, now threatens 21 provinces and regions in China and could heavily impact the country’s grain output.

    In Yunnan, a province in southwestern China, the pest has already destroyed 86,000 hectares of corn, sugarcane, sorghum, and ginger crops.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Fall armyworm started to spread through Africa and Asia in 2016, these pests, which are moths, fly 60 miles per night, is very challenging for farmers and governments to exterminate.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The pests have strained small farmers, who produce at least 90% of the country’s crop.

    In hard-hit Yunnan, the local government has installed 3,500 monitoring sites at farms to observe the pests and agriculture conditions, the provincial agriculture bureau wrote to Reuters via email.

    Sugarcane farmer Yan in Mengkang village said the only answer to the fall armyworm disaster is to spray crops with pesticide.

    “You have to keep spraying chemicals. If you don’t kill the worm, you will end up penniless,” he said.

    Some farmers have had a slow response to act, thus jeopardizing their crop yields during harvest time.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hu Gao, a professor of insect ecology at Nanjing Agricultural University, said the pests have ruined crops in the country’s south, but the outlook for corn production in the north wasn’t affected as much.

    As the destructive pest spread to agriculture provinces, this could lead Beijing to purchase even more grains from Latin American countries, like Brazil, Argentina, and Paraguay.

    As of last week, China halted all agriculture purchases with the US and continued ramping up agriculture imports from Latin America and the rest of the world. The halt in purchases come in response to the Trump administration’s announcement 10% tariff on an additional $300 billion of Chines imports earlier this month.

    China is also dealing with an unprecedented outbreak of African swine fever called “pig Ebola,” is ravaging the country’s pig industry through 2H19.

    About a quarter of the country’s pig herd has been wiped out because of the disease.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Due to trade war disputes, China slapped American pork with 62% tariffs.

    China’s agriculture complex is being hit with several disasters,  that if it wasn’t for the trade war, American farmers would be taking full advantage of. But you never know, China could get so desperate, because the last thing they need with Hong Kong spiraling out of control is food inflation.

  • Red Flag Laws (Or How To Repeal The Second Amendment Soviet-Style Without A Pesky Vote)

    Authored by John Wilder via WilderWealthyWise.com,

    “Now, you see all these red flags?  Trouble spots.  Southeastern Asia.  The Caribbean.  The Congo.  I’ll give you one guess as to who’s responsible.” – Doctor Goldfoot and the Bikini Machine

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I look much better after I’ve had a cup of coffee.  And after I’ve found my axe.

    I know that you, gentle reader, have thoughts about guns that are probably pretty similar to mine, so I’d like to take you on a short walk through history, specifically the history of politics and psychiatry.  I promise, it will make more sense than the lyrics to the Manfred Mann song Blinded by the Light.  What the hell is a go-cart Mozart, and why is he checking out the weather chart, anyway?

    (Related:  Civil War Weather Reports – Civil War II Weather Report: Spicy Time ComingCivil War Weather Report #2, Censorship, Stalin, and a Bunch of Links, and Civil War Weather Report #3: Violence, China, and Lots of Links)

    The history of psychiatry is tied directly to the political.

    I have seen a person suffering from schizophrenia to such a degree that they were sure that MTV® video stars were stealing songs directly from their brain and that they were also a surgeon who regularly performed operations on world leaders and stored their organs in the freezer for safe keeping.

    If no one has ever told you that there are human organs belonging to world leaders in their fridge in a completely matter-of-fact “would you like a glass of water” voice, well, all I can tell you is that my first thought was one of complete disbelief that I had heard them right.  Yes, I asked for them to repeat that statement.  Twice.

    I walked over and checked their freezer.   Thankfully the only things in it were some frozen pizzas and ancient ice cubes.  I assure you I was talking to their shrink that afternoon and they were involuntarily committed by 5PM.  They were helped, and after being put on some appropriately industrial levels of anti-psychotic medication, did okay enough to be released back into the wild.  As long as they stayed on their meds.

    I know that there are actually crazy people that really need help.

    But I also know this:  psychiatry is still the most politically abused medical profession.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Okay, if Depp isn’t crazy, why does he keep starring in movies like this? 

    Examples of political abuse of psychiatry?  There are many.  When I mentioned this topic to The Mrs., she immediately said, “the Soviet Union.”  And that’s the example I thought of first, too.  The Soviets systematically used diagnosis of psychological disorders such as “philosophical intoxication” and “sluggish schizophrenia” to put people who didn’t like Marxism into mental institutions.  And, no, those diagnoses aren’t lame jokes – those were really Soviet-era diagnoses.

    How many were caught up in the psychological gulags?

    We really don’t know since those records are still secret, but in 1978 at least 4.5 million Soviet citizens were listed as having mental health problems.  In 1988, perhaps thinking that they might face their own version of Soviet Nuremburg Trials for Crimes Against Humanity, Soviet leaders had over 800,000 thousand patients removed from the list of the mentally ill.  Paperwork error, surely?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Okay, with all those red flags, how did they not see the collapse of communism coming?

    Did the Soviets condemn thousands with false diagnosis?  Nearly certainly.  Hundreds of thousands?  Very likely.

    Millions?

    Probably.  Think of it, millions of people falsely diagnosed with a mental illness due to political beliefs and sent to asylums and work camps.  Certainly some were executed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Soviets allowed ownership of smoothbore weapons for hunting.  Except when they didn’t.  Which was most of the time.  Oh, and the definition of sweet summer child is:  a person who doesn’t know the hardships of winter, often used when someone has no experience with a particular (stressful) thing, which may describe a generation that rhymes with perennial.

    Okay, it was just the Soviet Union, right?

    No.  Cuba did the same thing.  There is evidence that China is still doing it, and likely on scale similar to that of the Soviet Union.  Thankfully the World Psychiatric Association took the lead in investigations.  Oh, they didn’t?  The World Psychiatric Association pretty much ignored it and said that people associated with Falun Gong are nuts and that putting them in asylums run by the state security apparatus (not the medical directorate) was perfectly normal?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One flew east, one flew west, one flew over the cuckoo’s nest . . . and if you haven’t see the movie, you should, it’s a lighthearted comedy and perfect for a first date.

    Okay, that’s just China.  Thankfully this would never happen in the United States.

    Oh, it did?

    Sure.  In the 1920’s dissidents (like one who protested the trial of Sacco and Vanzetti) were put into asylums.  In the 1960’s members of the American Psychological Association smeared presidential candidate Barry Goldwater in the press by diagnosing him.  But that wasn’t political, right?

    Thankfully it isn’t happening now.

    Oh, in 2012 a whistleblower with the NYPD was railroaded on mental health?  Ouch.  But New York is corrupt.

    It would never happen based on political motives, right?

    Dinesh D’Souza, author and filmmaker on the Right was convicted of a crime based on giving too much money to a political campaign.  He admitted he was wrong.  The Federal Judge involved in the case sentenced D’Souza not only to prison, he sentenced D’Souza to years of mental health counselling despite a licensed psychologist saying that D’Souza was just fine mentally.

    So, yes.  Psychiatry is a political weapon.  It’s not like the Left has sentenced political opponents to chemotherapy, but I hear that they’re working on it.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yes, this is a common sense way to use psychiatry!

    This corrupt branch of medicine is the background of the Red Flag Laws.

    The idea is that we’ll create laws to remove rights from people without due process, with the presumption that individuals should lose a right guaranteed by the Constitution®.  A single accuser, with no evidence can result in gun confiscation to a law-abiding citizen.  Sadly this already happens – people with contested domestic restraining orders (a standard tactic in divorces nowadays) lose their rights, although I’ve heard of people fighting these orders and winning – at least there is a pretense at due process.

    The claim that the ability to strip people of rights won’t be abused is laughable.  In every country that’s been infected by psychiatry, it has been twisted to meet political ends.  Yes, there are crazy people.  I’ve seen one as I related above.  And, if you did a brain scan, there is a physical basis for schizophrenia.  It’s real.  It is a medical condition.  But remember, these are the same psychiatrists that would diagnose me as nuts if I believed I was be five years older than I really am, but are perfectly fine with children younger than the age of five claiming they are a different sex than their genetics have made them.

    Furthermore, the medical profession as a whole is maybe a bit, well, mental*.  In one study it was claimed that 50% of female doctors could be diagnosed with a mental disease.  I wonder again why my ex didn’t take up medicine?  (*Aesop LINK excluded, unless pimp-slapping in the comments section is classified as a mental disorder.)

    Oh, and psychologists have nearly the highest rates of suicide of any profession.  Yes, any profession, including the people who make balloon animals in Mauschwitz Disneyland® for chubby children with hands sticky from chocolate ice cream.  Perfectly stable.  And this is also the same profession whose international governing body (WPA) was just fine with political repression in the name of psychiatry.

    Besides being oppressive, the Red Flag laws would not have helped in latest shootings – these people lawfully and legally got their rifles. 

    But they will form the basis for taking away guns for…

    • Conspiracy Theories – Believing anything other than the Official Narrative® will become a basis for exclusion of lawful firearms ownership, despite the fact that throughout history, many conspiracy theories have been proven true. Google® MKULTRA.    That happened.  But the FBI® is now warning that you are a danger if you don’t believe the Official Narrative©.

    • Antisocial Behavior – Ever not want to hang around people? You’re antisocial, and that’s dangerous, citizen.  No AR for you!

    • Websites Visited – Going to unapproved sites? Thinking unapproved thoughts?  Glockblock™!

    • Comments Made When You Were 16 – Wow, did you really say that maybe the Crusades weren’t all bad? No pew-pew for you, hater.

    • Not Believing in the Easter Bunny Socialism – Well, I think I covered that above.

    The irony is this will have the impact of keeping people away from mental health professionals.  This will keep people from seeking help when they’re a little depressed, because the consequences of having a “health record” might prevent them from future opportunity – the only safe way to live life would be to stay away from health professionals – and not answer certain questions your M.D. might have for you with a polite BFYTW when asked why you’re not answering.  Oh, but that probably puts you on the antisocial list.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Texas may or may not be your cup of tea, but they certainly got some things right once upon a time.

    Psychiatry is on pretty iffy ground in many cases already.  As an experiment, a group of doctors sent people to a psychiatrist with one symptom – they heard a voice.  No other symptom.  They were perfectly normal, mentally healthy people.  In one case, the person was committed to a mental health facility (as I recall) for several weeks with zero symptoms.  I tried to look it up, but, surprise, most Google® searches right now link commitment to . . . violence.  Even that’s not a comfortable thought.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Soviet mental health nurse.  Not shown:  tenth guard, who is now an inmate.

    The single scariest thing to me is watching a human mind erode – what was once a rational human disappears.  It’s what makes (to me) zombies scary.  They look like humans.  They used to be a normal human.  But that rational human being is now gone, replaced by someone who has no real tie to reality while the external form remains.

    I realize that there is a time and a place for psychiatric care.

    But psychiatrists are already owned by the Left.  The Left sees you as crazy already.  The Left views your dissent from their agenda as a mental disorder, one punishable by death, if need be.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I’ll leave the last word to Alexander Solzhenitsyn, who is really pictured above while in the gulag:  “I’ll take Solzhenitsyn on Gun Control for $1000, Alex.  Oh, look – the Daily Double®!”

    “And how we burned in the camps later, thinking:  what would things have been like if every security operative, when he went out at night to make an arrest, had been uncertain whether he would return alive and had to say good-bye to his family?  Or if, during periods of mass arrests, as for example in Leningrad, when they arrested a quarter of the entire city, people had not simply sat there in their lairs, paling with terror at every bang of the downstairs door and at every step on the staircase, but had understood they had nothing left to lose and had boldly set up in the downstairs hall an ambush of half a dozen people with axes, hammers, pokers, or whatever else was at hand?  [They] would very quickly have suffered a shortage of officers and transport and, notwithstanding all of Stalin’s thirst, the cursed machine would have ground to a halt!  If . . . if . . . we didn’t love freedom enough. And even more – we had no awareness of the real situation . . . .  We purely and simply deserved everything that happened afterward.”

  • Iraq Accuses Pentagon Of "Extremely Exaggerating" Numbers Of ISIS Fighters

    The US Department of Defense Inspector General released a formal report last week which claimed ISIS retains between 14,000 and 18,000 members in Iraq and Syria, which Pentagon officials used to argue for a continuing US troops presence in Syria. They touted the report as “verification” that a US draw down in Syria had enabled a a resurgent ISIS.

    The Iraqi military, however, which partners with US forces, has rejected the report, calling it “extremely exaggerated”

    “The figure announced by the Pentagon is extremely exaggerated,” the spokesman for the Joint Operations Command, Brig. Gen. Yahya Rasool, said in a press statement, as quoted by Iraqi news agency Malouma and regional outlet Kurdistan24.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Shiite Popular Mobilization Forces in Iraq near the border with Syria. Image source: Reuters

    The general added that Iraqi national forces are in their third and final phase of an operation meant to clean out final pockets of Islamic State sleeper cells. 

    Last Tuesday’s Pentagon report presented to Congress asserted that ISIS terrorists are “growing again in power” in Syria and Iraq, and painted a general picture that to the extent American troops leave the region, the Islamic State will correspondingly reestablish itself. 

    “Despite losing its territorial ‘caliphate,’ the Islamic State in Iraq and Syria (ISIS) solidified its insurgent capabilities in Iraq and was resurging in Syria this quarter,” the report says.

    It should be remembered that it’s precisely the same argument Syria hawks have repeatedly used to stymie previous plans voiced by President Trump to “bring the troops home”. Baghdad officials themselves have also increasingly seen little need for the unpopular US troops presence on Iraqi soil. 

    Like Osama bin Laden and al-Qaeda in the post-9/11 years, the constantly inflated “ISIS threat” is the new bogeyman that keeps on giving: neocons and hawks will cling to it so long as in enables expanding American presence in the Middle East

  • Overstock CEO Turned Over Docs To DOJ "In Greatest Political Scandal In US History"

    Via SaraACarter.com,

    Overstock CEO Patrick Byrne delivered to the Department of Justice a number of documents, including emails and text messages, in April, regarding both the origins of the Russian investigation, and an FBI operation into Hillary Clinton with which he was personally involved during the first months of 2016, according to a U.S. official who spoke SaraACarter.com.

    Byrne has also confirmed the account.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Byrne claims the documents, which have not been made public and are currently under investigation by the DOJ, are allegedly communications he had with the FBI concerning both the Clinton investigation and the origins of the Russian investigation. SaraACarter.comdid not review the documents, which are now under review by law enforcement.

    He approached the DOJ and met with lawyers on April 5th and 30th. The first meeting was without counsel in Washington D.C. A source directly familiar with the interviews confirmed Byrne’s account of the meetings.

    DOJ officials said they could not comment on Byrne’s allegations.

    “I gave to the DOJ documents concerning both the origin of the Russian probe and the probe into Hillary Clinton, both of which I was involved in, and both of which turned out to be less about law enforcement than they were about political espionage,” Byrne told SaraACarter.com Monday.

    He noted that the communications will prove that the FBI also had an operation into Clinton Foundation that he was directly involved in.

    “This is going to become the greatest political scandal in US history,” he said.

    “If we survive it, and if Rule of Law returns to America, it will be due to one man: Bill Barr.”

    Several weeks ago, FBI officials told SaraACarter.com that they declined to comment on Byrne’s allegations.

    Byrne said the investigation into Clinton was one of the main reasons he came forward. This reporter first published Byrne’s story about his relationship with now convicted Russian gun right’s activist Maria Butina. She pleaded guilty in 2018 for failing to register as a foreign agent in the U.S. and is now serving out her sentence, which ends in October.

    Byrne’s claims regarding the Clinton Foundation investigation are not without parallel. According to numerous officials the FBI had an ongoing investigation. Whistleblower and former government informant William Campbell was interviewed in 2018, by bureau agents from the Little Rock, Arkansa’s field office. According to Campbell, who first spoke to this reporter in 2017, he was asked by FBI agents whether donations to the Clintons charitable organization from Russia were used to influence U.S. nuclear policy during the Obama Administration. Specifically, he was asked about the sale of 20 percent of Uranium One.

    As also reported in 2018, by John Solomon with The Hill, the “agents questioned him extensively about claims the Russians made to him that they had routed millions of dollars to an American lobbying firm in 2010 and 2011 with the expectation it would be used to help President Clinton’s charitable global initiative while major uranium decisions were pending before Hillary Clinton’s State Department.”

    Byrne, told SaraACarter.com that the FBI was also investigating Clinton’s charitable organizations in the first half of 2016, and that he was directly involved in one of the operations being conducted by the FBI. He did not give details regarding the operation saying but said it directly dealt with Clinton and whether or not there was pay for play.

    On Monday, Byrne appeared on Fox Business Network with David Asman, revealing his claims about the Clinton investigation.

    “I ended up in the center of the Russian and the Clinton investigations,” said Byrne.

    “I have all the answers. I have been sitting on them waiting for America to get there. Last summer I figured out… what they all are is all about political espionage. It had nothing to do with law enforcement, it was all political espionage. Here’s the bottom line. There is a deep state like a submarine lurking just beneath the waves of the periscope depth watching our shipping lanes. And a nuclear ice breaker called the USS Bill Barr has snuck up on them and is about to ram midship.”

    “That’s about to happen and I think we’re about to see the biggest scandal in American history as a result. But it was all political. Everything you think you know about Russia and Clinton investigations is a lie,” Byrne told Atman.

    “It’s all a cover-up. It was all political espionage.”

    Connecticut attorney John Durham, who has been appointed by Justice Department investigator Attorney General William Barr is probing the FBI’s handling of the investigation into Russia probe, and according to several sources is investigating the full extent of Byrne’s claims and the documentation he provided in April.

  • Morgan Stanley: The Bear Market Started In January 2018 And Is About To Get Worse

    One month after Morgan Stanley cut its allocation to stocks to the lowest on record, and less than two weeks after the bank’s chief equity strategist Michael Wilson laid out graphically why he thought stocks were about to crash just as the S&P was hitting new all time highs…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … Wilson was happy to take his victory lap and in a report this morning in which he declared that not only is “the bear alive and kicking”, with the S&P reversing perfectly off Morgan Stanley’s previous resistance level, and sliding more than half way to the current support of 2,700…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … but went on to say that the bear market actually started all the way back in late 2017 when the bull market for global equities ended, and has been drifting even lower since.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And while many market strategists have been fixated on the S&P 500 (the highest quality and most defensive equity market in the world) making new all-time highs this year, Wilson would point out that almost 80 percent of all major indices we track have not made new highs and are more than 10 percent below those highs. This, to the Morgan Stanley strategist, is a very different picture than what was observed in January 2018 when virtually every major equity index around the world was at an all-time high and overbought and why the bank made its call for a cyclical bear market to begin during 2018. Indeed, the chart above shows a striking difference between the 2016-17 period (a bull market) and then 2018-19, which to Wilson, “looks like an incomplete cyclical bear.” And no, the S&P 500 does not look much different, having gone nowhere since January 2018.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Other indicators seem to suggest that every burst of enthusiasm is nothing more than a squeeze in a sweeping bear. One is Morgan Stanley’s Equity Risk Indicator (ERI), a gauge of US equity market sentiment and positioning, which has not reached “exuberance” territory for 18 months.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As Wilson explains, “this trend is consistent with the persistently negative sentiment seen during the bear markets of 2008-2009 and 2015-2016 and helps to reinforce our view that we have been in a rolling bear market since early 2018.” A key difference between today’s environment and those periods is that the market has made multiple new highs since January 2018 while sentiment has been depressed. This reinforces the notion that, below the benchmark level, there has been little confidence, and returns have been difficult to generate. And as MS further notes, “the pessimistic sentiment/positioning environment we have been in is a reflection of the challenging asset allocation backdrop that has persisted since early 2018.”

    Wilson also finds it interesting that individual investor sentiment – as measured by the AAII Survey Bull vs. Bear Spread – has meaningfully diverged from consumer sentiment. Despite the fact that the market is still near all-time highs and consumer sentiment has remained elevated, individual investors have expressed a more pessimistic tone. This is in line with what MS has been pounding the table on in recent months, as the bank believes that “late 2017/early 2018 was the euphoric top for this cycle and do not expect… individual investor sentiment to return to euphoric levels for a sustained period of time before the end of this cycle.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Curiously, it may have been none other than the Fed that vindicated the Morgan Stanley bearish call. As Wilson writes, explaining why he thought recently the S&P would fail to break out – as has been now confirmed – whereas many commentators have either blamed the Fed’s poor communication or the re-escalation of trade tensions, Morgan Stanley thinks it is more about the market simply focusing back on fundamentals and risks that were always there. And as noted on many prior occasions, a Fed pause is always bullish for stocks but once the Fed actually starts cutting rates, it typically spells trouble because cuts usually accompany the end of the cycle, not a mid cycle pause. All one has to do is look back at the last two cycles to see that once the Fed cut it did not bode well for equity markets.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That’s precisely what appears to be happening this time around…. but don’t blame the Fed: according to MS, Powell simply reversed his position over the past 9 months because the outlook for the economy, both here and abroad, deteriorated significantly, and as a result, Wilson believes that many investors are too complacent about the risks to the US economy from the ongoing corporate profits recession.

    While trade tensions are weighing on corporate confidence and the various Purchasing Manager Indices (PMIs), we think the deterioration in corporate profits and margins is the bigger driver.

    Indeed, after the Morgan Stanley Business Conditions Index plunged back in May, the outlook for corporate confidence and PMIs has failed to improve As the most recent Morgan Stanley Business Conditions Index (MSBCI) published last week revealed, after a snap back in June, it moved sharply lower again to the second-lowest reading since the last recession.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This is concerning because as we discussed two months ago, there is a very close relationship between the MSBCI and the PMIs. Worse, there is an even tighter relationship between the MSBCI Composite Index and FY2 earnings revisions – the two have a correlation around 80%. A quick look at the two series suggests downward earnings revisions have yet to bottom and may retest the lows of the 2015/16 global recession, and further deterioration in the MSBCI would suggest even more downside to earnings, which likely does not bode well for stocks in the near term.

    Of course, with both sentiment and earnings now likely to suffer continued downward pressure, it only underscore the Morgan Stanley proposition that a bear market started as long as two years ago.  Indeed, when looking at the US markets alone, the S&P 600 (small caps) and S&P 400 (mid caps) have both failed to make new highs this year and are both more than 10 percent below those levels from last September. The same is true for the even broader Value Line Index.

    Meanwhile, only 5 out of the 11 S&P 500 sectors have made new highs this year, 3 of which are defensive (Utilities, Staples, and REITs). The other 2 are Technology and Consumer Discretionary, and while growth potential for many companies in the Technology sector is clear, the potential for most stocks in Consumer Discretionary is less clear. The sector’s performance has also been skewed by Amazon, which is more a technological disrupter than a good read on the consumer.

    * * *

    But perhaps the most convincing evidence for those who question if we are still in the midst of a cyclical bear market – according to Wilson – is the fact that long-term Treasury bonds have defeated the best equity market in the world over the past 18 months, especially since September. The technical pattern in the chart below looks incomplete, suggesting further downside to come for the S&P 500 versus long-term Treasuries. However, on a longer-term basis, this relationship holding the uptrend supports a somewhat more optimistic view that a long-tailed secular bull is still intact, even if we are still working through a cyclical bear market in that larger context. The question then is whether bonds will outperforming equities to such an extent that the red support line is breached, in which case the support for a secular bull market will slowly fade away as the Albert Edwards “Ice Age” takes its place.

    In any event, as the MS strategist notes, “we suspected this bear market would be an unsatisfying one – to the bears – as it often feels like a bull market even if the sector leadership and breadth doesn’t support the claim we are in a bull market.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So in conclusion to its latest bearish screed, Morgan Stanley repeats that its point is that “the rolling bear is still alive and kicking, leaving the average index and stock still well below its highs from last year.” As a result, it makes sense for investors to have crowded into defensive and growth areas in the presence of rapidly decelerating economic growth. And while Wilson and his colleagues have leaned defensively in their sector recommendations, they remain skeptical that “this rolling bear market is finished and think it will complete much like the first wave did last year – meaning many growth areas may be vulnerable.”

  • Everyone's A Conspiracy Theorist, Whether They Know It Or Not

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone via Medium.com,

    Plutocratic propaganda outlet MSNBC has just run a spin segment on the breaking news that the medical examiner’s determination of the cause of Jeffrey Epstein’s death is “pending further information”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Our sources are still saying that it looks like suicide, and this is going to set conspiracy theorists abuzz I fear,” said NBC correspondent Ken Dilanian.

    “NBC News has been hearing all day long that there are no indications of foul play, and that this looks like a suicide and that he hung himself in his cell.”

    Dilanian, who stumbled over the phrase “conspiracy theorists” in his haste to get it in the first soundbyte, is a known asset of the Central Intelligence Agency. This is not a conspiracy theory, this is a well-documented fact. A 2014 article in The Intercept titled “The CIA’s Mop-Up Man” reveals email exchanges obtained via Freedom of Information Act request between Dilanian and CIA public affairs officers which “show that Dilanian enjoyed a closely collaborative relationship with the agency, explicitly promising positive news coverage and sometimes sending the press office entire story drafts for review prior to publication.” There is no reason to give Dilanian the benefit of the doubt that this cozy relationship has ended, so anything he puts forward can safely be dismissed as CIA public relations.

    When I mentioned Dilanian’s CIA ties on MSNBC’s Twitter video, MSNBC deleted their tweet and then re-shared it without mentioning Dilanian’s name. Here is a screenshot of the first tweet followed by an embedded link to their current one (which I’ve archived just in case):

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Up until the news broke that Epstein’s autopsy has been unable to readily confirm suicide, mass media headlines everywhere have been unquestioningly blaring that that was known to have been the cause of the accused sex trafficker’s death. This despite the fact that the FBI’s investigation has been explicitly labeling it an apparent suicide”, and despite the fact that Epstein is credibly believed to have been involved in an intelligence-tied sexual blackmail operation involving many powerful people, any number of whom stood plenty to gain from his death.

    So things are moving in a very weird way, and people are understandably weirded out. The response to this from mass media narrative managers has, of course, been to berate everyone as “conspiracy theorists”.

    “Jeffrey Epstein: How conspiracy theories spread after financier’s death” reads a BBC headline.

    Epstein Suicide Conspiracies Show How Our Information System Is Poisoned” reads one from the New York Times.

    Conspiracy Theories Fly Online in Wake of Epstein Death” warns The Wall Street Journal.

    Financier Epstein’s Death Disappoints Victims, Launches Conspiracy Theories” reads the headline from US government-funded Voice of America.

    These outlets generally match Dilanian’s tone in branding anyone who questions the official story about Epstein’s death as a raving lunatic. Meanwhile, normal human beings all across the political spectrum are expressing skepticism on social media about the “suicide” narrative we’re all being force-fed by the establishment narrative managers, many of them prefacing their skepticism with some variation on the phrase “I’m not a conspiracy theorist, but…”

    “I’m not a conspiracy theorist but there are an awful lot of very powerful people who would like to see this Epstein thing go away. Is anyone investigating the guard on duty?” tweeted actor Patricia Heaton.

    “I am not into conspiracy theories. But Epstein had destructive information on an extraordinary number of extraordinarily powerful people. It is not easy to commit suicide in prison. Especially after being placed on suicide watch. Especially after already allegedly trying,” tweeted public defender Scott Hechinger.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Journalist Abi Wilkinson summed up the silliness of this widespread preface very nicely, tweeting, “‘“I’m not a conspiracy theorist’ is such a weird assertion when you think about it, the idea there’s a binary between believing all conspiracies and flat out rejecting the very concept of conspiracy in all circumstances.”

    Indeed, I think it’s fair to say that everyone is a conspiracy theorist if they’re really honest with themselves.

    Not everyone believes that the official stories about 9/11 and the JFK assassination are riddled with plot holes or what have you, but I doubt that anyone who really sat down and sincerely grappled with the question “Do powerful people conspire?” would honestly deny it. Some are just more self-aware than others about the self-evident reality that powerful people conspire all the time, and it’s only a question of how and with whom and to what extent.

    The word “conspire” is defined by Merriam-Webster as “to join in a secret agreement to do an unlawful or wrongful act or an act which becomes unlawful as a result of the secret agreement”. No sane person would deny that this is a thing that happens, nor that this is likely a thing that happens to some extent among the powerful in their own nation. This by itself is a theory about conspiracy per definition, and it accurately applies to pretty much everyone. Since it applies to pretty much everyone, the label is essentially meaningless, either as a pejorative or as anything else.

    The meaningless of the term has been clearly illustrated by Russiagate, whose adherents react with sputtering outrage whenever anyone points out that they’re engaged in a conspiracy theory, despite the self-evident fact that that’s exactly what it is: a theory about a band of powerful Russian conspirators conspiring with the highest levels of the US government. Their objection is not due to a belief that they’re not theorizing about a conspiracy, their objection is due to the fact that a highly stigmatized label that they’re accustomed to applying to other people has been applied to them. The label is rejected because its actual definition is ignored to the point of meaninglessness.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The problem has never been with the actual term “conspiracy theory”; the problem has been with its deliberate and completely meaningless use as a pejorative. The best way to address this would be a populist move to de-stigmatize the label by taking ownership of it. Last month Cornell University professor Dave Callum tweeted, “I am a ‘conspiracy theorist’. I believe men and women of wealth and power conspire. If you don’t think so, then you are what is called ‘an idiot’. If you believe stuff but fear the label, you are what is called ‘a coward’.” This is what we all must do. The debate must be forcibly moved from the absurd question of whether or not conspiracies are a thing to the important question of which conspiracy theories are valid and to what degree.

    And we should probably hurry. Yahoo News reported earlier this month that the FBI recently published an intelligence bulletin describing “conspiracy theory-driven domestic extremists” as a growing threat, and this was before the recent spate of US shootings got establishment narrative-makers pushing for new domestic terrorism laws.

    This combined with the fact that we can’t even ask questions about extremely suspicious events like Jeffrey Epstein’s death without being tarred with this meaningless pejorative by the mass media thought police means we’re at extreme risk of being shoved into something far more Orwellian in the near future.

    *  *  *

    The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for my website, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics on Twitter, throwing some money into my hat on Patreon or Paypalpurchasing some of my sweet merchandise, buying my new book Rogue Nation: Psychonautical Adventures With Caitlin Johnstone, or my previous book Woke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish or use any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2

  • Huge Blast At Pro-Iran Militia Base Rips Through Baghdad Near 'Green Zone'

    Billows of smoke and fire are rising above Baghdad’s skyline after a massive explosion has reportedly engulfed a weapons depot said to be controlled by a pro-Iranian militia in the Iraqi capital

    Stunning footage of the explosion’s aftermath in Dora neighborhood is circulating, which is not far from the sprawling US embassy, which has itself over the past months been targeted in sporadic mortar attacks. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to The Times of Israel, “Local media reports that the weapons storehouse is owned by the Sayyid of Martyrs Battalions, an Iraqi Shiite militia supported by Tehran.”

    Unconfirmed reports suggest the weapons storage facility may have been targeted by ISIS terror cells.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Locals are currently evacuating the area as ammunition explodes in the early evening sky, sending rockets and projectiles flying in all directions and into residential homes.

    Sky News Arabia reported that incoming mortar shells set off sirens in the area around the US embassy in Baghdad, known as the Green Zone. — Times of Israel

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Officials with the Baghdad Operations Command posted a social media statement saying  “explosion occurred because of the piling up of ammunition inside the Saqr military base in southern Baghdad.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Sirens are going off, with further reports that shells have possibly landed at the US diplomatic compound in the city.

    A giant mushroom shaped cloud of black smoke can currently be observed hanging over the southern part of Baghdad. Videos show scenes of what sounds like a war zone.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    developing…

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 12th August 2019

  • Ukraine Triggered After Leather-Clad Putin Attends Biker Rally In Crimea

    People in Ukraine were massively offended after Vladimir Putin attended a biker rally in Crimea – with the Ukrainian foreign ministry saying Sunday’s visit was a “blatant violation of Ukraine’s sovereignty.” 

    The 66-year-old Russian President rode in to the annual rally of the Night Wolves bikers, snapping pictures with supporters and giving a speech, where he complimented the motorcycle group for setting a great example for the country’s youth. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russia annexed Crimea in 2014 following a controversial and heavily criticized referendum by the Autonomous Republic of Crimea. 

    As Euro news notes, Putin’s visit comes as “tens of thousands of people in Moscow and other cities protested against Putin’s government following local election violations. As many as 275 were arrested across the country, according to the arrest-monitoring group OVD-Info.”

  • Germany Stalls And Europe Craters

    Authored by Alastair Crooke via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    The influential economic commentator on Europe, Ambrose Pritchard Evans, writes:

    German industry is in the deepest slump since the global financial crisis, and threatens to push Europe’s powerhouse economy into full-blown recession. The darkening outlook is forcing the European Central Bank to contemplate ever more perilous measures.

    “The influential Ifo Institute in Munich said its business climate indicator for manufacturing went into “free fall” in July, as the delayed damage from global trade conflict takes its toll and confidence wilts. It goes far beyond the woes of the car industry. More than 80pc of Germany’s factories are in outright contraction.”

    Why? What is going on here? It seems that, though other European member-states used to be Germany’s largest market, Germany’s first and third largest export destinations are now the US and China, respectively. Together, they account for more than 15% of all outbound German trade activity. More than 18% of Germany’s export goods ended up somewhere in Asia. Therefore, Germany’s industrial struggles in 2019 point the finger in the direction of its external focus, which means the US, China, and Asia – i.e. its largest marginal trade partners. And the principal assailants in today’s trade and tech wars.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Clemens Fuest, the Ifo president, says: “All the problems are coming together: It’s China, it’s increasing protectionism across the board, it’s disruption to global supply chains”.

    But if Germany’s manufacturing woes were not sufficient in and of themselves, then combined with the threat of trade war with Trump, the prospect indeed is bleak for Europe: And the likelihood is that any of that ECB stimulus – promised for this autumn, as Mario Draghi warns that the European picture is getting “worse and worse” – will be very likely to meet with an angry response from Trump – castigated as blatant currency manipulation by the EU and its ECB. EU Relations with Washington seem set to sour (in more ways than one).

    But there is more: Speaking in the German parliament, Alice Weidel, the AfD leader, tore into Chancellor Merkel for her, and Brussel’s, botched handling of Brexit (for which “she, Merkel bears some responsibility”). Weidel pointed out that “the UK is the second biggest economy in Europe – as big as the 19 smallest EU members combined”. “From an economic perspective, the EU is shrinking from 27 member-states to 9. In the face of such an enormous event, the EU reaction verges on a pathological denial of reality … [they should recall] that German prosperity and jobs are at stake here. It is clearly in Germany’s interest that trade and investment continue unhindered. But, out of blind loyalty, you [Merkel], follow France, which wants to deny Britain access to the Single Market. Yes, you [Merkel] are considering not allowing Britain access to the European Economic Area, because France does not want it. [Sarcasm] that would be too much: Too much free trade; too much fresh air in the markets … France with its failed industrial policy serves as [the new] blueprint [for the EU]”. (See video here).

    Weidel’s last point is key: She is implying that Macron is positioning himself to eclipse Merkel as the EU leader on the waning of the Chancellor’s influence and credibility. Macron intends to impose instead, the “failed” French industrial model, to Germany’s disadvantage, Weidel suggests.

    She is not alone in this suspicion. Trump too, dislikes any prospective Macron take-over of the EU leadership that will (almost certainly) be more hostile to any trade agreement with the US (especially on agriculture), and which would open French industry to US competition. Hence Trump’s riposte (on French wine) in retaliation to France’s new taxes on US tech firms – contributing little, or nothing, to the French Treasury. Trump is enlisting too in the battle for the future shape of Europe. It is going to be a battle royal.

    A major threat to the EU now emanates from the least anticipated direction – from the US. At no point did European leaders consider their project as a challenge to US power. Rather, they saw progress in their careers as contingent on receiving the US approval. Consequently, they deliberately chose not to found the Euro in anything other than within the dollar sphere. They never considered the possibility that the United States might change attitude. And now – suddenly – the EU finds itself exposed to all manner of sanctions through the Euro’s close vulnerability to dollar hegemony; from a possible trade and tech war between Europe’s two key trading partners; and even a falling-out as a result of a changing US defence calculus. Steering a course between the US and China will challenge deeply Europe’s imbedded cultural predisposition.

    Weidel also warns the German Parliament that that the biggest consequence for Germany from Brexit is not just its exports, but rather, without the UK as a EU member, Germany will lose its ability to assemble a blocking majority (35%) in Council: And, absent this ability to block, Germany may not be able “to stop the crisis-ridden, Club-Med States and France, from reaching into community funds”.

    This goes to the crux of the European crisis: an accord rooted in Germany’s traumatic experience of the inter-war hyper-inflation; in the Great Depression of the 30s; and to the social erosion to which it led. To exorcise these ghosts, Germany deliberately painted the EU into an automatic system of austerity ‘discipline’– enforced through a German surveilled, Central Bank (the ECB). The whole was ‘locked-fast’ in automaticity (i.e. in Europe’s ‘automatic stabilising mechanisms’). This was conceded by other European states (the core accord), since it seemed the only way (it was said), that Germany would agree to put its revered ‘Ark’ of the then stable Deutsche Mark, into the common ‘pot’ of the ECM system.

    Professor Paul Krugman explains:

    “How [then] did Europe manage to follow a common monetary policy … with an European Central Bank, explicitly … set up to give each country an equal voice, and yet satisfy the German demand for assured monetary rectitude? The answer was to put the new system on autopilot, pre-programming it to do what the Germans would have done if they were still in charge.

    First, the new central bank – the ECB – would be made an autonomous institution, as free as possible from political influence. Second, it would be given a clear, very narrow mandate: price stability, period – no responsibility at all for squishy things like employment or growth. Third, the first head of the ECB, appointed for an eight-year term, would be someone guaranteed to be more German than the Germans: W. Duisenberg, who headed the Dutch central bank during a period when his job consisted almost entirely of shadowing whatever the Bundesbank did”.

    Krugman is too polite to say it explicitly, but it never was a common policy. It was German control, hidden in stabilising mechanisms, designed by Frankfurt. The loss of this mechanism is what is frightening man of the German élite.

    And Macron has just exploded that original Franco-German compact through putting a French woman (Lagarde) in charge of the ECB; a self-declared Federalist (“I want a United States of Europe”) as EU Commission President, and a Brexit hawk as President of the EU Council. Macron’s triumph over Merkel is intended to de-throne Germany. And a punishment Brexit – both to weaken Germany, and to sap Germany’s voting power at the Council – as well as the satisfaction of seeing a chastised Britain being chased from out of the EU.

    So Macron is ushering in his notion of a closer centralised European governance – but who is to pay for it now? Without Germany’s former level of contributions and Britain’s input as a major contributor nation, the EU can neither reform itself (since many reforms would require Treaty re-writes), nor afford itself.

    And wide political discontent to the Macron formula is already baked in for the future, as Frank Lee notes:

    “Those Eastern European states which emerged from the break-up of the Soviet Union had been led to believe that a bright new world of West European living standards, enhanced pay levels, high rates of social mobility and consumption were on offer.

    Unfortunately, they were sold an illusion: the result of the transition so far seems to have been the creation of a low-wage hinterland, a border economy on the fringes of the highly developed European core; a Euro version of NAFTA and the maquiladora, i.e., low tech, low wage, low skills production units on the Mexican side of the US’s southern borders”.

    And we are not talking ‘just Latvia’: For many in the East of Germany (the AfD’s electoral heartland), German unification in 1990 was not a merger of equals, but instead an “Anschluss” (annexation) with West Germany taking over East Germany. Reasons for East German disenchantment can be seen everywhere: The eastern population has shrunk by about 2 million, unemployment has soared, young people are moving away in droves, and what was one of the Eastern Bloc’s leading industrial nations is now largely devoid of industry.

    And here lies the kernel of the crisis. There has been a call from all sides to try something different: such as relaxing the fiscal rules that are destroying public services; or, more daringly, to touch the ‘holy grail’: of reform of the financial and banking system.

    But here is the rub: All such initiatives are prohibited in the locked-down treaty system. Everyone might think to revise those treaties. But that is not going to happen. The treaties are untouchable, precisely because Germany believes that to loosen its hold over the monetary system will be to open Pandora’s Box to the ghosts of inflation and social instability rising, to haunt us anew. Weidel was very clear on this danger.

    The reality is that the European ‘lock-down’ derives from a system that has willfully removed power from parliaments and governments, and enshrined the automaticity of that system into treaties that can only be revised by extraordinary procedures. No one in Brussels sees any prospect of ‘that’ happening – hence the Brussels ‘record’ is stuck: repeating the mantra of ‘There Is No Alternative’ (TINA) to more, and closer, Euro-integration. And that is precisely what the European ‘sovereigntists’ are determined to oppose, by all means possible.

    Only the onset of the coming recession in Europe and the associated sovereign debt crisis may prove sufficient to shake Brussels from its smug torpor, and to focus minds on how to manage the coming crisis. As Evans-Pritchard concludes, the ECB cannot save the eurozone another time. The baton passes to the politicians – if they are able?

    Welcome to the new phase of Westphalian struggle: European ‘Empire’ – to be, or not to be.

  • Project Fear Panic: Predicted Hard-Brexit Job Losses Across Europe

    As a no-deal, hard Brexit becomes ever more likely, the fearmongering of the establishment has been turned up to ’11’ as it appears they have little to no control over the process – no matter what they think – now that Johnson (and his cabinet) are in charge.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And on the heels of a surprise contraction in GDP in The UK, Statista’s Niall McCarthy notes the latest projections for just how end of the world, a hard Brexit will be… A study by Leuven University in Belgium has predicted that 1.2 million jobs will be lost across Europe in the case of a hard-Brexit.

    Infographic: Predicted Hard-Brexit Job Losses Across Europe  | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    Unsurprisingly, the study finds that the United Kingdom is expected to be the country that will suffer the most with over 500,000 jobs set to be lost. Germany would also be significantly impacted with just under 292,000 redundancies while France and Italy would lose 141,320 and 139,140 jobs respectively.

  • Paul Craig Roberts Slams Dems & Western Media: "It's Open Season On All White People"

    Authored by Paul Craig Roberts,

    Survival of The Fittest

    CJ Hopkins doesn’t say it, but he shows that within all of the Western countries in which the white core populations are experiencing fierce attack from anti-white ideologues in the media and governments that rule them, there is unity of voice from the media that “Trump is a White Supremacist who inspires Terrorism.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This unity of voice is suspicious as there are many different possible explanations of the El Paso shooting. The unity of voice is so uniform—in some cases identical phrasing—and so repetitive that it certainly looks like an orchestration against Trump and raises suspicions that the shooting itself was an orchestration.

    The question naturally arises, to achieve such an uniformity of response from the Western world, who organized it?  How was the explanation that blames Trump ready at hand all over the US, UK, Europe, Canada and Australia, the minute the shooting occurred? Does it remind you of the BCC announcing the collapse of World Trade Center Building 7 a half hour before it occurred?

    Anytime an explanation is ready at hand the minute an event occurs, the natural question is who had advance information? If there is advance information, where did it come from? Why did not authorities with their advanced information prevent the attack? Why after “Saddam Hussein’s weapons of mass destruction,” “Iranian nukes,” “Russian invasions,” “Assad’s use of chemical weapons,” etc., do media organizations continue to provide unexamined explanations? Why did the media suppress the shooter’s manifesto?  Because it did not support the story line and attack on Trump?

    As the presstitutes speak with one voice, little wonder that some of the few and diminishing number of Americans still capable of thought conclude that the El Paso shooting was an orchestrated event designed to discredit Trump and to abolish the 2nd Amendment.  We have long known about CIA mind control programs.  Many experts believe that Sirhan Sirhan, the alleged assassin of Robert Kennedy, was a product of the CIA’s mind control program.

    As the US government has lied to us about so much for so long about so many big events, we have no alternative but to question everything. But the presstitutes never do.  Russiagate was a politically motivated hoax, but the presstitutes had one voice proclaiming the truth of a hoax.The American people have been misled by the media and gone along with Washington’s destruction of entire countries, such as Iraq and Libya, with millions of people killed, maimed, widowed, orphaned, and displaced, based on Washington’s lies and fabricated “evidence.”  If we cannot believe the reasons that the government takes us to war, how can we believe anything we hear from media and politicians?

    The media and Democratic Party’s response to the El Paso tragedy make the facts irrelevant. The controlled explanation wraps people up in emotions over guns and Trump’s wall.  The dead in El Paso are portrayed as Trump’s fault for being a White Supremacist and enforcing US law, which specifies border controls.  Only White Supremacists kill people and build walls, unless they are Israelis, but we are not permitted to say anything about that.

    By law the US has borders that the law demands be enforced. If immigrants can simply walk across the border, why can’t they fly into the country or come by ships?  What is the point of passport control?  Indeed, what’s the point of passports?  The concept of citizenship simply disappears. 

    US borders have always been enforced.  Badly no doubt, but enforced.  Trump is simply trying to do a better job of enforcing the law than has been done in the past. 

    If the US would simply stop overthrowing reformist governments in Latin America, the resources of those countries would be taken out of foreign hands and be put to work for the local people, which is what Venezuela is doing much to the chagrin of American oil companies.  The last time Honduras elected a reformer, America’s first black president—Obama—overthrew him.  Brazil’s Workers Party was destroyed with the US-orchestrated imprisonment of its leader, Lula da Silva, and removal from office of his successor. In their place Washington has installed a corrupt agent of the Americans.  Oppression is applied to the supporters among the people of reformist politicians to ensure that voting ceases to put reformers in power.  As General Smedley Butler said, “I was the enforcer in Latin America for the New York Banks and the United Fruit Company.” Perhaps it is poetic justice that the peoples whose resources are carted off to America decide to go with the resources.  

    If the Democrats want open borders, why don’t they draft legislation and fight for its passage?  Why blame Trump for enforcing the laws on the books?

    The El Paso shooting has been turned not only into an attack on President Trump but also into an attack on white people.  Suddenly the “Muslim terrorist threat” has disappeared.  Its replacement is the domestic terrorist threat of “white supremacy.” The attack on whites is indiscriminate. The attack on Trump extends to all of the Americans who elected him—“Trump deplorables”—in Hillary’s words.  All whites become “racists” and are covered in guilt. 

    The anti-white propaganda is effective. Actress Rosanna Arquette said that her white skin makes her ashamed.  The success in teaching emotionally and mentally weak white people to feel guilt is to make it easier for those who wish to displace them to run over them.  And most definitely, the core white populations of the Western world are being overrun.  

    As white populations have become too brainwashed and loaded with guilt to defend themselves, perhaps the Social Darwinists were correct after all.  The fit survive, and white people are no longer among the fit.

    CNN former host Reza Aslan, now a professor at the University of California, tweeted:

    “The President is a white nationalist terror leader. His supporters—ALL OF THEM—are by definition white nationalist terror supporters.  The MAGA hat is a KKK hood.  And this evil, racist scourge must be eradicated from society.”

    How can it be that Trump wanting to enforce US law inspires a person to shoot Hispanics, but Aslan’s call to eradicate all Trump supporters doesn’t inspire a person to attack Trump supporters? Why wasn’t Aslan disciplined by the University of California for his hate speech?  Why wasn’t he blocked by Twitter?  

    How can NBC Universal’s film, “The Hunt,” produced by Jason Blum, a Jew, depict liberal elites hunting and killing “Trump deplorables” for sport and escape the charge of hate speech and encouraging deadly violence against half of the US population?   

    If wanting to build a wall to keep out illegal immigrants encourages Americans to shoot Hispanics, how much violence is encouraged by a movie in which Trump supporters are hunted and shot? There is scant complaint about Israel’s wall that keeps Palestinians out of their own country. Try to imagine someone making a film about hunting Jews for sport and calling it a satire.

    Clearly in the Western media and US Democratic Party it is open season on all white people.  The most intense hatred is expressed against them—even calls for their extermination—and it doesn’t qualify as hate speech or encouraging violence.

    The hatred and demonization of white people in America is no different from the propaganda against Jews in the Third Reich.  Yet not a single member of the Democratic Party or American print, TV, and NPR radio protests.

    That fact tells us all we need to know.  If white people don’t get organized and defend themselves there is likely to be a white holocaust.

  • Florida Homeowner's Glock Stolen During "Anonymous" Orgy

    Everybody knows that when you’re having an orgy where everyone is wearing masks and using code names, to make sure to lock up your Glock. That was the difficult lesson that one Florida (of course) resident learned in late July when their handgun was stolen, according to the Daytona Beach News Journal

    The culprit was – wait for it – unable to be identified because they were wearing a mask and using a code name. 

    Volusia County Sheriff’s Sgt. Todd Smith said:

     “We’re probably not going to solve this one. And DNA (identification) is not going to be an option.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The 9mm Glock was holstered and sitting on top of a nightstand in the master bedroom when it was stolen during an orgy. The theft was helped along by the fact that the “theme” of the night was conveniently “anonymous sex”. Guests were reportedly invited to (no pun intended) come and go as they pleased throughout the course of the weekend, and even bring friends and acquaintances if they wanted to. 

    Guests were also encouraged to use fake names, or no names at all. 

    The orgy took place between July 19-21 and the gun was reported stolen days later. The homeowner was contacted by detectives on July 26 but was “apprehensive” about giving the details of the theft. The homeowner said there were about 20 people in his home over the course of those days, but that he only knew 5 or 6 of them. 

  • Complete List Of Clinton Associates Who Allegedly Died Mysteriously Or Committed Suicide Before Testimony

    Authored by Jim Hoft via GatewayPundit.com,

    On Saturday multimillionaire Jeffrey Epstein, the highest profile prisoner in US custody, was found dead in his prison cell in Manhattan.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This occurred the day after two thousand previously sealed court documents involving the Jeffrey Epstein child sex abuse case were released to the public.

    The documents described how Bill Clinton held a private party on Jeffrey Epstein’s pedophile island.

    Clinton made at least 27 times trips on Jeffrey Epstein’s private plane. Most of those flights were with underage girls.

    Despite a previous attempt on his life just three weeks ago the prison guards skipped the 30 minute required checks on Epstein’s cell last night.

    Early yesterday morning they found him dead.

    Jeffrey Epstein is the latest in a long list of Clinton family associates and acquaintances who died mysteriously or committed suicide before their public testimony.

    In 2016 CBS Las Vegas posted a list of Bill and Hillary Clinton associates alleged to have died under mysterious circumstances.

    Here is that list.

    1- James McDougal – Clintons convicted Whitewater partner died of an apparent heart attack, while in solitary confinement. He was a key witness in Ken Starr’s investigation.

    2 – Mary Mahoney – A former White House intern was murdered July 1997 at a Starbucks Coffee Shop in Georgetown .. The murder …happened just after she was to go public w:th her story of sexual harassment in the White House.

    3 – Vince Foster – Former White House counselor, and colleague of Hillary Clinton at Little Rock’s Rose Law firm. Died of a gunshot wound to the head, ruled a suicide.

    4 – Ron Brown – Secretary of Commerce and former DNC Chairman. Reported to have died by impact in a plane crash. A pathologist close to the investigation reported that there was a hole in the top of Brown’s skull resembling a gunshot wound. At the time of his death Brown was being investigated, and spoke publicly of his willingness to cut a deal with prosecutors. The rest of the people on the plane also died. A few days later the Air Traffic controller commited suicide.

    5 – C. Victor Raiser, II – Raiser, a major player in the Clinton fund raising organization died in a private plane crash in July 1992.

    6 – Paul Tulley – Democratic National Committee Political Director found dead in a hotel room in Little Rock , September 1992. Described by Clinton as a “dear friend and trusted advisor”.

    7 – Ed Willey – Clinton fundraiser, found dead November 1993 deep in the woods in VA of a gunshot wound to the head. Ruled a suicide. Ed Willey died on the same day his wife Kathleen Willey claimed Bill Clinton groped her in the oval office in the White House. Ed Willey was involved in several Clinton fund raising events.

    8 – Jerry Parks – Head of Clinton’s gubernatorial security team in Little Rock .. Gunned down in his car at a deserted intersection outside Little Rock Park’s son said his father was building a dossier on Clinton He allegedly threatened to reveal this information. After he died the files were mysteriously removed from his house.

    9 – James Bunch – Died from a gunshot suicide. It was reported that he had a “Black Book” of people which contained names of influential people who visited prostitutes in Texas and Arkansas

    10 – James Wilson – Was found dead in May 1993 from an apparent hanging suicide. He was reported to have ties to Whitewater..

    11 – Kathy Ferguson – Ex-wife of Arkansas Trooper Danny Ferguson, was found dead in May 1994, in her living room with a gunshot to her head. It was ruled a suicide even though there were several packed suitcases, as if she were going somewhere. Danny Ferguson was a co-defendant along with Bill Clinton in the Paula Jones lawsuit Kathy Ferguson was a possible corroborating witness for Paula Jones.

    12 – Bill Shelton – Arkansas State Trooper and fiancee of Kathy Ferguson. Critical of the suicide ruling of his fiancee, he was found dead in June, 1994 of a gunshot wound also ruled a suicide at the grave site of his fiancee.

    13 – Gandy Baugh – Attorney for Clinton’s friend Dan Lassater, died by jumping out a window of a tall building January, 1994. His client was a convicted drug distributor.

    14 – Florence Martin – Accountant & sub-contractor for the CIA, was related to the Barry Seal, Mena, Arkansas, airport drug smuggling case. He died of three gunshot wounds.

    15 – Suzanne Coleman – Reportedly had an affair with Clinton when he was Arkansas Attorney General. Died of a gunshot wound to the back of the head, ruled a suicide. Was pregnant at the time of her death.

    16 – Paula Grober – Clinton’s speech interpreter for the deaf from 1978 until her death December 9, 1992. She died in a one car accident.
    17 – Danny Casolaro – Investigative reporter, investigating Mena Airport and Arkansas Development Finance Authority. He slit his wrists, apparently, in the middle of his investigation.

    18 – Paul Wilcher – Attorney investigating corruption at Mena Airport with Casolaro and the 1980 “October Surprise” was found dead on a toilet June 22, 1993, in his Washington DC apartment had delivered a report to Janet Reno 3 weeks before his death.

    19 – Jon Parnell Walker – Whitewater investigator for Resolution Trust Corp. Jumped to his death from his Arlington ,Virginia apartment balcony August 15, 1993. He was investigating the Morgan Guaranty scandal.

    20 – Barbara Wise – Commerce Department staffer. Worked closely with Ron Brown and John Huang. Cause of death: Unknown. Died November 29, 1996. Her bruised, naked body was found locked in her office at the Department of Commerce.

    21 – Charles Meissner – Assistant Secretary of Commerce who gave John Huang special security clearance, died shortly thereafter in a small plane crash.

    22 – Dr. Stanley Heard – Chairman of the National Chiropractic Health Care Advisory Committee died with his attorney Steve Dickson in a small plane crash. Dr. Heard, in addition to serving on Clinton ‘s advisory council personally treated Clinton’s mother, stepfather and brother.

    23 – Barry Seal – Drug running TWA pilot out of Mena Arkansas, death was no accident.

    24 – Johnny Lawhorn, Jr. – Mechanic, found a check made out to Bill Clinton in the trunk of a car left at his repair shop. He was found dead after his car had hit a utility pole.

    25 – Stanley Huggins – Investigated Madison Guaranty. His death was a purported suicide and his report was never released.

    26 – Hershell Friday – Attorney and Clinton fundraiser died March 1, 1994, when his plane exploded.

    27 – Kevin Ives & Don Henry – Known as “The boys on the track” case. Reports say the boys may have stumbled upon the Mena Arkansas airport drug operation. A controversial case, the initial report of death said, due to falling asleep on railroad tracks. Later reports claim the 2 boys had been slain before being placed on the tracks. Many linked to the case died before their testimony could come before a Grand Jury.

    THE FOLLOWING PERSONS HAD INFORMATION ON THE IVES/HENRY CASE:

    28 – Keith Coney – Died when his motorcycle slammed into the back of a truck, 7/88.

    29 – Keith McMaskle – Died, stabbed 113 times, Nov, 1988

    30 – Gregory Collins – Died from a gunshot wound January 1989.

    31 – Jeff Rhodes – He was shot, mutilated and found burned in a trash dump in April 1989.

    32 – James Milan – Found decapitated. However, the Coroner ruled his death was due to natural causes”.

    34 – Richard Winters – A suspect in the Ives/Henry deaths. He was killed in a set-up robbery July 1989.

    THE FOLLOWING CLINTON BODYGUARDS ARE ALSO DEAD

    35 – Major William S. Barkley, Jr.

    36 – Captain Scott J . Reynolds

    37 – Sgt. Brian Hanley

    38 – Sgt. Tim Sabel

    39 – Major General William Robertson

    40 – Col. William Densberger

    41 – Col. Robert Kelly

    42 – Spec. Gary Rhodes

    43 – Steve Willis

    44 – Robert Williams

    45 – Conway LeBleu

    46 – Todd McKeehan

    And the most recent, Seth Rich, the DC staffer murdered and “robbed” (of nothing) on July 10. Wikileaks founder Assange claims he had info on the DNC email scandal.

    Not Included in this list are the 4 heroes killed in Benghazi.

    And now you can add multi-millionaire Jeffrey Epstein to the list…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

  • US Lobster Exports To China Plunge Amid Escalating Trade War

    VOA News interviewed a business owner and a trade official in Maine following a massive drop in lobster exports due to President Trump’s escalating trade war. Their comments on the trade war are an eye-opener that contradicts the president’s claim that his trade duties on China won’t hurt American firms.

    VOA spoke with Vice President of sales and marketing at Maine Coast, Sheila Adams, who said her company saw a 20% plunge in business activity in a matter of days last July after China retaliated against US tariffs on Chinese goods by raising duties on US food and agricultural exports, which included live lobsters.

    Essentially what’s happened is about 80% of our sales into mainland China have gone away,” she said.

    “And that’s purely because our product is simply just too expensive compared to the Canadian because of the additional 25% tariff that was levied.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The 25% tariff paid by Chinese consumers was enough of a price shock that sent most of Maine Coast’s Chinese clientele north into Canada for cheaper, un-tariffed lobster.

    “The North American lobster is caught in US waters, but also in Canadian waters,” Adams said. “So when they make a buying decision between ‘Do I want to buy a lobster out of Canada or do I want to buy a lobster out of the United States?’ it becomes very difficult for them to make a decision to buy an American lobster because it’s so much more expensive.”

    “The Chinese as a culture love live seafood in general, and have a particular passion for live lobster,” she explained.

    “Obviously it’s a very large country, with a lot of people, so they consume — or have the ability to consume — a lot of lobster, which is important for us as a wholesaler volume business.”

    Adams and her team had to quickly shift sales channels out of China to new markets across Asia. Her facility can process, package, and prepare fresh lobsters for 29 countries weekly, but with the Chinese market obsolete at the moment, business activity has slumped.

    “It takes all of those other countries combined to equal one market in mainland China. So we had to put a tremendous amount of effort across many, many markets to try to recoup the lost business in China,” Adams said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Wade Merritt, president of the Maine International Trade Center, and director of international trade for the state of Maine, told Voa that Maine Coast is a good example of how President Trump’s tariffs impacted the local economy and penalized small businesses.

    “We were up about 170% from January to June of 2018 — that was prior to the tariffs,” Merritt said. “But by the end of the year, Maine’s exports of live lobster to China had actually declined by almost 7%. So we gave up a lot of ground in a very short amount of time in those six months.”

    Merritt said overall exports of live lobster to China from Maine had crashed 82% between 2018 and 2019. “So it has had a significant impact on that industry.”

    “Think about the corner store, or the gas station, or the schools, or the anything in any of these communities that is a major lobster fishing port,” Merritt said. “If they’re not fishing lobsters, then there is a real problem for those other businesses too. So there are definite ripple effects that cascade down through the economy.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Tariffs Hurt the Heartland, an alliance of trade associations and agriculture commodity groups, said tariffs cost US firms $3.4 billion in June alone.

    Trump has stated that he can get a better deal with China by waging a trade war against them as a negotiating tactic, but at this point, it has widely backfired. American businesses that are suffering from the trade war could be the next recessionary shock in 2020.

  • Moscow Mitch, Secret Russian Subs… And Russophobia Derangement

    Authored by Finian Cunningham via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    Arch Republican Senator Mitch McConnell is being taunted by major US media outlets and at political rallies as a “Russian asset”. Meanwhile, Britain’s Daily Telegraph reports on “super-secret” Russian submarines which are “operating unseen” in British territorial waters.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The collapse in rational thinking among American and British political mainstream circles is highlighted by the rampant Russophobia.

    Such thinking is delusional, paranoid and ultimately horrifying at a time of heightened international tensions between nuclear superpowers.

    First, let’s deal with the farcical furore over Senator McConnell being labelled a Russian asset. The Senate majority leader has been dubbed by US news channel MSNBC and the Washington Post as “Moscow Mitch” and “doing Putin’s bidding”. The monikers followed McConnell’s blocking of legislation aimed at tightening security of electoral systems ostensibly to prevent “foreign meddling”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It’s not clear why McConnell objected to the proposed legislation. It seems he doesn’t agree with extra federal controls over state-level electoral systems. Also, he claims that hundreds of millions of dollars have already been spent upgrading electoral systems, and therefore additional expenditure is not warranted. He is a fiscal hawk after all.

    Nonetheless, it is a preposterous leave of senses when paranoid Russophobia in US politics and media are inferring that McConnell’s opposition to the proposed electoral legislation is “evidence” that he is a Russian agent, by allegedly enabling Russian hacking into US elections.

    At a recent political event in his home state of Kentucky, McConnell was heckled and booed by Democrat supporters chanting “Moscow Mitch, Moscow Mitch!” The protesters were wearing T-shirts and brandishing placards with images of McConnell donning a Cossack hat with Soviet-era hammer and sickles.

    Understandably, the 77-year-old senator has reacted with aghast over the political attacks. He called it “modern-day McCarthyism” harking back to the Cold War years of Red Baiting. He even said it was worse that the past McCarthyism. And he has a point there.

    McConnell’s exasperation is borne out of the complete irrational vacuousness of the accusations. The six-time elected lawmaker is the longest-serving Republican senator. He is a grandee of the traditionally rightwing party, with an “impeccable” record of being hawkish towards Russia and President Vladimir Putin.

    How anyone can construe that good ole boy McConnell is a Russian stooge is too absurd for words. What the accusations do betray is the total derangement and politically illiterate condition of mainstream American political and media culture.

    As Princeton Professor Stephen Cohen remarked in a recent interview Russophobia and paranoia over alleged interference in US politics has become a permanent mindset among too many American politicians, pundits, military-intelligence agencies and Democrat supporters. Cohen rightly deplores how the whole baseless narrative of “Russia-gate” continues with a life of its own, having not been finally made redundant after the two-year Mueller probe spectacularly failed to provide any substantive details or evidence.

    Still, however, former FBI chief Robert Mueller in recent hearings before Congress was permitted to reiterate hollow accusations that Russia meddled in the 2016 presidential elections and, he asserted, Moscow will do so again in the 2020 elections. This is simply doctrinal thinking which is, in turn, accepted as “fact” that Russia’s President Putin ordered an “interference campaign” to subvert American democracy. (Moscow has always vehemently rejected that.)

    That’s why when someone as antipathetic towards Russia as Senate leader Mitch McConnell exercises relative sanity by rejecting the alleged need for more electoral security systems to “prevent foreign meddling” he is then assailed with hysterical accusations of being a “Russian asset”. The utter irrationality is self-reinforcing because of unhinged delusions about Russian malignancy. No evidence is required. It’s “true” because “we believe it is true”.

    McConnell has hit back at his detractors by calling them “leftwing hacks” and “communists”. He made that conclusion by referring to the Democrats’ policy of seeking to expand free healthcare for American citizens. He proudly called himself the “Grim Reaper” who would protect America from a “socialist agenda”.

    This inane back and forth demonstrates how dumbed down American political culture is. Increasingly bitter partisan accusations and slander are flying around based on no facts, no evidence, no reason, nor any intelligent understanding about policy, history or political philosophy.

    But, lamentably, at bottom the crazed political discourse relies on an embedded Russophobia. Russia is viewed as evil and malicious, by both sides of the political coin. Rather than addressing inherent problems in American society, the discourse finds a common false explanation – blame it on Russia or association with presumed communism. The Cold War nihilism of American politics and propaganda has never stopped. It’s just become more delusional and divorced from any semblance of reality. In this context, the modern-day Russophobia is perhaps more dangerous because of its irrationality and evidence-free doctrinal thinking.

    Which brings us to the “super-secret” Russian submarines that are stalking Britain, according to the Daily Telegraph. The so-called report (more accurately, psy-ops piece) is a must-read for exposing the delusional anti-Russia paranoia that the British political class have in common with the Americans.

    “A new breed of super quiet Russian submarines are feared [sic] to be operating unseen [sic] in British territorial waters, according to military sources [sic],” the Telegraph claimed.

    The sources were, as usual, anonymous, betraying that the Telegraph was being used, as it often is, as a conduit for British intelligence propaganda.

    Not one scrap of evidence was presented to substantiate these “fears” of “unseen” Russian submarines. Supposedly, the “unseen” vessels are “proof” of how dastardly and stealthy those damn Russians are. The point of the article was to deliver a public message for more military spending on Britain’s Royal Navy.

    What makes it possible for the Daily Telegraph to publish such bogeyman rubbish is because of the systematic inculcation of Russophobia among many, but not all, Britons.

    As with its American counterpart, British political culture has become degenerate and depraved. It is the equivalent of medieval sorcery and “magical thinking”. Standards of proof, reason and due process have been abandoned. It’s like a regression to pre-Enlightenment times. The fact that the US and Britain possess nuclear arsenals aimed at Russia makes the deranged thinking of their political class a truly frightening prospect for the entire world.

  • Epstein's Autopsy Results Delayed "Pending Further Information"

    The much-anticipated results of the New York City medical examiner’s autopsy of Jeffrey Epstein have been released… kinda… saying its determination is “pending further information at this time.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Statement from Chief Medical Examiner Dr. Barbara Sampson:

    Today, a medical examiner performed the autopsy of Jeffrey Epstein.

    The ME’s determination is pending further information at this time.

    At the request of those representing the decedent, and with the awareness of the federal prosecutor, I allowed a private pathologist (Dr. Michael Baden) to observe the autopsy examination.

    This is routine practice.

    My office defers to the involved law enforcement agencies regarding other investigations around this death.

    Inquiries regarding the determination of the Chief Medical Examiner should be directed towards my office.

    So, the autopsy is complete? What further information could the ME need? Instructions?

    On a side note, the private pathologist, demanded by Epstein’s attorneys, Dr. Michael Baden, was the city’s chief medical examiner in the late 1970s and has been called as an expert witness in high-profile cases including by the defense at O.J. Simpson’s 1994 murder trial.

    Of course, this unusual delay will merely spur further uncertainty and the all around ‘conspiracy theory’ feel to this whole debacle.

    What are the odds that Epstein’s body gets misplaced? Or accidentally cremated?

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 11th August 2019

  • The Tyranny Of The Socially Self-Righteous – A Coercive Green New Deal

    Authored by Richard Ebeling via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    Social and economic crises, real and imagined, often seem to bring out the most wrongheaded thinking in matters of government policy. Following the 2008 financial crisis and with the fear of “global warming,” there has been a revival in the case for “democratic” socialism. But now its proponents are “out of the closet” with a clear cut and explicit call for forcefully imposed, authoritarian central planning of the world. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    John Feffer is affiliated with the Washington, D.C.–based Institute for Policy Studies, a “progressive” think tank that has never seen a government command or control, regulation or redistribution that they seemingly have not liked – as long as it reflects their version of preferred social engineering compared to anyone else’s, of course. He has recently made, “The Case for a Coerced Green New Deal,” on the website of The Nation magazine (July 30, 2019).

    The world, he warns, has a window of perhaps 12 years to transform the way people work and live, or its curtains for the planet. Belching out the carbon dioxide by-product of using fossil fuels, the atmosphere is heating up with feared disastrous consequences for all living things on earth. For decades, people have talked and talked and talked about the dangers of global warming; but the time for talk has reached its end, Mr. Feffer declares. It’s time for concerted, planned and comprehensive action of the type proposed in the Green New Deal legislation submitted to Congress earlier in 2019.  

    China as a Model for a Future Eco-Authoritarianism

    He compares two lifeboats lost at sea, whose ship survivors are facing doom if they do not reach the safety of land. On one of the lifeboats, the occupants form committees to discuss and debate which direction to go and how best to manage the meager supplies they have on board. All their jabbering eats up precious time and limited resources, with no definitive decision about what to do. Here is seen the dilemma and dysfunction of indecisive democratic decision-making. 

    On the other lifeboat, after some debate and discussion, a “leader” emerges and takes charge. He assigns tasks to the people in the lifeboat, he decides on a course for the boat to follow (hopefully) to reach land, and organizes how best to ration out the available supplies for the lifeboat occupants until safety has been reached. 

    As far as John Feffer is concerned, the time for the delays and indecisiveness of the democratic talking shop of the first lifeboat type is now passed. America and the world must follow the authoritarian model of the second lifeboat. He greatly admires the example of modern China under President Xi Jinping. Under his clear and determined leadership, China knows where it is going, and why. Government directs and plans the overall direction of Chinese society and the economy. The global dimension to China’s role in the world is seen in its Belt and Road project to link more of the world to China’s future development. And the Chinese government has even publicly embraced the idea of an environmentally friendly future for China. (See my article, “Economic Armaments and China’s Global Ambitions”.)

    So is Mr. Feffer ready to give his oath of allegiance to a world with Chinese characteristics? Alas, no. President Xi shows determined and forthright leadership, but he is, well, sort of like Donald Trump with the goal of “making China great again.” Besides, while talking clean air, China keeps building coal-burning furnaces. And the Belt and Road strategy for establishing China’s place in the global sun is not geared to bend other countries to fighting global warming, but to serve China’s national interests.

    If Not China, Then America’s Green New Deal

    Furthermore, Mr. Feffer declares that the problem is that China, well, is not “eco-authoritarian” enough to take on the mantle of “Climate Leviathan.” As he put is, “China is actually not Leviathan enough.” There are too many competing government ministries and regional and business interests for the sufficient and more centralized “stringent standards” needed for a China to compel the world in the direction he wants President Xi to take it. He does not say it, but we could imagine that in a sleep time dream, Mr. Feffer might very well wish for the reincarnation of an environmentally devoted Chairman Mao who would show the leadership qualities not to brook disagreement, dissent or decentralization to get in the way of a unified and fully centralized plan to save mankind from the current heat wave. 

    Turning away from his wistful wish that China would lead the way, Mr. Feffer sees the national populisms cropping up in various countries to have the right sentiments to do away with the greedy capitalist exploitation from which the world suffers. But they are too nationalistically focused and too often against fighting climate change as he sees its danger. Of course, there is always the hope that the United Nations could play the role of global central planner, but the UN is bogged down in the dead end of talking head committees and unenforceable resolutions. 

    But don’t completely lose a positive attitude, because Mr. Feffer sees salvation in the Green New Deal (GND):

    To achieve the GND’s global goal of net-zero carbon emissions by 2050, the United States would have to lead the way with its own eco-version of Belt and Road initiative, a massive infrastructure development project that would involve high-speed rail, the energy retrofitting of buildings, and huge investments in renewable energy (as well as the creation of staggering numbers of jobs) . . .

    Think of it as a potential future Apollo-11-type green moonshot; a focused mobilization of investment, construction, and administrative resolve to achieve what has hitherto been considered impossible . . .

    To push through a Green New Deal in the United States, for instance, a non-Republican Congress would have to coerce a range of powerful interests [in the private sector] to fall into line. And for any global pact that implements something similar, an international authority like the UN would have to coerce recalcitrant or non-compliant countries to do the same.

    Looking at things through Mr. Feffer’s eyes, we can see America as the focal point and enforcer of a Green New Deal United States of the World. All of humanity confined within and coerced to conform to one overarching environmental central plan from which no corner of the Earth would be exempt or could be resistant. Maybe John Feffer has sugarplum dreams dancing in his head of himself whispering in the ear of the One-World Fuhrer – oh, I mean democratic socialist leader. All hail the anti-global warming “progressive” Caesar! (See my articles, “The Green New Dealers and the New Socialism” and “The Nightmare Fairyland of the Green New Dealers”.”

    Mr. Feffer admits “coercion” is “not exactly a sexy campaign slogan.” But unless it’s  his environmentally friendly future is not imposed through the force of concentrated and imposed government paternalistic planning in the form of the Green New Deal, some other form of authoritarianism less attractive than his will be humanity’s destiny. Oh, no, “progressivism’s” collectivist evil twin – a Donald Trump type!

    Un-Democratic Street Violence for a Green New Deal

    So how does Mr. Feffer propose to bring this change about in the current climate of democratic discourse and disagreement that only frustrates his desire for strict and centralized planning through authoritarian controls that many people in American society and around the world are not willing to accept and obey? 

    It is necessary to go outside of the polite and legitimate avenues of political change, he says. Determined and radical cadres of anti-global warming warriors must take to the streets, organize mass strikes, and shut down sectors of the economy that are viewed as the centers of opposition to a Green New Deal future. In Mr. Feffer’s own words: 

    Major change of this sort could only come from a far more basic form of democracy: people in the streets engaged in actions like school strikes and coal mine blockades. This is the kind of pressure that progressive legislators could then use to push through a mutually agreed-upon Green New Deal capable of building a powerful administrative force that might convince or coerce everyone into preserving the global commons.

    Let’s be clear: Mr. Feffer is so certain that he is right about the dimensions and dangers of presumed global warming that he is willing to see the implementation of thuggery and mob action. In his mind, the time for persuasion is over. It is time to disrupt society, halt some of the wheels of production and industry through violence (that is what “blockades” mean), and pressure the political change that many if not most in the country may have no belief in or desire for. 

    All Collectivisms are Premised on Coercion

    Let us also be clear: These are the same tactics used in the past by Nazis and communists to disrupt society, shut down opposition and resistance, and compel the wider society to acquiesce and conform to the demands of a minority determined to introduce their own collectivist conception of desired social engineering on everyone one else.

    No doubt, at this point Mr. Feffer and others like him would accuse me of “red-baiting” and “below the belt” name calling by linking them with anything to do with the Nazis.  What is common to all of them, the Nazi and communist tactics of the past in coming to power and Mr. Feffer’s call for violent and disruptive direct action, is the premise of the legitimacy of non-peaceful and non-persuading methods of bringing about political and social change, regardless of the ideology guiding it. 

    The method itself is a broader ideological presumption: that the threat or the use of force and violence are justified in the arena of human relationships in the name of remaking people and society into different forms, even when many or a large number of the human objects of such remaking disagree with and oppose being remolded and straight-jacketed into such social patterns not of their own choice and desire. 

    The Tyranny of the Socially Self-Righteous

    We are faced with the tyranny of the socially self-righteous. The only difference between such righteous ideologues is the content and purpose the imposed economic dictatorship is to serve. They may fiercely fight each other for control of the government apparatus of coercion, but there is one common characteristic of all of them: they oppose and detest free market liberalism. Nothing is worse than the opponent of all forms of collectivism, because if such a liberalism were to win, the means to politically compel other people in act otherwise than they would peacefully agree to would be taken away. And nothing is worse for all collectivists than having the power to use force on others in society taken out of their hands. 

    It should not be too surprising that someone like Mr. Feffer, who is so convinced that he knows how the rest of humanity should live, work, and interact in the name of “saving the planet,” should find a model for the authoritarian Leviathan he craves in the boundaries of modern China. Let us not forget, China is a one-party political state imposed by the Chinese Communist Party under Chairman Mao’s firm leadership after the Second World War. 

    Let us not forget that President Xi, good communist that, no doubt, he is, follows in the Great Helmsman’s footsteps in arresting, imprisoning and executing dissidents of any and all types; as well as throwing perhaps up to a million members of an ethnic minority group into “re-education” camps for opposing the political dogma of the Chinese state. President Xi and his government assure “consensus” through censorship, surveillance, and the neighborhood spying system that he inherited from Chairman Mao. 

    With comprehensive government planning comes complete political control over virtually every facet of people’s lives. How could it be otherwise, when what is produced, as well as where and how, is dictated by the government? When every job and employment opportunity is directly or indirectly connected with serving and obeying the direction set by the government’s central plan? 

    But, but, but . . . this is not what I would plan, not what I would impose, it’s not what I would do, no doubt, Mr. Feffer would declare with a tone of being offended by any such suggestion. But it is, whether he believes and admits it or not. He uses the word “coercion” without hesitation or embarrassment. He knows he is right, the future of the world is at stake, and “something has to be done,” through government enforcement of the Green New Deal central plan. 

    The Fallacy of “Scientific” Predictions to Justify Planning

    Mr. Feffer might also say, but this a real danger. This is “science” telling us that something has to be done! Oh, you mean like the “real science” that guided many in the early decades of the 20th century, including many of the leading American “progressives” during that time, that eugenics taught us the superiorities and inferiorities of different racial groups, and the need for “race hygiene” through forced sterilization of those making up biologically and socially undesirable groups? (See my review of, “The Nazi Connection: Eugenics, American Racism, and German National Socialism”.)

    Or the type of frequent predictions over the last one hundred years that the world was going to run out of fossil fuels, including such forecasts in the 1970s and 1980s? Or the famous wager between Paul Ehrlich, who in his 1968 book, The Population Bomb believed that by 1990s more of the world’s population would be starving because of insufficient food and resource supplies, and Julian Simon, who said the opposite would be the case in the decades leading up to the 21st century? The general “scientific” consensus was that Ehrlich was right; Simon won the bet. 

    The funny thing about predicted “scientific” trends in both the natural and social sciences is that they often stop at some point, and even go in totally different directions. John Maynard Keynes, in a biographical essay on the 19th century economist, William Stanley Jevons, recounts that Jevons – a scientifically-oriented economist who was persuaded that Sunspots were the primary cause for the business cycle – was so certain that all the forests of Great Britain would soon be gone, that he hoarded huge amounts of paper bags; decades after his death, his relatives were still using them up. 

    The socially and ideologically self-righteous are, equally, so certain that they know the shape-of-things-to-come, unless they are in charge to set the world right, that they have neither hesitation or patience with any delay in their having the power and authority to command the changes that they believe are essential to save some part or even all of humanity from its short-sighted, ignorant, and uninformed ways. 

    The Costs of a Green New Deal

    Mr. Feffer, like many of the proponents of the Green New Deal talk about all the nice things they imagine will be forthcoming from this implementation of central planning to recreate how we all live and work. What they too often shunt aside is what it will all cost, besides the loss of many of our individual personal freedoms to manage and direct our own lives, and interact with others as we peacefully and honestly would desire to. 

    Even the “conservative” estimates run into the tens of trillions of dollars looking over the next several decades. The Green New Dealers just wave this all away. The rich “one-percent” will pay, or corporations will have more of their earnings siphoned off to cover the expenses. The fact is, the bulk of those in society will have to financially bear the burdens of the Green New Deal, because “the rich” do not possess the means to pay for all the central planning dreams in Mr. Peffer’s head. 

    On this point, it is perhaps appropriate to quote from Edwin L. Godkin (1831-1902), a generally classical liberal journalist who was the founder and long-time first editor of The Nation magazine (1865- 1899), the publication in which Mr. Feffer has recently made his case for coerced Green New Deal central planning. 

    In his book, Modern Problems of Democracy (1896), Mr. Godkin asked “Who Will Pay the Bills of Socialism” (pp. 225-248), and reminded his readers that the government has no sources of money to do all those wonderful things other than to tax most of the members of society, and that there is a widely held delusion on the part of the socialist planners that there are waiting in the wings all-knowing and wise social engineers who possess the ability to set it all right for all of us. As Mr. Godkin expressed it: 

    The State has no money which it does not wring from the hard earnings of sorely pressed people . . . The notion that there is a reservoir of wealth somewhere, either in the possession of the Government or the rich, which might be made to diffuse “plenty through a smiling land,” is a delusion which nearly all the writings of the ethical [“progressive”] economists tend to spread, and it is probably the most mischievous delusion which has ever taken hold on the popular mind. 

    It affects indirectly large numbers of persons, who, if it were presented to them boldly and without drapery, would probably repudiate it. But it steals into their brains through sermons, speeches, pamphlets, Fabian essays, and Bellamy Utopias, and disposes them, on humanitarian grounds, to great public extravagances, in buildings, in relief work, in pensions, in schools, in high State wages, and philanthropic undertakings which promise at no distant day to land the modem world in bankruptcy . . .

    It is diffusing through the working class of all countries, also, more and more every day, not only envy and hatred of the rich, but an increasing disinclination to steady industry, and an increasing disposition to rely on politics for the bettering of their condition. 

    Next in importance to the delusion that there is somewhere a great reservoir of wealth, which can still be drawn on for the general good, is the delusion that there is somewhere a reservoir of wisdom still untapped which can be drawn on for the execution of a new law of distribution. Not only is this current, but some of the philosophers have got into their heads that if our politicians had more money to spend, and more places to bestow, they would become purer and nobler and more public-spirited. 

    This theory is so much opposed to the experience of the human race that we are hardly more called on to argue against it than against the assertion that there will be no winter next year. We must take it for granted that what is meant is that there is somewhere a class of men whose services are now lost to the world, who would come into the field for the work of production and distribution under the new regime, and display a talent and discretion and judgment, which now cannot be had either for love or money, for the ordinary work of the world.   

    Well, there is no sign of such men at present. Nobody knows of their existence. The opportunities for display of their talents even now are immense, and yet they do not appear. Nobody says he has ever seen them. Nobody pretends that they could be found, except the ethical [“progressive”] economists, and they never mention their names or habitat. In fact, as in Bellamy’s case, the writers of the social romances are compelled to make them unnecessary by predicting a change in human nature, which will make us all wise, just, industrious, and self- denying.

    If only the current senior editors of The Nation magazine were to take heed to the criticisms and questions that almost 125 years ago were already made by their own founding editor, Edwin Godkin, about the disinformation and delusions of the type of socialist thinking underlying the idea of a Green New Deal, we might have been saved the misplaced and misguided thinking of John Feffer, with his dream of coercing mankind into his fairyland of a new climate change-free world. 

  • Mapping Which States Allow Military-Style Weapons

    In Texas and Ohio where two mass shootings occurred last weekend, military-style assault rifles and large capacity magazines are legal.

    In fact, as Statista’s Niall McCarthy notes, in both shootings, the weapons used were acquired legally.

    The vast majority of U.S. states do not restrict the sale of military-style weapons and only six states and the District of Columbia have banned them, according to the New York Times.

    Infographic: Where State Laws Allow Military-Style Weapons  | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    When it comes to large capacity magazines capable of holding up to 100 rounds, only eight states and the District of Columbia have restrictions in place.

    In the states where the two mass shootings occurred, carrying rifles in public is also allowed. Once again, a mere six states and D.C. prohibit openly carrying rifles in public.

  • Washington's Utterly Failed Diplomacy

    Via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    There seems no longer any attempt, or semblance, of seeking diplomacy by Washington. Sanctions and aggression are wielded with reckless abandon. Russia, China, and even America’s own supposed European allies are subject to sanctions by Washington in a high-handed dismissal of any mutual dialogue to resolve alleged grievances.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    US President Donald Trump has evolved a certain shrill maximalist attitude in international relations. It can be coined thus: my way or no way.

    One recent example is the imposition of sanctions on Iran’s Foreign Minister Mohammad Javad Zarif. That indicates the US cutting off any possibility of a negotiated de-escalation of tensions in the Persian Gulf.

    Iran’s Zarif revealed this week that when he was on a diplomatic visit to the US last month he was told by officials that he was expected at the White House for a meeting with President Trump. If Zarif baulked at the “offer” then he would be put on a sanctions list, he was allegedly informed. The Iranian top diplomat declined under the circumstances of apparent coercion, only to find that he was indeed later slapped with sanctions. What kind of American diplomacy is that? Sounds like a mafia-type offer not to refuse.

    This heavy-handed approach to “diplomacy” suggests that there is in fact no diplomacy emanating from Washington. President Trump tweeted last week that his administration was “running out of options” in dealing with Iran over mounting tensions in the Persian Gulf. It seems the White House is “offering” faux attempts for negotiation, while all the while mounting military options to strike at Iran.

    Another example of failed diplomacy is the resignation this week of US ambassador to Russia, John Huntsman. He quit his post partly out of frustration over the futility of his diplomatic duty to facilitate bilateral dialogue with Moscow. Huntsman’s job became untenable due to the manic anti-Russian animus now embedded in Washington, whereby any attempted dialogue would be portrayed as some kind of “treasonous act”.

    Still another example of US repudiation of diplomacy is Trump’s executive order this week to impose a total trade embargo on Venezuela. The South American country is effectively being starved into submission to accept Washington’s demand that elected President Nicolas Maduro stand down, according to US dictate, in order to allow a US-backed dubious opposition politician take the reins of power in Caracas.

    These examples, among many more, demonstrate that Washington has no intention of seeking diplomatic discourse with other nations, and is fully intent on issuing dictates – or else; in order to achieve its geopolitical aims.

    The appalling and dangerous thing is that Washington is operating on a basis of zero-sum ultimatum. The premises for its dictates are invariably unsubstantiated or irrational. Russia is treated like a pariah state over outlandish allegations of interference in US elections; Iran is treated like a pariah state over hollow claims about Iranian aggression; Venezuela is treated like a pariah state over allegations against an elected president. China is vilified over claims it is a “currency manipulator”. Europe is allegedly “taking advantage” of US trade terms. And so on, and so on. It is tyranny run amok.

    The standard of international law and norms of diplomacy are being trashed in the most willful and wanton ways, purely on the basis of American whim and self-serving agenda for domination.

    This is an extremely dangerous global situation whereby American political bias, and irrational bias to boot, is being made the standard instead of principles of international law and sovereignty of nations. There is absolutely no diplomacy. Only the writ of American demands for obeisance to Washington’s irrational dictate to satisfy its demands for hegemony.

    There seems no other way to describe the present global lawlessness of American presumed power and self-righteousness other than to call it a form of rogue-state fascism on steroids.

    When diplomacy, negotiations, dialogue and respect for sovereignty are so utterly disrespected by Washington – whose only response is sanctions and military aggression – then we should know that the present description of American power is not hyperbole. It is a lamentable description of reality whereby American diplomacy is no longer extant. It is becoming way past the possibility of conducting normal relations with this paranoid, lawless rogue regime. A nuclear rogue state, too, capable of destroying the planet on a whim or paranoid rush to its sick brain.

    Can American citizens rein in such an errant, irrational regime? Time will tell. But one thing seems for sure, world peace is continually endangered by the regime in Washington which is operating in its own realm of fantasy and criminal megalomania.

    Of course US diplomacy is an utter failure. Because in the twisted warmongering megalomania of Washington, diplomacy seems to have become totally irrelevant. Is that not fascism?

  • Great Migration: Wealthy Gen X-ers Are Moving To These States 

    Baby boomers, ages 55-75, have long been migrating to Southern states as they enter retirement years. Now a new study shows wealthy Generation X, ages 40-54, are doing much of the same.

    SmartAsset.com, a financial technology company that operates a website that offers financial advice, published a new study reveals how wealthy Gen X-ers are moving to Southern states.

    According to the study, six of the top ten states where wealthy Gen X-ers are moving to the South, with Washington as the outlier.

    Northeast has become widely unpopular with wealthy Gen X-ers. Most of the outflow is coming from Northeast states, four of which are New Jersey, Massachusetts, Pennsylvania, and New York.

    To determine the relocation of rich Gen X-ers, SmartAsset examined inflow and outflow data of people ages 35 to 54 with adjusted gross incomes of at least $100,000.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Top 5 States For Inflows:

    1. Florida

    More rich Generation Xers are headed to Florida than to any other state in our study. From 2015 to 2016, the Sunshine State welcomed 20,208 people between the ages of 35 and 54 who earn $100,000 and above. Our data shows that 11,110 moved out of the state within that same time period. This resulted in a total net inflow of 9,098 Generation Xers to Florida.

    2. Texas

    Texas ranks as the second most popular spot to which wealthy Gen Xers are moving. Though Texas had a lower net inflow than Florida, at 22,682 the total number of wealthy Generation Xers who moved into Texas was higher than the number who moved into Florida. Our data shows that 16,504 people between the ages 35 and 54 with adjusted gross incomes of $100,000 and above left Texas during that time span, resulting in a net inflow of 6,178 people.

    3. North Carolina

    North Carolina ranks third on our list of states where rich Generation Xers are moving, with a net inflow of 2,622 people from 2015 to 2016, which is roughly 29% of the net inflow of our top-ranking state, Florida. In total, 10,299 wealthy people aged 35 to 54 moved to the Tar Heel State during that time span, and 7,677 moved away.

    4. Washington

    Washington State is the only state in the top five that’s not in the South. The Pacific Northwestern state welcomed an inflow of 8,905 rich Gen Xers from 2015 to 2016. During that time period, 6,591 individuals between the ages of 35 and 54 moved out of the state. This resulted in a net inflow of 2,314 people, making Washington State the fourth-most popular state to which wealthy Generation Xers are moving.

    5. South Carolina

    With a net inflow of almost 500 people less than its northern neighbor, South Carolina saw a net inflow of 2,142 rich Generation Xers from 2015 to 2016. According to our data, 5,291 people moved into the state. Another 3,149 individuals between the ages of 35-54 and with an AGI of at least $100,000 moved away.

    Here’s the complete list:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    SmartAsset didn’t discuss the cause behind the Gen-Xer exodus from the Northeast. We think it could have something to do with the removal of state and local tax (SALT) deductions, disproportionately affecting high-tax, or Democrat, states (in the Northeast).

    This has direct implications on regional housing dynamics as property tax also falls under the cap. Capping the deduction will mean reduced tax incentives for homeownership. Indirectly, households will want to live in lower-income tax states (in the South).

    The chart below from Bank of America shows a heat map for average amount claimed under SALT deductions, with redder states farther above $10k and greener states below. The Northeast and West coast – traditionally liberal bastions and, according to some, explicitly targeted by the Trump administration – generally have higher average amounts and will feel most of the pain. Meanwhile, the West and South have lower average amounts and so those housing markets will be less impacted.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And so it seems SALT deductions could be responsible for large outflows of wealthy Gen X-ers in the Northeast to the South. This trend will likely gain momentum in the coming decade. And by 2040, it will be time for millennials to start their great migration during their retirement years. 

  • Two Tiered System Of Justice: Top FBI Officials Escape Prosecution, While Others Pay Heavy Price

    Authored by Sara Carter,

    All we need is what we already know.

    And what we know is that top senior officials at the FBI, thus far, have escaped any prosecution for lying and leaking.

    It wasn’t the same for others.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Just look at Army Lt. Gen. Michael Flynn, who is still fighting for justice against a bureaucracy that didn’t want him snooping around to discover how those in senior positions of power in the intelligence community and law enforcement were breaking the law and the spine of the U.S. constitution with unwarranted unmaskings, spying and weaponization of the intelligence apparatus.

    Flynn was targeted by former Obama Administration officials from the very beginning. Remember how former FBI Director James Comey laughed publicly about how he set up the former National Security Advisor. He also contends it wouldn’t have happened to another administration:

    Comey admitted he didn’t go through the White House counsel’s office, but arranged the meeting with FBI Special Agents Joe Pientka and Peter Strzok directly with Flynn. He said it was not standard practice. He said it was “something I probably wouldn’t have done or maybe gotten away with in a more … organized administration.”

    Let’s not forget that both Strzok and Pientka did not believe Flynn was lying when he spoke to them about the conversation he had with former Russian Ambassador Sergey Kislyak. In fact, they had the record of the conversation but didn’t tell Flynn they had it when asking him to recall the conversation. Comey even admitted to the fact that the agents didn’t believe Flynn was lying but it didn’t matter. The power of the Special Counsel prosecutors, the threat against dragging his son into the mess and their deep purse was enough to push Flynn to plead guilty.

    Comey, however, didn’t need to be pushed. He openly admitted to leaking his confidential memos, of which some contained classified information, to the media. He admitted he did it  through a close friend with the intention of getting his other friend former Deputy Attorney General Rod Rosenstein to call for a Special Counsel against President Trump. Comey knew full well the information regarding conspiracy with Russia was unverified garbage and he knew Trump had every right to fire him under Article 2 of the constitution. It didn’t matter.

    Comey obviously felt protected. He wasn’t worried about prosecution because those that would hold him accountable were already on his side and they wanted to target Trump. He also had lap dogs in the media spewing every lie he, along with his cohorts, to decided to put out and no one questioning their intentions or actions. It is a perfect storm.

    I guess this is why so many people were stunned when DOJ attorney General William Barrdeclined prosecution of Comey for leaking. And although sources have told this reporter that the prosecution would not have been as solid as what the information being collected by appointed Connecticut Attorney John Durham, who is investigating the matter,  I’m still not certain that I believe it. I, like so many others, have become a little jaded over the developments.

    I said, a little, because I haven’t given up all hope. I know America cannot afford to have a two-tiered system of justice and I believe in Barr, for now.

    Liberty does not exist in a banana republic, where there is one set of rules for the political elite and another for its citizens. It would be the beginning of the destruction of the foundation our nation was built on: The Constitution.

    If we no longer believe in what it says, what will it mean? It will mean nothing and our nation will no longer be that beacon of light for so many around the world that live in unjust societies.

    But it’s hard to believe when we see what happened with former Deputy Director Andrew McCabe, who was referred to the Department of Justice by Inspector General Michael Horowitz in 2018, for leaking information to the media and lying multiple times to investigators. Now it appears McCabe knew early on after Horowitz’s referred him that the DOJ, then under Attorney General Jeff Sessions, would not pursue charges against him. Sessions also failed to pursue charges against former Deputy Assistant Director of International Operations Bryn Paarmann, who leaked information related to the Russia investigation that was sealed in court documents, as first reported on SaraACarter.com.

    No wonder McCabe is so emboldened. He’s been all over MSNBC and other cable news outlets recently pushing more and more lies about President Trump and now snobbishly pushing a lawsuit against the DOJ and FBI to reinstate him.

    As an American, I’m more than disturbed -I’m sickened – by their uncanny ability to skirt the law and how their friends in high ranking positions are working diligently still to protect them.

    If it wasn’t for Judicial Watch’s tenacity and perseverance to obtain documents through the Freedom of Information Act process we wouldn’t have the whole story. Tom Fitton, the president of Judicial Watch, discussed at length this past week that the records reveal that  14 referrals of FBI employees were given to the bureau’s internal Office of Professional Responsibility (OPR) for the unauthorized disclosure of sensitive or classified information. Only four of those people were reprimanded. They, however, did not get the same treatment as Flynn, whose fighting in the courts for his freedom and spent millions of dollars defending himself against the deep purse of the government.

    And Judicial Watch has not stopped fighting. The group is going to court for McCabe’s internal texts. There’s a reason why the senior brass at the FBI don’t want those public and has been doing everything to keep those texts from going public.

    Just read this section below from one of the latest trove of documents obtained by the watchdog group: It describes exactly when and how McCabe got away with lying and leaking.

    “SES [Senior Executive Service] employee released the FBI Sensitive information to a reporter and lacked candor not under oath and under oath when questioned about it, in violation of Offense Codes 4.10 (Unauthorized Disclosure – Sensitive Information); 2.5 (Lack of Candor- No Oath); and 2.6 (Lack of Candor – Under Oath).

    The proposed decision in this matter was made by the AD, OPR.  The final decision was made by Attorney General Jeff Sessions. DOK retains final decision-making authority for certain high-ranking FBI officials.

    MITIGATION: Employee as (redacted) years of FBI service and a remarkable performance record. Employee was facing unprecedented challengers and pressures.

    AGGRAVATION: Employee held an extremely high position and was expected to comport himself with the utmost integrity. Lack of candor is incompatible with the FBI’s Core Values.

    FINAL ACTION(S): OPR PROPOSED DECISION Proposed DISMISSAL

                                  OPR FINAL DECISION:  DISMISSAL

    McCabe was fired from the FBI on March 16, 2018, for leaking to the media and lacking “candor.” Then-U.S. Attorney General Jeff Sessions in a statement said:

    After an extensive and fair investigation and according to Department of Justice procedure, the Department’s Office of the Inspector General (OIG) provided its report on allegations of misconduct by Andrew McCabe to the FBI’s Office of Professional Responsibility (OPR).

    The FBI’s OPR then reviewed the report and underlying documents and issued a disciplinary proposal recommending the dismissal of Mr. McCabe. Both the OIG and FBI OPR reports concluded that Mr. McCabe had made an unauthorized disclosure to the news media and lacked candor − including under oath − on multiple occasions.”

    We Should Demand Justice

    Americans need to demand that justice be equal. We need to keep fighting for the truth and hold those in positions accountable. Remember they work for us. We pay them with our taxes and they are only allowed to do what we allow them to do.

    We are not a banana republic. We are a nation of exceptional people with a document so precious that we are the envy of other nations and people.

    We should not give that away to hungry political beasts bent on power because in the end, I’ve said this before, we will only have ourselves to blame.

  • JPMorgan: The Fed Will Need To Restart QE Soon

    Earlier this week we received an unexpected email from a researcher at the Federal Reserve with an “urgent request” to provide the US central bank with details on an analysis we presented on Tuesday, according to which the Fed was about to be hit with a major liquidity drain as the Treasury, unshackled from the limits of debt ceiling constraints, set off to replenish its cash balance from roughly $130 billion to $350 billion over the next two months, as disclosed recently by the US Treasury.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The reason why the Fed reached out is because as we explained in “Forget China, The Fed Has A Much Bigger Problem On Its Hands“, according to an analysis from Bank of America, the Fed may be forced to launch Quantitative Easing as soon as Q4 to provide the market with the much needed liquidity, or else suffer the consequences of a major liquidity shortage. To wit, in describing the various steps the Fed can engage in, this is what the BofA strategist said:

    Outright QE: after OMO dealer capacity is exhausted the Fed may need to start permanently expanding its balance sheet. The Fed would likely describe this as offsetting “bank reserve demand and growth in other non-reserve liabilities”. Regardless, it would represent the Fed permanently buying USTs outright to maintain control of funding markets well above the ZLB.

    Apparently this is something that the Fed, which until recently was engaging in additional liquidity draining via QT, was unaware about, and since a return of QE – something that Trump has yet to demand – would cause all sorts of political problems and demand lengthy congressional explanations, the BofA analysis was one of the various factors cited for the dramatic rebound in the market starting on Tuesday, which promptly transformed into the strongest 3-day rally of the year.

    Well, it’s no longer just Bank of America that believes the Fed may be forced to pursue QE to replenish the sudden drain in interbank liquidity that would accompany such a dramatic cash rebuild by the Treasury.

    In the latest Flows and Liquidity report from JPMorgan’s Nikolaos Panigirtzoglou published late on Friday, the strategist analyzes various components of market liquidity and concludes that “liquidity will likely continue to tighten gradually in the US banking system even after the Fed has stopped its balance sheet shrinkage.”

    Specifically, the JPM analysis looks at the bank’s model of US excess money supply, which derives a medium-term money demand target based on 1) the transaction motive, which relates money to nominal incomes and 2) the portfolio motive, which relates money to the nominal values of other assets such as bonds and equities, and 3) the precautionary motive, proxied by US policy uncertainty, whereby agents wish to hold more cash during periods of elevated risk perceptions.

    This model suggests that this broad US excess liquidity evaporated during the course of 2018 and shifted further into negative or contractionary territory this year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The last time this measure of US excess money supply had shifted into negative territory was during the euro debt crisis years of 2010- 2012, which prompted the Fed to launch QE2 (as well as Operation Twist and QE3) and also eventually resulted in the ECB violating Article 123 of the Maastricht treat, prohibiting monetary financing of states, and led to Draghi launching his own QE.

    As Panigirtzoglou further explains, the contraction in JPM’s measure of broad liquidity this year has been mostly more driven by a rise in demand and less by a fall in money supply (relative to US GDP). In particular the main drivers have been the rise in uncertainty and the rise in the stock of US financial assets, both of which depress excess money supply via boosting demand.

    And while the full analysis focuses on various minutae beyond the scope of this article, one of the things the JPM strategist focuses on was the market’s worries about bank liquidity which have intensified over the past year as the Fed funds rate approached the Interest On Excess Reserves (IOER). This resulted in the Fed twice, in June and December 2018, raising the IOER rate by 20bp rather than the 25bp increase in the Fed funds corridor, and in April 2019 cutting IOER by a further 5bp.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The above chart confirms that starting in early 2019, excess reserves in the banking system shrank to precarious levels, and some needed to resort to the Fed funds market to meet their liquidity needs as reserves are not uniformly distributed across the banking system; some or all of these banks ended up paying rates than are even higher than the IOER.  As the chart above shows, this appears to be happening since the end of last year. On December 19th the Fed funds volume-weighted 75% percentile rose above the IOER rate for the first time. In other words, a quarter of the Fed funds market volume is trading above the IOER rate at the time. Since then this tightening has broadened with the median Fed funds rate moving above the IOER in March this year and fixing between 4-6bp above IOER persistently since then.

    What is causing this demonstrated shrinkage in liquidity? The key driver is, of course, quantitative tightening, or the shrinking of the Fed’s balance sheet (which the Fed announced it would halt on July 31). The reserve balances at the Fed began to decline well before the Fed started shrinking its balance sheet at the end of 2017. Figure 11 shows that these excess reserves by US depository institutions (in excess of regulatory minimum reserve requirements) peaked almost five years ago at $2.7tr. They had declined to $2.1tr by September 2017 just before the Fed embarked on its balance sheet normalization journey. They declined by another $600bn since then to $1.5tr currently in line with the Fed’s balance sheet shrinkage.

    As JPM explains, that earlier reserve depletion has been the result of mostly two factors: the fast growth of banknotes in circulation from $1.2tr in 2014 to $1.7tr currently and the build-up of the Treasury’s General Account at the Federal Reserve from an average of only $50bn before 2014 to around $350bn at the beginning of this year. Both of these two types of Federal Reserve liabilities had drained liquidity from the US banking system as they grew at the expense of depository institutions reserves.

    Here is where we get to the issue at hand, namely the upcoming rapid liquidity drain as a result of the Treasury’s stated desire to build up cash. As discussed previously, the Treasury’s General (cash) Account has been depleted since the beginning of the year due to the debt ceiling issue, offsetting in part the reduction in reserves caused by the Fed’s balance sheet shrinkage, but this is now set to go into reverse into year-end as the Treasury issues T-bills to replenish its General Account. In other words even with the Fed stopping its balance sheet shrinkage, we are likely to see significant reserve depletion into year-end as the General Account is replenished following a resolution in the debt ceiling issue.

    This is precisely what BofA looked at last week when it concluded that the roughly $200 billion liquidity drain over the next two months will be so sever, the Fed may have no choice but to resort to QE.

    But wait, wasn’t the end of QT – something so urgently demanded by president Trump – supposed to neutralize the rapid depletion of reserves?

    While the termination of the Fed’s balance sheet shrinkage process would by itself slow the reserve tightening process, it won’t stop it. This is because of three reasons.

    • First, as even the Fed was surprised to find last week, now that the debt ceiling issue is resolved, the US Treasury will start replenishing its General Account at the Fed by issuing more T-bills. Replenishing the General Account over the coming months would mechanically drain liquidity from the US banking system by reducing reserves.
    • Second, banknotes in circulation have been on a structural uptrend over the past five years driven by offshore demand for highly denominated dollar notes (one wonders if this is due to foreigners parking their wealth in paper instead of digital bank accounts, ahead of NIRP and the devaluation of non-paper money). By itself this force should reduce reserves gradually by $80bn per year.
    • Third, the assets of the US banking system are growing naturally roughly in line with nominal GDP, i.e. around 4% per year, something that would put downward pressure on the ratio of reserves to banking system assets even if reserves are unchanged.

    Putting this all together implies – to JPMorgan at least – that liquidity will likely continue to tighten gradually in the US banking system even after the Fed has stopped its balance sheet shrinkage, and – here is the punchline – in order to stop this liquidity tightening from advancing further, “the Fed may need to start open market operations sooner rather than later to inject reserves into the US banking system.”

    Open market operations is, of course, another name for QE, which as we have been saying all along is inevitable if for no other reason than to monetize the upcoming wave of UST supply especially if China decides to boycott (or outright sell) US Treasurys. Indeed, the Fed may have no choice but to launch QE simply because of too much Treasury supply and the market’s ability to warehouse it – a challenge that will only grow in the coming years, which is why we have been warning for much of the past year to watch out for market crashes – just like the failure of Lehman – these are a convenient and easy scapegoat for the Fed returning launching another round of QE… much to Trump’s applause.

     

     

  • Federal Judges Are Waging War On The Fourth Amendment

    Authored by Chris Calton via The Mises Institute,

    In 1984, as part of Ronald Reagan’s renewed war on drugs, the Drug Enforcement Administration launched Operation Pipeline. This program was inspired by the strategies employed by state troopers in New Mexico who, after pulling somebody over, asked specific questions designed to determine whether the driver might be a drug trafficker. Combined with the financial incentives of federal grants for drug enforcement and civil asset forfeiture laws, state and local police had strong new incentives to find reasons to stop vehicles and search for drugs. Operation Pipeline was meant, in part, to train officers how to legally harass drivers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The problem, of course, was the pesky Fourth Amendment, which prohibited warrantless searches without probable cause. The “probable cause” requirement for warrantless searches is conspicuously open to interpretation, but it imposed important constraints on police harassment by placing the burden of proof on the officer to produce specific facts to justify his suspicion. In 1968, however, the Supreme Court granted the first exemption to this constraint by establishing the “stop-and-frisk” rule. In Terry v. Ohio, the Court ruled that as long as a “reasonably prudent man” would believe that a suspect might be armed, the burden of proof to show probable cause is unnecessary.

    The ruling was justified out of concern for officer safety, but it paved the way for Operation Pipeline sixteen years later. The shift from “probable cause” to “reasonable suspicion,” a criterion officers could more easily meet in court, was a sufficient precedent for strategically designed traffic-stop questions to establish legally valid suspicion for vehicle drug searches. Theoretically, the courts could still strike the practice down as unconstitutional, but the Terry case proved this unlikely.

    Still, there were many constitutional questions for the Supreme Court to work out. Unsurprisingly, the court served as “loyal foot soldiers” in the Drug war, as Justice Stevens put it, by sanctioning virtually every tactic the police invented, no matter how egregiously it violated civil liberties.

    The first important ruling on roadway privacy came in 1991. In Florida v. Bostick, two officers boarded a Greyhound bus in Fort Lauderdale and woke up a sleeping passenger named Terrance Bostick. When the officers asked permission to search Bostick’s bags, he complied, despite possessing a pound of cocaine. However, when Bostick went to court, his attorney’s argued that the police officers had neither probable cause nor reasonable suspicion to justify the search of Bostick’s luggage, and therefore the cocaine should be inadmissible in court. Florida’s State Supreme Court ruled in Bostick’s favor, claiming that bus searches are inherently unconstitutional because the police did not allow passengers to leave the bus during the raid. The case went to the US Supreme Court who reversed the decision, claiming that even though the officers were effectively holding Bostick and other passengers hostage, “a reasonable person” would have felt perfectly comfortable denying armed police officers the right to search his luggage.

    With this ruling, the loose “reasonable suspicion” requirement expanded officer prerogative in any situation in which they could show that their searches were voluntary. This changed the way officers were trained to give orders. Like contestants on Jeopardy, officers were taught to give their orders in the form of a question— “Will you put your hands against the wall while we search you?” for example. The courts made this easier by interpreting silence as consent, establishing “consent searches” as standard and legal police practices.

    Although Florida v. Bostick took place on a bus as part of highway monitoring activities, the ruling did not clarify any legal boundaries for traffic stops. This came five years later in the case Whren v. United States. After pulling Michael Whren over, a police officer arrested him for possession of crack cocaine. By the officer’s own admission, he pulled Whren over because he suspected him of possessing drugs, but officially, the stop was justified because Whren failed to use his turn signal. The defense argued that the Fourth Amendment prohibited the use of a minor traffic violation as a pretext for a drug search, so the drugs should be inadmissible in court.

    The Supreme Court unanimously upheld Whren’s conviction, though, establishing two important precedents. First, they declared that the officer’s intentions are irrelevant as long as there is any objective criteria that could justify the traffic stop — and given the endless list of traffic laws, this ruling effectively grants officers unlimited discretion in pulling drivers over. Second, the decision settled the legal debate over “pretext stops,” the use of minor traffic violations as a pretext for vehicle drug searches.

    Even after the Whren ruling, civilians still theoretically have the right to refuse searches, based on the absurd notion that a “reasonable person” would feel free to deny an officer’s request, as established by Bostick. A few months after Whren, though, the Ohio court implicitly rejected the Bostick ruling. After Robert Robinette was pulled over for speeding, he consented to a search of his vehicle— illustrating the tactics of both pretext stops and consent searches in the Drug War. When officers discovered a small amount of cannabis and a single amphetamine pill, they arrested Robinette. Because Ohio v. Robinette reached the state court prior to the final Whren ruling, the pretext stop controversy was still an open question, which made the case viable. But what made the Robinette case important was that the Ohio court pushed back against the Bostick argument by stipulating that for a reasonable person to feel comfortable denying consent to a search, the officers had to inform the driver that they had the right to refuse. It was this stipulation that took Robinette to the higher court, at which point SCOTUS overturned the ruling for being “unrealistic.”

    According to SCOTUS, it is more realistic for an untrained civilian to know their rights, which are apparently subject to constant change, than it is for professional police officers to inform drivers of their rights to refuse a search. Taking these expectations to a new extreme, the 2001 case Atwater v. Lago Vista ruled that officers had the legal right to arrest drivers who violated misdemeanor traffic stops, even if the punishment for the violation was a fine, rather than jail time. With this ruling, the court’s imaginary “reasonable person” would presumably know that if they refused to consent to a drug search, they faced the risk of being handcuffed for whatever petty infraction got them pulled over. None of this matters in the twisted logic of the criminal justice system, of course.

    To complete the remarkable expansion of highway monitoring prerogatives, the 2004 case Illinois v Caballesruled that it did not legally constitute a search, regardless of consent or pretext, for officers to walk drug-sniffing dogs around a person’s vehicle. Given the precedents established in the previous cases, it may seem that this ruling added no discretionary power the police did not already possess, but this is not quite true. Checkpoints are usually justified as searching for drunk drivers, but they have also been established to randomly verify that drivers have valid licenses, vehicle registrations, and car insurance. In some cases, as James Bovard has noted, the police had no qualms admitting that the true reason for the checkpoints was random drug searches. But sobriety checkpoints fail to meet even the loose requirements of pretext stops, and every now and then, police run into civilians who actually know their rights and refuse to consent to searches. In the Cabellas ruling, the court claimed that drug dogs do not violate the Fourth Amendment, and if the dog signals the presence of drugs, the officers have probable cause to search the vehicle without consent. Even after a recent case has demonstrated that drug-sniffing dogs have a roughly fifty percent accuracy rate, the courts have continued to uphold the practice.

    The result is that the police now enjoy unlimited reign in harassing, searching, and arresting drivers. Motivated by civil forfeiture laws that empower them to confiscate civilian property without charging the victim with a crime, the police have institutionalized the practice of conducting mass road stops as means of searching civilians for property to confiscate (a practice recently curtailed by a SCOTUS ruling, but not eliminated). Highway robbery has been legally sanctioned and encouraged by all branches of the federal government, so that state and local police forces can only accurately be understood is roadway pirates.

  • Attention Millennials: New Study Reveals E-Scooters Aren't As Green As They Seem

    A new study shows shared electric scooter schemes, popularized by Bird, Bolt, Lime, Lyft, and Spin, might not be as green as you think, could actually be damaging the planet.

    Researchers from North Carolina State University discovered that shared electric scooters are more environmentally friendly than automobiles, but not when compared to particular forms of public transportation, bicycles, and walking.

    Millennials tend to consider themselves as an eco-friendly generation, embracing all new forms of “carbon-free technologies,” like electric scooters.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But what the scooter companies aren’t telling them are the emissions from manufacturing (like the lithium-ion battery and aluminum parts), transportation (shipping the scooter from China or Southeast Asia), and maintenance of a scooter fleet (collecting, charging, and redistributing scooters) is rather dirty for the environment.

    “If you only think about the segment of the life cycle you can see, which would be standing on the scooter where there’s no tailpipe, it’s easy to make that assumption,” Jeremiah Johnson, corresponding author of the study and an associate professor of civil, construction and environmental engineering at NC State, told The Verge. “But if you take a step back, you can see all the other things that are a bit hidden in the process.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Johnson and his research staff determined that the average global warming impact for a shared electric scooter is 202g of CO2 per mile traveled.

    About 50% of the carbon footprint per mile traveled is from materials and manufacturing, and 43% is from the collection and distribution process to recharge the fleet. A little less than 5% of the environmental impact is from electricity used to charge them.

    At 202g of CO2 per mile traveled, the shared electric scooter is a much cleaner alternative versus the automobile at 414g of CO2 per mile.

    Public transportation, like a bus, only emits 82g of CO2 per mile, and the use of a private bike at 8g of CO2 for the same distance. So it seems that conventional ways of moving around a metropolitan area are much cleaner than renting electric scooters.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Researchers said, “the goal of this study is to identify the key drivers for adverse environmental impacts, to offer recommendations on policies or practices that would reduce these impacts, and to compare the overall impacts to other modes of transportation.”

    They first said third parties who drive around towns collecting scooters for charging have to limit their CO2 usage.

    A scooter company called Lime could be soon introducing a new option that allows people to reserve a scooter ahead of time, thus reducing the amount of unnecessary driving that takes place when collectors are out searching for scooters to recharge.

    Researchers said scooter companies need to build better scooters that last longer, could be a temporary solution to reduce the environmental impact.

    “If the scooter companies are able to extend the life of their scooters without doubling the impacts of materials and manufacturing, that would reduce the per-mile burden,” Johnson said. “If you can make these things last two years, it would have a very large impact.”

    Scooter company Bird could soon unveil its next-generation scooter with a longer-lasting battery and more durable parts. Lime has also rolled out more advanced models to improve the economics of its business.

    And it was only in April when a German study published by Christoph Buchal of the University of Cologne, said electric automobiles have “significantly higher CO2 emissions than diesel cars.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Buchal said that is due to the significant amount of energy used in the mining and processing of lithium, cobalt, and manganese, which are critical raw materials for the production of electric car batteries.

    So maybe the green movement with electric automobiles and scooters to save the world is the biggest scam of our lifetime…

  • Like "Crack Cocaine For CFOs" – Aussie Construction Giant Collapses After Hidden-Debt Loophole Exposed

    Authored by Nick Corbishley via WolfStreet.com,

    This “crack cocaine for CFOs” was also extensively used by Carillion until it collapsed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The world’s seventh largest construction and services company (by sales), with subsidiaries around the globe, Grupo ACS, has revealed it is making extensive use of reverse factoring, a controversial financing technique that played a key role in the collapse of UK construction giant Carillion. In a conference call with analysts, ACS chairman, Florentino Perez, said the firm has been rolling out factoring “across the group,” to “more efficiently manage cash flows and match revenues and costs over the course of the year.”

    The admission by ACS that it is using reverse factoring of payables across its vast global empire has spooked investors, given the malign role this supply chain financing tool played in the collapse of Carillion. As Fitch ratings wrote in a report last year that reverse factoring essentially served as a “debt loophole,” enabling Carillion to hide the true scale of its growing debt load. But not indefinitely. In January 2018, it collapsed in almost free-fall fashionunder the sheer weight of that debt.

    The global operations of ACS, a Spanish company, are significantly larger than Carillion. Its decision to disclose its use of factoring was probably prompted by recent allegations from Hong Kong research group GMT about the rampant use of reverse factoring of payables and other “accounting shenanigans” at ACS’ Australian subsidiary, CIMIC, which is majority owned by ACS’s Germany subsidiary, Hochtief.

    In a report released on April 30, GMT Research said that CIMIC, which builds many of Australia’s biggest infrastructure projects, was using “factoring agreements” with banks and financial institutions to create the illusion of cash flow, reduce the appearance of debt, and lower the appearance of its leverage ratios.

    CIMIC initially responded to the accusations by saying its accounts are fully audited, fully compliant, and accurate. But that didn’t seem to work. So, in its half yearly report in mid-July it admitted that its factoring level was close to $2 billion, though it did not differentiate between “reverse factoring” and classic “factoring.” Like most companies, CIMIC lumps the two together on its balance sheet under “trade and other payables.”

    In July, the company also reported weaker half-year results than expected, including significantly lower operating cash flow. The news triggered a brutal sell off of its stock, which tumbled 19% in one day’s trading. The shares are now at a three-year low, having plunged 29% since mid-July and 35% since GMT first published the report:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Investors are clearly worried, and probably with good reason. According to Australia Financial Review, “CIMIC has developed a reputation for poor transparency” since its takeover by ACS in 2014, “refusing to answer questions from the media and refusing interviews, even when it reports financial results.”

    Here’s how reverse factoring works: a company hires a financial intermediary, such as a bank or a specialist firm to pay a supplier promptly (e.g. 15 days after invoicing), in return for the supplier accepting a small discount. The company repays the intermediary at a later date, often on more extended terms than it had with the supplier.

    Both sides feel like they have benefited: the supplier gets quick access to the cash it’s owed, albeit at the price of forgoing a small piece of that cash, while the buyer is able to borrow money without having to disclose it as debt, meaning that it can extend its payment terms and expand its borrowing, while maintaining its leverage ratios.

    Investors and auditors are often left none the wiser, since it’s entirely up to the company whether it chooses to classify this new debt as a loan or as trades payable. Most choose the latter. It is virtually impossible to discern by looking at a company’s trade payables whether reverse factoring of payables is being included unless the company expressly says so. Most choose not to.

    And it’s not just CIMIC that is making extensive use of factoring and reverse factoring, but ACS’s entire global business. ACS said in its interim results released on Monday that its total factoring bill was running at €2.3 billion ($3.7 billion) at the end of June. Hochtief said it had factored €1.7 billion. Neither company differentiated between factoring and reverse factoring, so investors are still not much the wiser.

    Reverse factoring has been in practice for decades but has hugely expanded in recent years, although no one really knows by how much due to the lack of disclosure by the firms that use it. As cash flows get squeezed and debts are piling up, the temptation has grown to use reverse factoring to improve the outward appearance of cash flows and reduce the outward appearance of “debt” and their leverage ratios. Banks and specialized financial institutions in the supply chain finance industry are more than happy to meet that demand.

    “This is crack cocaine for CFOs,” says Dean Paatsch, of Australian governance advisory service Ownership Matter.

    “Once they start using it, it’s very difficult to stop.” Large users include telecoms, consumer good companies, chemicals, retail, aerospace and, of course, the construction industry.

    Getting addicted can be dangerous. When a company gets into financial distress, its bank simply cancels the reverse factoring program, leaving the company stranded and having to scratch together enough funding to pay down its accounts payable to the terms agreed to with suppliers. For a company that is already in dire financial straits and whose last major source of cash flow has just disappeared, it’s an impossible task — hence the reason why a 200-year old company like Carillion collapsed so quickly and with so little warning.

    *  *  *

    Enjoy reading WOLF STREET and want to support it? Using ad blockers – I totally get why – but want to support the site? You can donate “beer money.” I appreciate it immensely.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 10th August 2019

  • To Avoid A Collapse Means Restoring Glass-Steagall (Without The Green New Deal)

    Authored by Matthew Ehret via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    With the recent discussion of the collapse of the western system of banking (and neo-liberal ‘post-truth’ values more generally) a serious overview of the post-WWII stripping down of nation states is in order. Over the past couple of weeks, various figures like France’s Finance Minister Bruno Le Maire and American Senator Elizabeth Warren have called for a re-organization of the banking system with Le Maire saying on July 13 that the Bretton Woods “has reached its limits”, and Warren stating on July 22 that “the country’s economic foundation is fragile. A single shock could bring it all down.” It is no secret that the western nations sit atop the largest financial bubble in human history with global derivatives estimated at $550 trillion to $1.2 quadrillion.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As refreshing as it is to hear such candid admissions of the system’s failure from high level political figures, when asked what they wish will replace this bankrupt order, neither Le Maire nor Warren have any desire to work with the Russia-China Belt and Road alliance and are unfortunately on record supporting policies cooked up by the very same oligarchs they appear to despise in the form of the Green New Deal. In spite of what many of its progressive proponents would wish, such a global green reform would not only impose Malthusian depopulation upon nation states globally were it accepted, but would establish a the supranational authority of a technocratic managerial elite as enforcers of a “de-carbonization agenda”.

    Due to the rampant lack of comprehension of how this crisis was created such that such idiotic proposals as “green new deals” are now seriously being suggested as remedies to our current ills, a bit of history is in order.

    Some necessary background

    “The money changers have fled from their high seats in the temple of our civilization. We may now restore that temple to the ancient truths. The measure of the restoration lies in the extent to which we apply social values more noble than mere monetary profit.”

    – Franklin Delano Roosevelt, first Inaugural Address 1933

    Knowing that the “money changers” had only been able to create the great bubbles of the 1920s via their access to the deposits of the commercial banks, Franklin Roosevelt made the core of his battle against the abuses of Wall Street centre around a 1933 legislation entitled “Glass-Steagall”, named after the two federally elected officials who led the reform with FDR. This was a bill which forced the absolute separation of productive from speculative banking, guaranteeing via the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) only those commercial banking assets associated with the productive economy, but forcing any speculative losses arising from investment banking to be suffered by the gambler. The striking success of this law inspired other countries around the world to establish similar bank separation. Alongside principles of capital budgeting, public credit, parity pricing and a commitment to scientific and technological development, a dynamic had been created that would express the greatest hope for the world, and the greatest fear for the financial empire occupying the City of London and Wall Street.

    The death of John F. Kennedy ushered in a new age of pessimism and cultural irrationalism from which our society has never recovered. The destruction of a long term vision as exemplified by the space program, the St. Lawrence Seaway and the New Deal projects had resulted in a tendency within the population to increasingly look upon present pleasures as the only reality, and future goods as the mystical expression of the sum of present pleasures. In this new philosophical setting, so alien in previous epochs, money was permitted to act as a power unto itself for short term gains instead of serving the investments into the real productive wealth of society. With this new paradigm shift into the “now”, a new economic model was adopted to replace the industrial economic model which had proven itself in the years preceding and following World War II.

    The name for this system was “post-industrial monetarism”. This would be a system ushered in by Richard Nixon’s announcement of the destruction of the fixed-exchange rate Bretton Woods system and its replacement by the “floating rate” system of post 1971 fame. During that same fateful year of 1971, another ominous event took place: the formation of the Rothschild Inter-Alpha Group of banks under the umbrella of the Royal Bank of Scotland, which today controls upwards of 70% of the global financial system. The stated intention of this Group would be found in the 1983 speech by Lord Jacob Rothschild: “two broad types of giant institutions, the worldwide financial service company and the international commercial bank with a global trading competence, may converge to form the ultimate, all-powerful, many-headed financial conglomerate.”

    This policy demanded the destruction of the sovereign nation-state system and the imposition of a new feudal structure of world governance through the age-old scheme of controlling the money system on the one side, and playing on the vices of credulous fools who, by allowing their nations to be ruled by the belief that hedonistic market forces govern the world, would seal their own children’s doom.

    All the while, geopolitical structures foreign to the United States constitutional traditions were imposed by nests of Oxford-trained Rhodes Scholars and Fabians who converted America into a global “dumb giant” enforcing a neo colonial program under a “Anglo-US Special Relationship”. The Dulles brothers, McGeorge Bundy, Kissinger, and Bush all represent names that advanced this British directed plan throughout the 20th century.

    The Big Bang

    The great “liberalization” of world commerce began with a series of waves through the 1970s, and moved into high gear with the interest rate hikes of Federal Reserve Chairman Paul Volcker in 1980-82, the effects of which both annihilated much of the small and medium sized entrepreneurs, opened the speculative gates into the “Savings and Loan” debacle and also helped cartelize mineral, food, and financial institutions into ever greater behemoths. Volcker himself described this process as the “controlled disintegration of the US economy” upon becoming Fed Chairman in 1978. The raising of interest rates to 20-21% not only shut down the life blood of much of the US economic base, but also threw the third world into greater debt slavery, as nations now had to pay usurious interest on US loans.

    In 1986, the City of London announced the beginning of a new era of economic irrationalism with Margaret Thatcher’s “Big Bang” deregulation. This wave of liberalization took the world by storm as it swept aside the separation of commercial, deposit and investment banking which had been the post-world war cornerstone in ensuring that the will of private finance would never again hold more sway than the power of sovereign nation-states.

    After decades of chipping away at the structure of regulation that FDR’s bold intervention into history had built, the “Big Bang” set a precedent for similar financial de-regulation into the “Universal Banking” model in other parts of the western world.

    The Derivative Time Bomb is Set

    In September 1987, the 20 year foray into speculation resulted in a 23% collapse of the Dow Jones on October 19, 1987. Within hours of this crash, international emergency meetings had been convened with former JP Morgan tool Alan Greenspan introducing a “solution” which would have the future echoes of hyperinflation and fascism written all over it.

    “Creative financial instruments” was the Orwellian name given to the new financial asset popularized by Greenspan, but otherwise known as “derivatives”. New supercomputing technologies were increasingly used in this new venture, not as the support for higher nation building practices, and space exploration programs as their NASA origins intended, but would rather become perverted to accommodate the creation of new complex formulas which could associate values to price differentials on securities and insured debts that could then be “hedged” on those very spot and futures markets made possible via the destruction of the Bretton Woods system in 1971. So while an exponentially self-generating monster was created that could end nowhere but in a meltdown, “market confidence” rallied back in force with the new flux of easy money. The physical potential to sustain human life continued to plummet.

    NAFTA, the Euro and the End of History

    It is no coincidence that within this period, another deadly treaty was passed called the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA). With this Agreement made law, protective programs that had kept North American factories in the U.S and Canada were struck down, allowing for the export of the lifeblood of highly skilled industrial workforce to Mexico where skills were low, technologies lower, and salaries lower still. With a stripping of its productive assets, North America became increasingly reliant on exporting cheap resources and services for its means of existence. Again, the physically productive powers of society would collapse, yet monetary profits in the ephemeral “now” would skyrocket. This was replicated in Europe with the creation of the Maastricht Treaty in 1992 establishing the Euro by 1994 while the “liberalization” process of Perestroika replicated this agenda in the former Soviet Union. While some personalities gave this agenda the name “End of History” and others “the New World Order”, the effect was the same.

    Universal Banking, NAFTA, Euro integration and the creation of the derivative economy in a space of just several years would induce a cartelization of finance through newly legalized mergers and acquisitions at a rate never before seen. The multitude of financial institutions that had existed in the early 1980s were absorbed into each other at great speed through the 1990s in true “survival of the fittest” fashion. No matter what level of regulation were attempted under this new structure, the degree of conflict of interest, and private political power was uncontrollable, as evidenced in the United States, by the shutdown of any attempt by Securities and Exchange Commission head Brooksley Born to fight the derivative cancer at its early stages.

    By 1999 a politically castrated Bill Clinton found himself signing into law a treaty authored by then Treasury Secretary Larry Summers known as the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act, which would be the final nail in the coffin for the Glass-Steagall separation of commercial and investment banking in the United States. The new age of unregulated trading and creation of over-the-counter derivatives caused these strange financial instruments to grow from $60 trillion in 2000 to $600 trillion by 2008.

    The 2000-2008 Frenzy

    With Glass-Steagall now removed, legitimate capital such as pension funds could be used to start a hedge to end all hedges. Billions were now poured into mortgage-backed securities (MBS), a market which had been artificially plunged to record-breaking interest rate lows of 1-2% for over a year by the US Federal Reserve making borrowing easy, and the returns on the investments into the MBSs obscene. The obscenity swelled as the values of the houses skyrocketed far beyond the real values to the tune of one hundred thousand dollar homes selling for 5-6 times that price within the span of several years. As long as no one assumed this growth was ab-normal, and the unpayable nature of the capital underlying the leveraged assets locked up in the now infamous “sub-primes” and other illegitimate debt obligations was ignored, then profits were supposed to just continue infinitely. Anyone who questioned this logic was considered a heretic by the latter-day priesthood.

    The stunning “success” of securitizing housing debts immediately induced a wave of sovereign wealth funds to come into prominence applying the same model that had been used in the case of mortgage-backed securities (MBS) and collateralized debt obligations (CDO) to the debts of entire nations. The securitizing of bundled packages of sovereign debts that could then be infinitely leveraged on the de-regulated world markets would no longer be considered an act of national treason, but the key to easy money.

    Conclusion

    This is the system which died in 2008. Contrary to popular belief, nothing was actually resolved. For all the talk of an “FDR revival” under Obama, speculation wasn’t actually regulated under the Dodd-Frank Act or the Volker Rule of 2010. No productive credit was created to grow the real economy under a national mission as was the case in 1933-1938. Banks were not broken up while derivatives GREW by 40% with the new bubble concentrated in the corporate/household debt sector now collapsing. During this time, nation states continued to be stripped, as austerity was rammed down the throats of nations.

    It should be no surprise that in the midst of this despair, a creative alliance was consolidated in defense of the interests of sovereign nation states and humanity at large led by the leadership of Russia and China.

    This leadership took the form of the China-led Belt and Road Initiative which has grown to embrace over 130 countries today and looking more and more like an Asian-led version of the New Deal of the 1930s. Indeed, China’s capacity to unleash long term credit for thousands of international long term infrastructure projects was made possible by the fact that it was the only country on the globe which had not given up the principles of bank separation which were destroyed in every other nation. Very few western figures stood up to this self-induced destruction over the decades, but one notable exception here worth mentioning is the figure of the late American economist Lyndon LaRouche (1922-2019) who not only resisted this process for over four decades, but fought alongside the Schiller Institute to promote New Silk Road as early as 1996.

    With the 2016 Brexit and election of President Trump, a new wave of nationalist spirit has become a fire which the technocrats have lost their capacity to snuff out. Increasingly, the idea that nation states have a power over the private banking system has become revived and discussion for reforming the now dead Trans-Atlantic system is increasingly shaped not by the calls for a “New World Order” as Sir Kissinger would have liked, but rather for a New Silk Road and a true New Deal. The Eurasian nations are already firmly committed to this new system, and if the west is to qualify morally to take part in this new epoch, then the first step will be a return to a Glass-Steagall.

  • Watch "Blind" Robot Cheetah Climb Stairs Littered With Obstacles 

    MIT’s Cheetah 3 is very light on its feet, it can now “leap and gallop across rough terrain, climb a staircase littered with debris, and quickly recover its balance when suddenly yanked or shoved,” all while it doesn’t have cameras to track its surroundings, reported MIT News.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Weighing in at 90 pounds, the cheetah robot is designed to navigate almost any kind of terrain without tracking camera. Instead, the robot “feels” its surroundings, as described by MIT engineers as “blind locomotion,” sort of like feeling for a light switch in the dark.

    “There are many unexpected behaviors the robot should be able to handle without relying too much on vision,” says the robot’s designer, Sangbae Kim, associate professor of mechanical engineering at MIT. “Vision can be noisy, slightly inaccurate, and sometimes not available, and if you rely too much on vision, your robot has to be very accurate in position and eventually will be slow. So we want the robot to rely more on tactile information. That way, it can handle unexpected obstacles while moving fast.”

    In the event a motor or limb malfunctions, the cheetah is designed with modular components: Three electric motors power each of the robot’s legs. Each motor can easily be swapped out for a new one, or even the leg can be replaced.

    MIT engineers will present the cheetah’s vision-free capabilities in October at the International Conference on Intelligent Robots, in Madrid.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Kim expects in the future that the robot could conduct tasks that would otherwise be too dangerous or inaccessible for humans.

    “Cheetah 3 is designed to do versatile tasks such as power plant inspection, which involves various terrain conditions including stairs, curbs, and obstacles on the ground,” Kim says.

    “I think there are countless occasions where we [would] want to send robots to do simple tasks instead of humans. Dangerous, dirty, and difficult work can be done much more safely through remotely controlled robots.”

    According to MIT News, the robot can blindly walk up staircases and through unstructured terrain and can immediately recover its balance if unexpected forces knocked it over. This capability is due to two new algorithms developed by Kim’s team: a contact detection algorithm, and a model-predictive control algorithm.

    The contact detection algorithm supports the robot in decision making for the best time to jump or step around an object. For example, if the robot steps on a twig versus a large rock, it will understand how to react and make the proper adjusts so that it can continue forward.

    “When it comes to switching from the air to the ground, the switching has to be very well-done,” Kim says. “This algorithm is really about, ‘When is a safe time to commit my footstep?'”

    The algorithm calculates these probabilities based on data from gyroscopes, accelerometers, and joint positions of the legs, which record the leg’s angle and height concerning the ground.

    Engineers tested the algorithm in experiments with the robot trotting on a laboratory treadmill and climbing on a staircase. Both surfaces had irregular objects placed on it to simulate a construction site.

    “It doesn’t know the height of each step, and doesn’t know there are obstacles on the stairs, but it just plows through without losing its balance,” Kim says. “Without that algorithm, the robot was very unstable and fell easily.”

    The model-predictive control algorithm calculates the robot’s body and legs a half-second into the future.

    In tests, researchers introduced unexpected forces by physically abusing the robot with kicks and shoves as it trotted on a treadmill, and even pulled on a leash to make it fall down a staircase.

    Engineers discovered that the model-predictive algorithm allowed the robot to instantly create counter-forces to regain the center of balance and keep moving forward after a fall.

    Engineers have also added tracking cameras to some of the robots to give it an understanding of its surroundings. The cameras will enable it to map out its environment and pre-determined plan of action for more considerable obstacles such as doors and walls. Engineers told MIT News that they’re further progressing the robot’s blind locomotion capabilities.

  • How Asylum Is Abused Every Day

    Authored by Peter van Buren via The American Conservative,

    Economic migrants use it as an easy means into the country, but Trump has options…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    America’s asylum laws, meant to help the most vulnerable, have instead become a clogged backdoor for economic migrants. The Trump administration is restoring asylum to its correct role in American immigration policy. It’s the right thing to do, but almost nobody is satisfied.

    Here’s why.

    Asylum is a very old concept, dating back to the ancient Greeks. It recognizes that a person persecuted by his own country can be offered residence and protection by another country. The actual conditions vary considerably across the globe (the U.S. considers female genital mutilation grounds for asylum while in many nations it is an accepted practice). But in most cases, asylum is offered to people who face a well-founded fear of persecution if sent home on account of their race, religion, nationality, political opinion, or social group.

    The definition of those five protected grounds have also varied greatly based on shifts in American domestic politics. Since 1994, for example, LGBT status has been, and remains under Trump, a possible claim to asylum. Domestic violence was granted consideration as grounds under the Obama administration, only to be rolled back under Trump.

    But even as those criteria have changed with the political winds, asylum has never been simply about wanting a better life. Poverty, for all its horrors, has never fallen alongside race, religion, nationality, political opinion, or social group (though it is often assumed to by progressive journalists without access to the Internet and certain Democratic legislators from the Bronx).

    The reality of 2019 is that the asylum system has evolved into a cheater’s backdoor, a pseudo-legal path to immigration not otherwise available to economic migrants. They lack either the skills for working visas or the ties to qualify for legal immigration under America’s family reunification system. So they walk to the border and ask for asylum, taking advantage of previous administrations’ look-the-other-way “solution” to their ever-growing numbers. Affirmative asylum claims, made at ports of entry, have jumped 35 percent over the last two years, even as refusal rates for those cases along the Southern border have run into the 80th percentile.

    It works—for them. A Honduran on the border who says he came to work is sent back almost immediately. However, should he make a claim to asylum, the U.S. is obligated to adjudicate his case. Since detaining asylum seekers and their families while the processes play out is expensive and politically distasteful (kids in cages!), until recently most asylum seekers were instead released into American society to wait out their cases. They then became eligible for work authorization if their cases extended past 150 days, as almost all did. The number of pending cases in early 2019 was 325,277, more than 50 times higher than in 2010.

    Eventual approval rates for all nationalities over the past decade average only 28 percent(In some places, the approval rate is as low as 15 percent, which someargue is because of unfairness in the system rather than illegitimate claims. Others claim the approval rate is bogus, reflecting clever coaching by immigration lawyers instead of legitimate fears.) Yet even after they’re denied, applicants can either refile as defensive asylum claims or simply disappear into the vast underground of illegals.

    Previous administrations’ plans to create expedited asylum processes have proven ineffective, as numbers just increase endlessly to fill the available opportunities. Simply making a claim to asylum has often been enough to live and work in America. Trump is changing that.

    The most visible change is that asylum seekers and their families are being detained at the border rather than released into society. Detention is a deterrent to economic migrants making false claims to asylum, statistically somewhere between seven to nine out of 10 persons plus their families.

    The next change was for the Trump administration to negotiate for asylum seekers to wait out their processing times not in American society or a detention facility, but in Mexico through a program called the Migrant Protection Protocols. People at the border make their asylum claims, and are then nudged a step backward to wait for an answer in Mexico. This relieves the U.S. of costs both monetary (the House just voted an additional $4.6 billion to be spent on beds and baths for detainees) and political.

    Mexican officials estimate that about 60,000 people will be sent to Mexico by the end of August under the Migrant Protection Protocols. The policy seems to be effective in weeding out economic migrants, as many, denied the chance in America to work off their debts to the human traffickers they paid for the journey north, choose to return home to Central America, abandoning their previous sworn assertions that such a return would imperil their lives.

    A more significant Trump change to U.S. policy has been to bring it in line with the European standard (the Dublin Convention) of country of first refuge. Most of Europe subscribes to this model, which requires asylum claims to be made in the first country that can offer refuge. The idea is that a person legitimately fleeing a repressive government would want safety as soon as possible. If the person is really an economic migrant, this will stop him from “forum shopping” to see if the benefits are better in Italy or Austria—or Mexico versus the United States.

    In the American context, if someone is fleeing gang vengeance in Honduras, Mexico would become his refuge even though his cousin needs help at the restaurant in Chicago. The U.S. will thus not consider asylum seekers who pass through another country before reaching the United States (the order is being challenged in the courts).

    To put the plan into practice, the U.S. reached a deal with Guatemala for that nation to take in more asylum seekers from other Central American nations, and is expected to sign similar agreements with El Salvador and Honduras. Washington has had an identical but little-noticed arrangement in place with Canada for many years, allowing it to not consider asylum applications from persons who did not apply first while in Canada. Despite the media hysteria about cruelty, this idea is nothing new.

    The impact of these changes will be significant. Though Mexico does not yet have a formal, safe, third country agreement with the U.S., its Commission for Aid to Migrants projects 80,000 asylum requests this year, up from only 2,137 five years ago. Mexico and other Central American nations are expected to also become places of first refuge for the many Haitians, Cubans, and Africans who previously just passed through en route to America.

    This illustrates an ancillary benefit to moving some of the costs of housing migrants to Mexico and asking for more asylum processing by Guatemala and other nations: it gives them a reason to police their own borders. Until recently, there was no incentive for these countries to stop migrants headed north, and indeed much incentive to pass on the problems by opening their own borders to northbound traffic. This same thinking allowed human traffickers and drug dealers to operate with near impunity.

    Following all this, the newest change concerns derivative claims to asylum. Spouses and minor children of those approved for asylum continue to be granted asylum alongside principal applicants. Attorney General Barr, however, recently overturned a decision by the Board of Immigration Appeals saying a Mexican adult man could apply for asylum on the basis of his father being targeted by a cartel. Previous administrations held that such an adult, while obviously not a dependent minor, would still automatically “inherit” asylum as the member of a particular social group, his extended family. Barr says now that the adult can still apply today for asylum, but now has to prove his case independent of his father.

    Americans broadly favor immigration in general. But the gap between orderly immigration and unfettered immigration based on how many people can slip through physical holes in the border and loopholes in the law has grown too wide, to the point that a quarter of the 45 million foreign-born people currently in the U.S. arrived here illegally. Some 60 percent of likely voters support efforts to “prevent migrants from making fraudulent asylum claims and being released into the country.” As Europe has acknowledged and America is learning, modern immigration comes with considerable social and political costs, which will be accounted for by society one way (good and thought out) or another (violent and chaotic).

    As David Frum melodramatically wrote, “if liberals won’t enforce borders, fascists will.” Rewriting that a bit, if Congress will not reform immigration policy in line with a broad national consensus, then whoever is in the White House will, albeit in a piecemeal fashion. This is why Obama’s DACA reforms didn’t outlast his administration, and why if a Democrat wins in 2020, Trump’s changes to asylum processing will also be rolled back. Nothing gets permanently resolved that way, and it needs to be.

  • Bunker Chaos: Global Shipping-Fuel Price Plunges Amid Slowdown Fears

    Bunker fuel is the primary type of fuel used to power large shipping vessels. In the crudest of terms, bunker fuel is excess fuel leftover after refineries have processed gasoline and diesel from the crude. The shipping fuel is dense and heavy, has to be boiled before it can flow into the vessels’ engine(s).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Bunker fuel prices serve as a proxy to the health of the global shipping industry. If prices rise, that usually means the demand to fuel vessels is increasing, which in turn, powers container ships and tankers from the East to West, or West to East.

    Over the last month, bunker fuel prices in Houston, Rotterdam, Fujairah, and Singapore, major shipping terminals across the world, have collapsed. Bunker fuel in Houston has fallen -30% in 30 days, -27% in 27 days in Rotterdam, -18% in 26 days in Fujairah, and -29% in 27 days in Singapore.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The start of the rapid decline pre-dated President Trump’s latest escalation of the trade war with China on August 01 by at least 15 days, which he tweeted: “on September 01, putting a small additional Tariff of 10% on the remaining 300 Billion Dollars of goods and products coming from China into our Country. This does not include the 250 Billion Dollars already Tariffed at 25%.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Seems like declining bunker price could be another canary in the coal mine, a warning to investors that the global economy could remain depressed through 2H19. Most global cyclical indicators are showing business activity is flat or negative in the months ahead.

    Global manufacturing surveys, industrial output, new orders, business investment, construction activity, motor vehicle production and freight volumes are flat or down YoY, reported Reuters. This means trade volumes are declining as fewer goods or raw materials are being transported by vessel.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Recent purchasing surveys and industrial production data suggest that the global economy worsened in June and July, which was around the time bunker rates started to decline.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With the global economy in the most severe slowdown since 2015, the decline in bunker rates across major ports could be an indication the global economy hasn’t bottomed.

    And to make matters worse, Mærsk A/S, also known as Maersk, the world’s largest shipping company, just had its price target slashed Thursday by Morgan Stanely to DKR 7,800 ($1,169) from DKR 9,000 ($1,349), on fears the global shipping industry is about to sink.

    So what does this mean for global stocks?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

  • Paul Craig Roberts Asks "Is The Fed Losing Control Of The Gold Price?"

    Authored by Paul Craig Roberts,

    After years of being kept in the doldrums by orchestrated short-selling described on this website by Roberts and Kranzler, gold has lately moved up sharply topping $1,500 this week. The gold price has continued to rise despite the continuing practice of dumping large volumes of naked contracts in the futures market. The gold price is driven down but quickly recovers and moves on up. I haven’t an explanation at this time for the new force that is more powerful than the short-selling that has been used to control the price of gold.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Various central banks have been converting their dollar reserves into gold, which reduces the demand for dollars and increases the demand for gold. Existing stocks of gold available to fill orders are being drawn down, and new mining output is not keeping pace with the rise in demand. Perhaps this is the explanation for the rise in the price of gold.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    During the many years of Quantitative Easing the exchange value of the dollar was protected by the Japanese, British, and EU central banks also printing money to insure that their currencies did not rise in value relative to the dollar. The Federal Reserve needs to protect the dollar’s exchange value so that it continues in its role as the world’s reserve currency in which international transactions are conducted. If the dollar loses this role, the US will lose the ability to pay its bills by printing dollars. A dollar declining in value relative to other countries would cause flight from the dollar to the rising currencies. Catastrophe quickly occurs from increasing the supply of a currency that central banks are unwilling to hold.

    One problem remained. The dollar was depreciating relative to gold. Rigging the currency market was necessary but not sufficient to stabilize the dollar’s value. The gold market also had to be rigged. To stop the dollar’s depreciation, naked short selling has been used to artificially increase the supply of paper gold in order to suppress the price. Unlike equities, gold shorts don’t have to be covered. This turns the price-setting gold futures market into a paper market where contracts are settled primarily in cash and not by taking delivery of gold. Therefore, participants can increase the supply of the paper gold traded in the futures market by printing new contracts. When large numbers of contracts are suddenly dumped in the market, the sudden increase in paper gold supply drives down the price. This has worked until now.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If flight from the dollar is beginning, it will make it difficult for the Federal Reserve to accommodate the growing US budget deficit and continue its policy of lowering interest rates. With central banks moving their reserves from dollars (US Treasury bonds and bills) to gold, the demand for US government debt is not keeping up with supply. The supply will be increasing due to the $1.5 trillion US budget deficit. The Federal Reserve will have to take up the gap between the amount of new debt that has to be issued and the amount that can be sold by purchasing the difference. In other words, the Fed will print more money with which to purchase the unsold portion of the new debt.

    The creation of more dollars when the dollar is experiencing pressure puts more downward pressure on the dollar. To protect the dollar, that is, to make it again attractive to investors and central banks, the Federal Reserve would have to raise interest rates substantially. If the US economy is in recession or moving toward recession, the cost of rising interest rates would be high in terms of unemployment.

    With a rising price of gold, who would want to hold debt denominated in a rapidly depreciating currency when interest rates are low, zero, or negative?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Federal Reserve might have no awareness of the pending crisis that it has set up for itself. On the other hand, the Federal Reserve is responsive to the elite who want to rid themselves of Trump. Collapsing the economy on Trump’s head is one way to prevent his reelection.

  • Student Debt Crushes Homebuying Dreams For Millennials , Now Delayed 8 Years

    The student debt crisis is rapidly expanding, hitting a new record high of $1.6 trillion in 2019 and surpassing auto loans and credit card debt post-GFC.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    About 44 million Americans, or 20% of adults, have insurmountable student debts. About 11% of them are in student loan default, and by 2023, as many as 40% could be underwater.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The life-altering impacts of student loan debt on millions of millennials is debilitating towards their financial health.

    Many are drowning in student debt, working in the gig-economy with two jobs and can hardly afford rising rents and necessary food items.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At least 60% of millennials have no savings, and their poor financial health has contributed to the reason why so many young adults can’t afford a downpayment on their first home.

    A new study published by the Urban Institute says the current homeownership rate of young adults is 37%. That’s 8% lower than the homeownership rate Generation X and baby boomers had at the same age.

    “If the homeownership rate for millennials had stayed the same as previous generations,” the study noted, “there would be about 3.4 million more homeowners today.”

    The study determined that 36% more graduates who had eliminated their debt (or never had any) owned a home and graduates who paid off their debt were 7x more likely to purchase a home.

    About 40% of millennials have student debt, according to the AARP, and Clever Real Estate says the student debt has delayed home buying by eight years for millennials.

    The Federal Reserve has said that “a $1,000 increase in student loan debt lowers the homeownership rate by about 1.5 percentage points for public 4-year college-goers during their mid-20s, equivalent to an average delay of 2.5 months in attaining homeownership.” So that means with the average student about $37,0000 in debt, that’s a 7.7-year delay in homebuying.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In 2012, about 71% of all millennials graduating from college had a student loan. The average debt load has quickly increased over time, moving to $37,000 from nearly $9,500 in the early 1990s. Today’s levels are 3x higher than 2006 levels.

    And it’s not just home buying that has been delayed, many of these millennials have avoided weddings and starting a family because their debts have limited their economic mobility.

    According to Douglas McIntyre with 24/7 Wall Street, who examined student loan data from LendEDU, the Deep South struggles with high amounts of credit card debt; student loan debt is heavily concentrated in the Northeast.

    History will show millennials will be known as the “lost generation,” as their ability to participate in the American dream of homebuying was cut short by student debt servicing payments. And with the next recession lurking around the corner, millennials could soon find themselves without a job and back in their parents’ basements.

  • Mexicans Are Safer In El Paso Than In Mexico

    Authored by Ryan McMaken via The Mises Institute,

    The Mexican government, which has contributed heavily to Mexico having one of the world’s worst homicide rates, has announced it may seek legal action against the United States “for failing to protect its citizens after this weekend’s mass shooting in the border city of El Paso.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In a statement yesterday, Foreign Minister Marcelo Ebrard stated

    The president has instructed me to ensure that Mexico’s indignation translates into … efficient, prompt, expeditious and forceful legal actions for Mexico to take a role and demand that conditions are established that protect … Mexicans in the United States.

    Yet, it’s hard to believe that Mexican politicians are truly indignant about the deaths of Mexican nationals in the US when Mexico’s homicide rate is nearly five times that of the US, and among the worst in the world. Moreover, Mexico’s homicide rate in 2017 rose to the highest level ever recorded, climbing to 24.8 per 100,000 . Preliminary data suggests 2018 may be even worse .

    More than 30,000 homicide investigations were opened in Mexico in 2017. In the US, which has 200 million more residents than Mexico, homicides total around 17,000.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    These fact, however, have not stopped the Mexican state from displaying a total lack of self-awareness when it comes to crime and safety.

    The foreign minister also implied the US was at fault due to faulty gun laws:

    Ebrard said Mexico would request information from the U.S. about how the weapon used in the attack was acquired by the shooter.

    “We consider the issue of arms to be crucial,” he added.

    As with homicides overall, it’s hard to believe that Mexican politicians are sincere when expressing indignation about the manner in which Americans acquire firearms.

    Gun control is stringent in Mexico, which means illegal gun ownership is widespread, and law-abiding citizens are lopsidedly outgunned by drug cartel members and ordinary street thugs.

    The Mexican government — and gun control advocates in the US — have attempted to distract from these facts by claiming the US is somehow responsible for the presence of illegal guns in Mexico, but the evidence hasn’t backed this up.

    Trying to Blame Mexican Violence on US Guns

    The often-quoted statistic allegedly showing that as much as 70 percent, or even 90 percent, of guns seized in Mexico come from the US is not true. That statistic is based only on seized guns that are also traced by the ATF . How many of all guns seized in Mexico come from the US? According to Stratfor, ” almost 90 percent of the guns seized in Mexico in 2008 were not traced back to the United States .” Nor does the Mexican government ask the ATF to trace all guns seized in Mexico. This is because many of those arms can be traced back to the Mexican government itself.

    After all, it’s not as if Latin America has no locally produced firearms. The 2012 Small Arms Survey notes:

    Latin America has a long tradition of gun production, with some manufacturers tracing their history back many decades. Brazil has the largest arms industry in the region, followed by Argentina. Firearms are also produced by private or government-owned industries in Bolivia, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Mexico, Paraguay, Peru, and Venezuela. While most of the production is intended to equip the military and law enforcement institutions, some of the production is for private use.”

    The report also refers to “major exporters” of small arms in Argentina, Chile, Mexico, and Brazil. So we know Mexico contains local arms-producing manufacturers to the point that some are “major exporters” who also produce arms for government institutions. And government stockpiles are a source for black markets as well.

    Even worse, the same government institutions that work to keep firearms out of the hands of peaceful private citizens, are often in league with the cartels. As a recent New York Times article noted about local resistance in Michoacan to cartel-sown chaos, “Townspeople formed militias to eject both the cartel … and the local police, who were seen as complicit.”

    In other words, there is often no clear line between law enforcement and the cartels themselves.

    Often, official law enforcement simply can’t be bothered . Things are even worse when, as one cartel member put it, “soldiers and cops are … really on our side.”

    Thus, it shouldn’t exactly be a surprise that many of the guns seized in Mexico are coming from official government sources.

    Of course, even if it were true that Mexican criminals were getting their guns from the US, how is it that crime wave only goes one way? If guns are the reason for high crime in Mexico — where guns are hard to legally acquire — shouldn’t crime rates be far higher in the US where guns are far easier to get?

    It can’t be that Mexico has implemented a drug war. The US wages a drug war too.

    Nor can we even fall back on some theory about Mexican race or culture. Many US border towns, which are heavily Mexican-American in origin are some of the safest places in the US.  El Paso, for instance, which is more than 80 percent Hispanic, has long been one of the safest cities of its size in America. Homicide is so rare in El Paso, in fact, with only 20 homicides in 2017, that the El Paso shooter doubled the homicide rate in that city all by himself.

    Mexican-Style Reforms: More Gun Control and More Centralization of Power

    Thus, when Mexican politicians hint that the US is not sufficiently protecting Mexican nationals, it’s hard to imagine which Mexican officials think would be the proper course of action. Should US governments adopt Mexico-style legislation?

    Given the complete failure of Mexico’s gun-control regime, one would hope not.

    Moreover, centralization of government power in Mexico has helped ensure local and state governments in Mexico are unable to address problems on their own.

    Although the Mexican political system is technically a federal system, the reality is far different, since the central government tightly controls the overwhelming majority of tax revenues.

    Indeed, the federal government has maintained the lion’s share of control of government funding. As The Economist noted in 2003, most government revenue, including all levels of government, flows to the federal level alone:

    Power may be dispersed, but money is not. About 80% of federal revenues are appropriated by the centre; most of the rest falls to the states, though 5% is spent by the municipalities. In Brazil, by contrast, the federal government controls only around half of total government revenues.

    Under Mexico’s law of “fiscal co-ordination”, the states’ powers to raise local revenues are restricted. They consist chiefly of fairly small taxes on payrolls and on cars; municipalities must rely on symbolic property taxes. At one extreme, the Federal District, the quasi-state which includes much of Mexico City, raises about 45% of its $8 billion budget itself. Most states are at the other extreme—lucky if they gather 10% of their spending.

    For the other 90%, they must rely on federal transfers, divided up under a notoriously complicated formula dating from 1980.

    The situation had not changed markedly by 2018 with Robert Velasco-Alvarez noting :

    According to Moody’s , the average Mexican state collects only 10 percent of its income. The other 90 percent of the states’ budgets comes in the form of federal government transfers. A former head of our secretary of the Treasury’s Unit for Coordination with the States claims that municipalities account for only 1.1 percent of Mexico’s tax revenues.

    By contrast, in the United States, state and local tax collection — while certainly less than that of federal receipts — amounts to over forty percent the size of federal revenues. In numerous states, state revenues alone— not counting local revenues — reach thirty percent the size of federal revenues. When we look at federal aid to states as a percentage of state revenues, we find that rarely does federal spending amount to more than 35 percent of state revenues.

    In other words, states in Mexico are considerably more reliant on federal spending than is the case in the US. This means more central planning and more nationwide corruption. It’s perhaps no surprise that after 20 years of top-down “solutions” to the crime problem in Mexico, homicide rates are higher than ever. 

    So one could imagine the Mexican politician’s version of reform: implement gun control, and centralize political power.

    We can see the result of this system at work in Mexico right now.

    I don’t say any of this, of course, to try and make governments in the US look blameless or competent. American politicians are certainly not strangers to gun control or corruption, especially in places like Baltimore where homicide is rampant.

    Moreover, the US has long made the drug war worse in Mexico by pressuring the Mexican government to abandon efforts to de-criminalize or legalize some recreational drugs. It has long been the policy of the US to use Latin American communities as the battlegrounds in the US’s drug war. With disastrous results for the Latin Americans.

    But Mexico’s current posturing and grandstanding over the murders of Mexican nationals in El Paso would be comical if the shooting weren’t so tragic. Listening to Mexican officials berate a foreign government about homicides is like listening to the US government lecture other governments about the need to respect the sovereignty of foreign states. It’s just politicians talking and ought to be ignored.

  • HarmonyOS: Huawei Unveils Open-Source Android Alternative

    As expected, Huawei has launched its new operating system (OS) as a potential alternative to Google’s Android OS, according to Android Authority

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    News of the new operating system also comes in the wake of a U.S. trade ban against the company back in May. President Donald Trump has since claimed that the ban will be partially lifted, but the U.S. Commerce Department is still banning the company.

    The U.S. ban complicates Huawei’s ability to offer Android on its phones, so HarmonyOS is seen as a plan B if the trade ban affects Google’s ability to support Huawei in the future. In fact, rumors suggest that the Chinese brand is working on a Harmony OS phone for release later this year. –Android Authority

    Speaking on the first day of its annual developer conference on Friday, CEO Richard Yu announced that HarmonyOS is “the first microkernel-based distributed OS for all scenarios” which will eventually support a range of apps – with focus on HTML5, Linux and Android apps, which will ” all be able to run on our OS in the future” according to Yu. 

    The new platform supports smartphones, smart speakers, computers, smartwatches, wireless earbuds, cars, and tablets. In fact, Yu says the platform supports RAM sizes ranging from kilobytes to gigabytes. Interestingly enough, Huawei says HarmonyOS won’t support root access. –Android Authority

    HarmonyOS 1.0 will be first adopted in its smart screen products, which are due to launch later this year. Over the next three years, HarmonyOS will be optimized and gradually adopted across a broader range of smart devices, including wearables, Huawei Vision, and head units for your car,” the company told Android Authority in an emailed press release. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    What about Android?

    While Yu said that HarmonyOS can replace Android “at any time,” he reiterated the company’s commitments to Google’s platform. 

    If we cannot use Android in the future, then we can immediately switch to HarmonyOS,” said Yu, who added that migrating from Android to Harmony “is not that difficult.” 

  • Why Is Saudi Arabia Giving Up Land The Size Of Massachusetts For "The World's First Independent International Zone"?

    Authored by Michael Snyder via The End of The American Dream blog,

    Under the leadership of Saudi Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman, a $500 billion “mega-city” is being constructed in the northwestern corner of Saudi Arabia.  This city has been named “Neom”, and when it is fully completed it will be approximately “the size of Massachusetts”.  The Wall Street Journal was able to recently examine 2,300 pages of classified documents related to this project, and what they discovered is absolutely stunning. 

    This “city of the future” will feature an artificial moon, flying taxis and robot maids, but there will also be gene-editing in order to make humans stronger and smarter, and everyone living there will be subjected to 24 hour surveillance.  In addition, we are being told that this will be “the world’s first independent international zone”, and many are concerned about what exactly that is going to mean.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Neom” certainly has a futuristic ring to it, and according to Digital Trends it was derived by combining a Greek word and an Arabic word…

    Called Neom (a mix of the Greek word for “new” and Arabic word for “future”), the project aims to construct a $500 billion city, covering 10,000 squares miles of coastline and desert in northwest Saudi Arabia. With its mixture of high-tech amenities and luxury services like restaurants and shops, the goal is to build what the Wall Street Journal describes as a superior to “Silicon Valley in technology, Hollywood in entertainment and the French Riviera as a place to vacation.”

    It has been reported that Saudi Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman originally came up with the idea for the city when he “pulled up a map of his country on Google Earth and saw its northwest quadrant was a blank slate.”  He ultimately decided that it would be an ideal location for “the city of the future”, and he enlisted an army of U.S. consultants to help him fulfill his dream.

    But will his dream ultimately become a nightmare?  There are some extremely alarming things that I want to tell you about, but first let’s talk about some of the cool stuff that is planned for the city

    The in-development Saudi Arabian city-state will have robot maids, flying taxis, and glow-in-the-dark sand, according to confidential planning documents reviewed by The Wall Street Journal. An artificial moon will light up the sky every night, and a Jurassic Park-style island will let visitors mingle with robot dinosaurs.

    Sounds like a fun place to live, right?

    And even though the climate of the region is extremely, extremely dry, Saudi Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman plans to use “cloud seeding” to produce rain whenever it is needed.

    In other words, the fact that they will be using geoengineering to control the weather in this city is not even being hidden.

    There will also be gene-editing facilities that will be used to make humans stronger and smarter than ever before, and according to the Wall Street Journal, Neom’s board plans to make it a fully automated city “where we can watch everything”

    “This should be an automated city where we can watch everything,” Neom’s founding board is quoted as saying in the documents, according to the WSJ. “[A city] where a computer can notify crimes without having to report them or where all citizens can be tracked.”

    That means while you’re chilling on the glowing beach, daydreaming about your next prix fixe meal, a drone equipped with facial-recognition technology will likely be transmitting your location to Neom’s “1984”-esque law enforcement officials.

    Hmmm – that actually doesn’t sound like such a fun place to live after all.

    In fact, it basically sounds like the sort of dystopian nightmare that I have always been warning about.

    But even more alarming is the fact that this city is being billed as “the world’s first independent international zone”

    The city itself will be “the world’s first independent international zone,” presents its marketing literature. How independent it will actually be remains to be seen. The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia set up a “special authority,” chaired by the Crown Prince himself, to supervise the development of the project. Once its built, the zone will be managed via a “regulatory framework that will adopt world-class investment laws to support residents and targeted economic sectors,” declares its presentation, which also purports the city-state will have an “autonomous judicial system.” Its laws, enforced by city-wide automation and tracking of its citizens, would be independent of Saudi Arabia’s, created by a slate of both local and foreign investors “in accordance with international best practice.”

    So this city will not technically be part of Saudi Arabia.

    It will actually be a “city-state” with its own laws, rules, regulations and judicial system.

    Could it be possible that this giant “independent international zone” will one day be the home base for an “international leader”?

    I don’t know.  I am just throwing that out there.

    Obviously there is an agenda here.  Why else would Saudi Arabia be willing to give up a giant tract of land the size of Massachusetts for a futuristic mega-city that won’t even be under their jurisdiction?

    As is the case with so many other things, this isn’t being hidden from us at all.  It is being done right out in the open, and Saudi Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman is being quite clear that his intention is to make Neom the most important city on the entire planet.

    But to me it sounds like a prison, and the truth is that this is the direction the entire globe is heading.

    Already, virtually everything that we do is being watched, monitored or tracked somehow.  With each passing year, the global Big Brother surveillance grid becomes even more extensive, and we have very little privacy left.

    So perhaps we should stop talking so much about the dystopian nightmare that is coming, because to a very large degree it is already here.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 9th August 2019

  • "Accommodation Crisis" Hits Ireland Universities As Dorm Costs Spike

    An Irish Independent survey revealed student accommodation costs (dorm costs) had jumped as much as 11.55% YoY for all university-owned and on-campus accommodations in Ireland, which has led to financial stresses for parents and left millennials with student debt.

    The Independent is describing this as an “accommodation crisis” as all of the country’s universities have increased housing costs so dramatically, it has priced out impoverished students from higher education.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Experts warn that the student accommodation crisis hasn’t peaked and could deepen into the early 2020s.

    The survey found accommodation costs at University College Cork (UCC) increased the most, with prices for its Mardyke Hall accommodation soaring 11.5% for upcoming 2019/2020 academic year.

    Students must pay at least $6,800, compared to $6,100 last year, to live in one of UCC’s small dorm rooms for the new year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    UCC’s University Hall dorm costs saw the second-highest price spikes in the country, with an 11.3% increase for a room.

    Last year, students paid $6,200 to live in University Hall, but now it costs $6,900.

    A spokesperson for the university told the Independent in a statement that the rise in accommodation costs was primarily due to “refurbishment works” at on-campus student housing facilities.

    Social policy lecturer at Maynooth University Rory Hearne suggested that rising accommodation costs are due universities using it as a funding source.

    “The crisis can only get worse. Students are now being squeezed even more because previously they would have relied heavily on the rental sector, but now that most people can’t afford homes and there is little social housing, students have nowhere to go,” he told the Independent.

    “Colleges don’t have enough funding and college accommodation is an income source. But students shouldn’t have to pay for that – colleges should stand up to the Government and demand more funding.”

    The National Union of Students in Ireland (USI) criticized universities for developing the accommodation crisis.

    “Student accommodation prices country-wide have taken a sinister hike towards unaffordability in the past few years, this past year in particular,” said USI president Lorna Fitzpatrick.

    Elsewhere, student accommodation climbed higher at the University of Limerick (UL), by 6.2%.

    For a small room in an eight-bedroom dwelling in UL’s Kilmurry housing complex, students are being charged 6% higher at $5900, as opposed to last year’s $5,600. Students who rent at Plassey on UL’s campus will notice a 6.2% jump, from $5,000 to $5,300 this upcoming academic year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A UL spokesperson said accommodation costs are higher thanks to modernization efforts at the dormitories.

    “There has also been a capital refurbishment programme of €20m implemented over the last four years in UL’s on-campus accommodation, which has significantly increased the standard of our facilities at UL.”

    Dorm price hikes have also occurred across other universities in Dublin: Trinity College Dublin, Dublin City University, and University College Dublin.

    The Cost of Education in Ireland, a recent report from insurance company Zurich, recently said 41% of parents in 2018 were falling into debt covering the costs associated with increasing accommodations.

    It seems Ireland, just like the US, is dealing with rapid inflation rates when it comes to higher education, at some point, this will all implode.

  • Killing Free Speech In France, Germany, And On The Internet

    Authored by Judith Bergman via The Gatestone Institute,

    In May, France called for increasing government oversight over Facebook. Now Facebook has agreed to hand over to French judges the identification data of French users suspected of hate speech on its platformaccording to France’s Secretary of State for the Digital Sector, Cédric O.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Previously, according to a Reuters report, “Facebook had refrained from handing over identification data of people suspected of hate speech because it was not compelled to do so under U.S.-French legal conventions and because it was worried countries without an independent judiciary could abuse it”. Until now, Reuters noted, Facebook had only cooperated with the French judiciary on matters related to terrorist attacks and violent acts by transferring the IP addresses and other identification data of suspected individuals to French judges who formally demanded it.

    Now, however, “hate speech” — as speech that fails to comply with current political orthodoxy is conveniently labelled — appears to have become comparable to terrorism and violent crime. How autocratic, yet Cédric O apparently loves it: “This is huge news, it means that the judicial process will be able to run normally”.

    It is highly probable that other countries will want to have a similar agreement with Facebook; it also appears likely that Facebook would comply. In May, for instance, as France was debating legislation that would give a new “independent regulator” the power to fine tech companies up to 4% of their global revenue if they do not do enough to remove “hateful content” from their network, Facebook’s CEO Mark Zuckerberg commented:

    “I am hopeful that it [the French proposal] can become a model that can be used across the EU”.

    France is the first and so far only country to have entered into such an agreement with Facebook.

    The new agreement could signal the de-facto end of free speech on Facebook for French citizens. Self-censorship in Europe is already widespread: a recent survey in Germany showed that two thirds of Germans are “very careful” about what topics they discuss in public — Islam and migrants being the most taboo. Knowing that a mere Facebook post could end you up in front of a judge in court is very likely to put a decisive damper on anyone’s desire to speak freely.

    French authorities are already in the process of setting an extremely public example of what can happen to those who use their freedom of speech on the internet. Marine Le Pen, leader of the National Rally Party, was recently ordered to stand trial and could face a maximum sentence of three years in prison and a fine of 75,000 euros ($85,000) for circulating “violent messages that incite terrorism or pornography or seriously harm human dignity”. In 2015, she had tweeted images of atrocities committed by ISIS in Syria and Iraq to show what ISIS was doing.

    If Facebook’s agreement with France is replicated by other European countries, whatever is left of free speech in Europe, especially on the internet, is likely to dry up fast.

    In early July, France’s National Assembly adopted a draft bill designed to curtail online hate speech. The draft bill gives social media platforms 24 hours to remove “hateful content” or risk fines of up to 4% percent of their global revenue. The bill has gone to the French Senate and could become law after parliament’s summer recess. If it does, France will be the second country in Europe after Germany to pass a law that directly makes a social media company censor its users on behalf of the state.

    Also in early July, in Germany — where the censorship law, known as NetzDG, also requires Facebook to remove content within 24 hours or face fines of up to 50 million euros — the Federal Office of Justice imposed a €2 million regulatory fine on Facebook “for the incomplete information provided in its published report [the publication of its transparency report for the first half of 2018 required under NetzDG] on the number of complaints received about unlawful content. This provides the general public with a distorted image both of the amount of unlawful content and of the social network’s response”.

    According to Germany’s Federal Office of Justice, Facebook does not inform its users sufficiently of the option to report “criminal content” in the specific “NetzDG reporting form”:

    “Facebook has two reporting systems in place: its standard feedback and reporting channels on the one hand, and the ‘NetzDG reporting form’ on the other. Users who wish to submit a complaint about criminal content under the Network Enforcement Act find themselves steered towards the standard channels, since the parallel existence of standard channels and the ‘NetzDG reporting form’ is not made sufficiently transparent, and the ‘NetzDG reporting form’ is too hidden…Where social networks offer more than one reporting channel, this must be made clear and transparent to users, and the complaints received via these channels are to be included in the transparency report. After all, procedures to handle complaints of unlawful content have a considerable impact on transparency.”

    In response, Facebook said:

    “We want to remove hate speech as quickly and effectively as possible and work to do so. We are confident our published NetzDG reports are in accordance with the law, but as many critics have pointed out, the law lacks clarity.”

    While Facebook claims to be fighting hate speech online, including claiming to have removed millions of pieces of terrorist content from its platform, according to a recent report from the Daily Beast, 105 posts of some of Al Qaeda’s most notorious terrorists are still up on Facebook, as well as YouTube.

    The terrorists include Ibrahim Suleiman al-Rubaish, who was imprisoned for more than five years in Guantanamo Bay for training with al Qaeda and fighting alongside the Taliban in Afghanistan against the United States, and Anwar al-Awlaki, an American-born terrorist, both killed by American drone strikes. According to one US counter-terrorism official, speaking in September of 2016:

    “If you were to look at people who had committed acts of terrorism or had been arrested and you took a poll, you’d find that the majority of them had some kind of exposure to Awlaki.”

    Awlaki was preaching and spreading his message of jihad in American mosques as early as the 1990s. At the Masjid Ar-Ribat al-Islami mosque in San Diego, between 1996-2000, two of the future 9/11 hijackers attended his sermons. He is also reported to have inspired several other terrorists, such as the Fort Hood terrorist, Major Nidal Malik Hasan, with whom he exchanged emails, and the Tsarnaev brothers, who bombed the 2013 Boston marathon. Apparently, that sort of activity does not bother Facebook: The Daily Beast reportedly found the videos through simple searches in Arabic using only the names of the jihadists.

    That Facebook appears to be “creatively” selective in how it chooses to follow its own rules is nothing new. As previously reported by Gatestone Institute, Ahmad Qadan in Sweden publicly raised funds for ISIS for two years. Facebook only deleted the posts after the Swedish Security Service (Säpo) approached Facebook. In November 2017, Ahmad was sentenced to six months in prison for using Facebook to collect money to fund weapons purchases for the ISIS and Jabhat al-Nusra terror groups and for posting messages calling for “serious acts of violence primarily or disproportionately aimed at civilians with the intention of creating terror amongst the public.”

    In September 2018, Canadian media exposed that a Toronto terrorist leader, Zakaria Amara, while serving a life sentence for plotting Al Qaeda-inspired truck bombings in downtown Toronto, nevertheless had a Facebook page on which he posted prison photos and notes about what made him a terrorist. Only after Canadian media outlets contacted Facebook to ask about the account did Facebook delete Amara’s account “for violating our community standards.”

    When will Facebook — and YouTube — make it a priority to remove material featuring the terrorist Awlaki, whose incitement has inspired actual terrorists to kill people?

  • Russia Unveils 'Hunter' Stealth Combat Drone In Maiden Flight Footage

    Previously little had been known of Russia’s new combat stealth drone, the Sukhoi S-70 Okhotnik, or Hunter-B, which has been described as a stealth heavy unmanned combat aerial vehicle (UCAV) being developed by Sukhoi as a sixth-generation aircraft.

    On Wednesday, for the first time the Russian Defense Ministry released footage of the Sukhoi S-70 Okhotnik drone in action, in a 20 minute low altitude flight at about 2000 feet. Russian news agencies reported it as the next generation drone’s maiden flight.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    First photos of the advanced stealth drone first surfaced in January 2019, via The Aviationist.

    Earlier this year the secretive aircraft was first spotted by land-based cameras at an airfield in Novosibirsk in southern Russia, and then picked up by commercial satellite imagery in May at the Chkalov State Flight-Test Center. New footage now confirms its first major test flight as successful.

    The flight analysis site The Aviationist described the new “Hunter-B’s” first flight as “significant since the aircraft is to provide the first heavy, jet-powered, armed, long-range drone capability for Russia.” And further:

    The new Su-70 Hunter-B is said to have low-observable capabilities, providing it with the ability to penetrate heavily defended airspaces without detection to conduct covert precision strikes. The remotely piloted aircraft may also be tasked to work as a “leading edge of battle” penetrator, conducting the first strikes such as enemy air defense suppression during the opening phase of a major air war.

    The wedge-shaped drone is considered among Russia’s most advanced aircraft to date, and looks like something straight out of Star Wars. 

    Russian media commonly described the Okhotnik as capable of traveling up to 5,000 kilometers (3,100 miles), despite it’s significant weight of about 20 tons. 

  • China "Faces The Worst Of Both Worlds" As PPI Deflation Arrives While Food Inflation Soars

    As if China did not have its hands full with a trade war, a plunging yuan and growing civil unrest in Hong Kong, which is fast becoming the potential epicenter for the next global crisis (and which Steve “The Big Short” Eisman thinks is the next black swan), it now also has deflation to worry about at a time when its ability to boost liquidity in the system is severely limited… or maybe it’s soaring inflation China should be concerned about.

    On Friday, China’s National Bureau of Statistics reported that the Producer Price Index (PPI), i.e. factory prices, fell 0.3% in July from a year ago, missing the modest 0.1% decline expected by analysts. This was the first annual decline in China’s PPI in three years – since August 2016 – and just like back then, was largely the result of tumbling commodity prices which in turn depressed both manufacturing and raw material goods prices. And with oil sliding, and iron ore plunging, not to mention the whole trade war thing, it does not seems like a rebound is imminent at all. 

    Worse, since PPI is closely linked to corporate profitability, the decline suggests that China is badly lagging in the credit impulse arena despite having started off 2019 with a bang and some of the biggest increases in Total Social Financing on record.

    So what’s the big deal: China has always been able to boost inflation, all it had to do was turn on the credit spigot and inject a few trillion in new bank and shadow loans into the economy.

    Maybe that was the case in the past, but this time it will have a big headache, because even as PPI declined for the first time in three years, consumer prices jumped 2.8%, and coming in hotter than the 2.7% expected, were tied for the highest annual headline inflation since February 2018; before that one would have to go all the way to 2013 to find a hotter CPI print.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A continuation of recent trends, the bulk of the inflation was the result of sharply higher food prices, which surged 9.1% Y/Y as China continues to battle the rapid spread of “pig ebola”  which some expect will eradicate half of China’s entire pig population, leading to even higher prices.

    Sure enough, pork prices soared 27% in July from a year ago, the highest in three years, but that wasn’t even the worst of it: the prices of fresh fruit soared by 39%, the highest since 2006!

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This combination of lower factory gate prices and soaring consumer prices is, needless to say, the worst possible outcome for Beijing, whose firepower to stimulate the economy using conventional means is severely limited; that this comes at a time when China is caught in an ever escalating trade war with the US certainly doesn’t help.

    “Surging pork prices continued to push up consumer price inflation,” said Capital Economics economist Julian Evans-Pritchard, but “weakening demand dragged producer price inflation into negative territory last month.”

    This, as Bloomberg’s Kyoungwha Kim writes, is “an ominous sign for equities because it underscores the difficulties the PBOC faces if it wants to boost policy stimulus.”

    Between soaring food prices, which limit the PBOC’s ability to “shotgun” inflation higher by injecting a cool trillion in new debt here and there, and the yuan’s plunge past 7 per dollar, this has effectively tied the PBOC’s hands, and its ability to ease aggressively as the economy continues to slow.

    “The recent episode where the central bank reported to the police false information circulating about rate cuts underscores the policy dilemma that is brewing”, adds Kim.

    However, it was the first drop in the PPI since 2016 that spooked traders, and first sent Chinese bond yields lower, and shortly thereafter, the Shanghai Composite, amid renewed fears that China is facing a hard landing, and who knows – maybe well before the 2020 US presidential election: “That underscores that rates traders are much more worried about the economy’s downturn than rising CPI.”

    Indeed, as Evans-Pritchard ever so diplomatically put it, with accelerating consumer prices and the return of factory-gate deflation, “the upshot is that China faces the worse of both worlds.”

    Who knows: a few more downward nudges to the Chinese economy, and Trump may win the trade war against Beijing well before the 2020 presidential election.

  • "The White Supremacist Terrorists Are Coming…The White Supremacist Terrorists Are Coming!"

    Authored (satirically) by CJ Hopkins via The Unz Review,

    If you enjoyed the global corporatocracy’s original War on Islamicist Terror, you’re going to love their latest spinoff, The War on White Supremacist Terror. It’s basically just like the old War on Terror, except that this time the bad guys are all white supremacists, and Donald Trump is Osama bin Laden … unless Putin is Osama bin Laden. OK, I’m not quite sure who’s Osama bin Laden. Whatever. The point is, the Terrorists are coming!

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yes, that’s right, some racist psycho murdered a bunch of people in Texas, so it’s time to “take the gloves off” again, pass some new kind of Patriot Act, further curtail our civil liberties, and generally whip the public up into a mass hysteria over “white supremacist terrorism.”

    The New York Times Editorial Board is already hard at work on that front. In a lengthy op-ed that ran last Sunday, “We Have a White Nationalist Terrorist Problem,” the Board proposes that we would all be safer if the government — but presumably not the current government — could arbitrarily deem people “terrorists,” or “potential terrorists,” or “terrorist sympathizers,” regardless of whether they have any connection to any actual terrorist groups, and … well, here’s what the Editorial Board has in mind.

    “The resources of the American government and its international allies would mobilize without delay. The awesome power of the state would work tirelessly to deny future terrorists access to weaponry, money and forums to spread their ideology. The movement would be infiltrated by spies and informants. Its financiers would face sanctions. Places of congregation would be surveilled. Those who gave aid or comfort to terrorists would be prosecuted.”

    The Board didn’t mention the offshore gulags, wars of aggression, assassinations, torture, mass surveillance of virtually everyone, and other such features of the original War on Terror, but presumably all that kind of stuff would be included in “the awesome power of the state” that the Board would like the U.S. government to “mobilize without delay.”

    And the mandarins of The New York Times were just getting started with the terrorism hysteria. The Tuesday edition was brimming with references to “white supremacy” and “domestic terrorism.” Here are some of the front page headlines …Trump is a White Supremacist Who Inspires Terrorism.” “White Terrorism Shows Parallels to Islamic State.” “The Nihilist in Chief: how our president and our mass shooters are connected to the same dark psychic forces.” “I Spent 25 Years Fighting Jihadis. White Supremacists Aren’t So Different.” “Trump, Tax Cuts, and Terrorism.“ And so on.

    The Times was hardly alone, of course.

    In the wake of the El Paso and Dayton shootings, the corporate media went into overdrive, pumping out “white supremacist terrorism” mass hysteria around the clock. The Guardian took a break from smearing Jeremy Corbyn as an anti-Semite to proclaim that El Paso was “Trump-inspired Terrorism.” The Sydney Morning Herald declared that the U.S. is now officially in the throes of a “white nationalist terrorism crisis.“ The Atlantic likened Trump to Anwar al-Awlaki, and assured us that “the worst is yet to come!Liberal journalists and politicians rushed onto Twitter to inform their followers that a global conspiracy of white supremacist terrorists “emboldened” or “inspired” by Donald Trump (who, remember, is a Russian secret agent) is threatening the very fabric of democracy, so it’s time to take some extraordinary measures!

    Never mind that it turns out that two of the three “white supremacist terrorist” mass murderers in question (i.e., the Gilroy, El Paso, and Dayton shooters) do not appear to have been white supremacists, and that none of them were linked to any terrorist groups. We’re living in the Age of Non-Terrorist Terrorism, in which anyone can be deemed a “terrorist,” or a “suddenly self-radicalized terrorist,” regardless of whether they have any actual connection to organized terrorism.

    Terrorism isn’t what used to be.

    Back in the day (i.e, the 1970s), there were terrorist groups like the PFLP, ANO, BSO, IRA, RAF, FARC, the Weather Underground, and so on … in other words, actual terrorist groups, committing acts of actual terrorism. More recently, there was al Qaeda and ISIS. Nowadays, however, more or less any attention-seeking sociopath with a death wish and a knock-off AR-15 (or moron with a bunch of non-exploding pipe bombs) can be deemed a bona fide “domestic terrorist,” as long as it serves the global capitalist ruling classes’ official narrative.

    The official narrative of the moment is Democracy versus The Putin-Nazis (also known as The War on Populism), which I’ve been covering in these columns, satirically and more seriously, for the better part of the last three years. According to this official narrative, “democracy is under attack” by a conspiracy of Russians and neo-Nazis that magically materialized out of thin air during the Summer of 2016, right around the time Trump won the nomination. OK, the Russia part kind of sputtered out recently, so the global capitalist ruling classes and their mouthpieces in the corporate media are now going full-bore on the fascism hysteria. They’ve been doing this relentlessly since Trump won the election, alternating between the Russia hysteria and the fascism hysteria from week to week, day to day, sometimes hour to hour, depending on which one is “hot” at the moment.

    These recent mass shootings have provided them with a golden opportunity, not just to flog the fascism hysteria once again, but to fold it into the terrorism hysteria which Americans have been indoctrinated with since September 11, 2001 (the objective of which indoctrination being to establish in the American psyche “the Terrorist” as the new official enemy, replacing the “Communist” official enemy that had filled this role throughout the Cold War). If you think the original War on Terror was just about oil or geopolitical hegemony, check out “leftist” political Twitter’s response to the El Paso and Dayton shootings. You’ll find, not just hysterical liberals, but “leftists” and even so-called “anarchists,” shrieking about “white supremacist terrorism.”

    It was the number one U.S. hashtag on Monday.

    No, the original War on Terror (whatever else it was) was probably the most effective fascist psy-op in the history of fascist psy-ops. Fifteen years of relentless exposure to manufactured “terrorism” hysteria has conditioned most Americans (and most Westerners, generally), upon hearing emotional trigger words like “terrorist” and “terrorism” emanating from the mouths of politicians (or the front page of The New York Times) to immediately switch off their critical thinking, and start demanding that the authorities censor the Internet, suspend the U.S. Constitution, and fill the streets with militarized vehicles and special “anti-terror” forces with assault rifles in the “sling-ready” position. This tweet by Geraldo Rivera captures the authoritarian mindset perfectly:

    “In the meantime, there must be active-shooter trained, heavily armed security personnel every place innocents are gathered.”

    I’m not quite sure what “in the meantime” means. Perhaps it means until the USA, Western Europe, and the rest of the empire, can be transformed into a happy, hate-free, supranational corporate police state where there is no racism, no fascism, no terrorism, and no one ever says bad things on the Internet.

    What a glorious, transhuman world that will be, like a living, breathing Benetton ad, once all the racists, terrorists, and extremists have been eliminated, or heavily medicated, or quarantined and reeducated!

    Until then, the War on White Supremacist Terrorism, Domestic Terrorism, Islamicist Terrorism, Russian Terrorism, Iranian Terrorism, anti-Semitic Labour Party Terrorism, and any other type of terrorism, extremism, hate, conspiratorial thinking… oh, and Populism (I almost forgot that one), and every other type of non-conformity to global capitalist ideology, will continue until we achieve final victory! It’s coming … sooner than you probably think.

    Damn, here I am, at the end of my essay, and I almost forget to call Trump a racist. He is, of course. He’s a big fat racist. I should have put that right at the top. I’m already in hot water with my fellow leftists for not doing that enough. Oh, and for the record, in case there are any other kinds of Inquisitors reading this, I also renounce Satan and all his works.

  • "Insect Apocalypse:" US Farmland 48 Times More Toxic To Insects Than 25 Years Ago

    A new study shows how “insect apocalypse” is unfolding across America’s farmland since neonicotinoid pesticides were introduced several decades ago.

    Researchers found that farmland across the country is 48 times more toxic to insect life than 25 years ago, and neonicotinoid pesticides account for a large majority of the increase in toxicity.

    “It is alarming that US agriculture has become so much more toxic to insect life in the past two decades,” said Kendra Klein, Ph.D., study co-author and senior staff scientist at Friends of the Earth.

    “We need to phase out neonicotinoid pesticides to protect bees and other insects that are critical to biodiversity and the farms that feed us.”

    Published in the journal PLOS ONE on Tuesday, the new study is a complete assessment of pesticide usage on farmland in the US, is the first study in the world to quantify how dangerous fields have become for insects by providing YoY changes in toxicity levels of the soil.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The increased toxic load measured in the study could explain why insect populations are collapsing in the US.

    Klein said neonicotinoids are more toxic for insects than traditional pesticides and are widely used by farmers. These dangerous chemicals can remain in the soil for months to years after one application.

    “Congress must pass the Saving America’s Pollinators Act to ban neonicotinoids,” said Klein.

    “In addition, we need to rapidly shift our food system away from dependence on harmful pesticides and toward organic farming methods that work with nature rather than against it.”

    The study suggests neonicotinoids are a major factor in the recent decline of insects, along with climate change and habitat destruction, leading scientist to warn of an “insect apocalypse.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Insects, such as honey bees, are the world’s most important pollinator of food crops. It’s estimated that at least one-third of food consumed by humans relies on pollination mainly by bees, but also by other insects, birds, and bats.

    Neonicotinoid usage has been linked to honey-bee colony collapse disorder and loss of birds due to a decline in insect populations.

    Klein said neonicotinoid became popular with farmers during the mid-2000s, has contributed to the dramatic increase of toxic farmland.

    The study found imidacloprid and clothianidin, produced by Bayer, and thiamethoxam, a product of Syngenta-ChemChina were the three neonicotinoids that contributed to the increasing toxic load in farmlands.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Last year, Europe banned three main neonicotinoids (clothianidin, imidacloprid, and thiamethoxam) for all farming activity. Several states in the US have also restricted farmers from using the chemicals, out of fear that it could further collapse the honey bee population.

  • Pence Slams Colleges Over Free-Speech Zones, Safe Spaces

    Authored by Adam Sabes via Campus Reform,

    Vice President Mike Pence said Tuesday that safe spaces and free speech zones on America’s college campuses are “antithetical to the process of learning” and that he is proud of young people for challenging various speech codes on their campuses.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pence made these comments during an event hosted by Christian conservative nonprofit the Alliance Defending Freedom and made clear that campus free speech is an issue that President Donald Trump takes seriously. Earlier in 2019, Trump signed an executive order tying federal research dollars to free speech on campus, as Campus Reformreported at the time.

    WATCH (relevant portion begins around the 14:10 mark):

    We’ve sent a very strong message to campuses, universities, and colleges around the country that the freedom of speech is enshrined in the First Amendment of the Constitution, and we expect our institutions of learning to respect that and respect diverse views on our campuses, and create an environment that is conducive to learning,” Pence said.

    The Vice President continued by expressing that he is “encouraged” by young students on college campuses who are standing up to restrictive speech codes.

    “And this is — I must tell you: I feel somewhat encouraged not just because of the strong stand the President has taken, but because of the courageous stand that we’ve seen young people taking on campuses around the country, challenging these — what do they call them? — ‘safe zones’ that emerged; you know, challenging speech codes that have emerged on campus,” Pence said. “All of those things are antithetical to the process of learning.”

    He noted that more and more students are starting to challenge speech codes, and that it’s no longer just conservatives battling them anymore.

    The encouraging thing…is I see it’s not just conservatives that are speaking out against this now,” Pence said. “It’s actually very encouraging that many liberals are recognizing the political correctness, the reality of speech codes and censorship on our campuses.”

    Pence said that it is critical that free speech and discourse are kept safe on college campuses, and told the audience what he does whenever he sees protests.

    “You know, I’m reminded, my kids — my kids often quote me.  Whenever I was governor or Vice President, or we see — I see somebody waving an unflattering sign or — you know, some people shouting something out — I always look at my kids and I say, ‘That’s what freedom looks like. That’s what freedom sounds like.’ Right?  And the ability to disagree,” Pence said, “the ability to be critical of people that are in public life — that’s at the very center of what the people who founded this country had in mind and has been preserved through the generations.  And we have to make sure it’s preserved on the campuses of America.”

  • Hahnemann Hospital Bankruptcy Threatens To Leave New Residents Facing Massive Malpractice Liabilities

    A plan to find new work for about 570 resident physicians that will be stranded by Hahnemann University Hospital’s bankruptcy has come under fire for leaving its residents potentially uninsured, according to Bloomberg.

    Hahnemann University Hospital, in Philadelphia, filed for bankruptcy in July and began shutting down at the same time that hundreds of doctors were beginning their residencies. Now, the plan to move those doctors has been criticized by both medical education groups and the US government.

    Hahnemann came up with a plan to sell its residency program to Tower Health, an operator of other hospitals in the region. The program could wind up being auctioned off if competing offers come in, with plans for an auction to be held this week and the results to later be presented to a judge in bankruptcy court in Delaware.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The proposed sale would give residents a place to go, while at the same time making money for Hahnemann by moving its Medicare contracts along with other elements of its residency program.

    However, the US government has been critical of the plan, stating this week that it doesn’t comply with requirements for handing off Medicare arrangements. US authorities are urging the bankruptcy judge to reject the resident program sale when it comes up for review. Pennsylvania medical oversight officials argued on Tuesday that nothing in the deal overrides the state’s licensing authority.

    Medical education authorities also cautioned that Hahnemann could be “sticking new doctors with liability if something goes wrong with patients they saw while working at the hospital.”

    The Association of American Medical Colleges, the Educational Commission for Foreign Medical Graduates and the Accreditation Council for Graduate Medical Educationor all noted that nothing in the resident program sale protects the residents and that Hahnemann has not assured that it will continue to provide insurance coverage for any medical mishaps that take place as it winds down.

    The hospital is closing after failing to return a profit to its private equity owners, headed up by former investment banker Joel Freedman.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The hospital has a limited number of options, but medical groups argue that either the hospital or its buyer has to provide insurance coverage and preserve medical records for residents. Michael D. Brofman, a New York lawyer who has represented unionized residents and interns in other hospital bankruptcies said: “Everyone who signs a chart gets named in a malpractice case.”

    Once Hahnemann is completely disbanded, lawyers for those claiming that they were injured by treatment at the hospital will likely try to collect damages from the people that work there. The exposure could be a massive problem for young doctors who already have significant amounts of student loan debt.

    Lawyers for the Association of American Medical Colleges and other education groups urged the court to provide answers on how residents would be protected going forward.

  • Grass Gestapo Out Of Control: $30K Fine & Potential Foreclosure For Too-Long Lawn

    Authored by Dagny Taggart via The Organic Prepper blog,

    A few weeks ago, I noticed a woman standing in my neighbor’s yard doing something I thought was pretty damn strange: she was measuring blades of grass with a tape measure.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then I noticed the city truck parked on the street.

    Turns out, the woman was with codes compliance or whatever they call it…apparently, her job is to drive around looking for reasons to harass and extort people for things like tall grass.

    When I realized who she was and what she was doing, my next thoughts were:

    “Are there not real problems in this city that need attention? There are people who drive around and measure grass for a living? And these employees are paid with taxpayer money…to extort taxpayers?”

    It isn’t like there aren’t real problems in this city. Like most regions in the US, there are things like potholes, traffic light outages, crime, and other random issues that, to a logical thinker, seem more pressing than the height of residents’ lawns.

    Since when did having tall grass become a crime?

    In many parts of the United States, allowing your grass to reach a certain height will lead to an unpleasant visit from the Grass Gestapo. I know, because it happened to me a few days after I spotted the Lawn Police measuring my neighbor’s grass. We were the lucky recipients of a letter informing us that OUR grass was too tall and that if we didn’t address the “violation” there would be consequences.

    So, we mowed the grass and thought the issue was resolved.

    A few weeks later, we got another letter from the city. Apparently, we are now on some kind of lawn maintenance watch list.

    Here is an excerpt from the second letter. I have added my own observations and commentary (the parts in bold and italics):

    An inspection of the above described property (so much for private property – pretty sure this is trespassing) was conducted and the following violation of the [redacted for privacy] municipal code was observed:

    On 06/25/2019 you were sent a letter stating the following violation. Once again on 07/23/2019 I inspected your property and the grass and weeds were again exceeding the allowed 7 inches. (Again, this woman admits she trespassed on our property)

    VIOLATION:

    All premises and exterior property shall be maintained free from weeds or plant growth in excess of 7 inches in height. All noxious weeds shall be prohibited. Weeds shall be defined as all grasses, annual plants, and vegetation, other than trees or shrubs provided; however, this term shall not include cultivated flowers and gardens. (Now every property “owner” is expected to be able to identify noxious weeds and other plants? I’m surprised the city hasn’t hired botanists to come out to identify each and every piece of vegetation on every yard and fine us per plant.)

    Any owner of agent having charge of a property who fails to cut and destroy weeds after service of a notice violation, they shall be subject to prosecution in accordance with (code redacted) and as prescribed by the authority having jurisdiction. Upon failure to comply with the notice of violation, any duly authorized employee of the City or contractor hired by the City shall be authorized to enter upon the property that is in violation and cut and destroy the weeds growing thereon, and the costs of such removal shall be paid by the owner or agent responsible for the property. (Translated: We will trespass on “your” property whenever we want, and there is nothing you can do about it.)

    Also in accordance with state statutes (redacted for privacy), if weeds are allowed to grow on the same property in violation of (code redacted) more than once during the same growing season, no additional notification is Department of Planning and Community Development required and the weeds will be cut by a contractor employed by the City with the cost thereof placed as an additional special tax on the property if it is not paid within 30 days of receiving invoice.

    Additionally, if it is determined that compliance is not met, a citation may be issued in the (redacted) court which will require an appearance in Court and may include a fine of up to $1000 per day (What the heck?) that the violation is allowed to occur. (This is extortion. What if a property owner is disabled or injured and can’t afford to hire lawn service? What if they are in the hospital? What if they just happen to like tall grass?)

    The letter included copies of photos the Grass Police took of our yard.

    A man may lose his home due to the height of his grass.

    While some people might think “Well, just cut your grass regularly and the government will leave you alone,” it isn’t always that simple.

    Jim Ficken knows this all too well.

    The city of Dunedin, Florida, is trying to steal his home because the grass was too tall.

    The Institute for Justice (IJ) – known as “the National Law Firm for Liberty” – is helping Ficken fight the government in court.

    Here is a summary of the case:

    In May 2018, Jim left his home in Dunedin, a Tampa Bay suburb, to go to South Carolina to work on settling his late mother’s affairs. While Jim was out of town, the man he paid to cut his lawn unexpectedly died. Grass grows quickly in Florida, and the lawn soon grew longer than the ten inches allowed by the city. The city immediately began fining Jim, having classified him as a “repeat offender” because of a warning he got back in 2015. Jim finally found out he was being fined when a code inspector told him he would be getting “a big bill.” Jim then immediately cut the grass, figuring he would be fined no more than a few hundred dollars.

    It was $500 per day—the same as the fine for driving 50 mph in a school zone. And the city assessed it every day for over 57 days. With fees loaded on top, the total fine was nearly $29,000. That’s not the kind of money Jim has lying around. He begged the city to reconsider—to fine him something fair—but the city refused.

    Come February, it was time to pay up. The city gave him 15 days to come up with $29,000, otherwise the city was going to get its money another way: by foreclosing on his home. And on May 7, that’s just what the city voted to do. (source)

    Ficken is not the only American who is being subjected to this kind of treatment, IJ goes on to explain:

    No one should lose their home because they let their grass grow too long. In February 2019, the U.S. Supreme Court unanimously ruled that governments cannot impose excessive fines. And losing your home because the grass was too long is excessive. Jim is nearly 70 and on a limited income. Fining him $29,000 is outrageous. And it’s part of a wider trend: all over America, local governments are padding their budgets by assessing crippling fines on their own residents.

    That’s why Jim and the Institute for Justice are fighting back in court. It’s not just about Jim’s home in Dunedin, Florida. It’s about ensuring—for everyone—that abusive governments can’t trump the Constitution. (source)

    Ficken filed a lawsuit against Dunedin and members of its Code Enforcement Board. He’s seeking $1 in nominal damages, attorneys fees, and injunctions that would relieve him of the fines. The suit also hopes to end Dunedin’s practice of fining people “without considering a homeowner’s ability to pay.”

    “The City had the authority to mow Jim’s grass and send him a reasonable bill,” the filing points out. “Upon information and belief, the City did not do so because it prioritizes revenue over code compliance.”

    Some might think cities are justified in fining people who do not maintain their lawns. But if one is concerned about the appearance of a neighbor’s yard (property values and all that), why not…go over and offer to mow the grass yourself? That seems like a neighborly thing to do, doesn’t it?

    Is a $29,000 fine – or a person losing their home – proportional to having tall grass for a few weeks?

    Does this sound like something that should happen in a free country?

    Fining people $500 a DAY is unconscionable and frankly, downright cruel.

    People are outraged over how governments are treating property owners.

    Thankfully, Fricken’s story has received a lot of attention, and a lot of people are angry about how the city is treating him.

    In May, it was reported that the mayor of Dunedin and other city officials received multiple threats of violence in response to the case.

    The Pinellas County Sheriff’s Office is now investigating after the mayor of Dunedin and other city officials received multiple threats of violence in response to a viral story about a citizen being fined nearly $30,000 for not cutting his grass, according to Dunedin City Manager Jennifer Bramley.

    People from across the country unleashed their anger on the city of Dunedin by phone and by email this week.

    “This is repeat violations. There were 15 of them and we intervened on behalf of the neighborhood. We are not putting him out on the street without a home. He has 4 homes,” Bramley said.

    Bramley is speaking out on behalf of Mayor Julie Ward Bujalski who has been the target of threatening phone calls to her home. The person on the other end threatened harm to the mayor and her family.

    “There have been threats to the code enforcement board, the code enforcement division, to city hall, the city manager’s office. Physical threats,” Bramley said.

    One emailer wrote: “I hope someone burns your city hall to the ground.”

    “We’re going to come down there and visit you, a whole bunch of us,” someone said in a voicemail.

    Bramley says some workers are concerned.

    “A lot of our employees are frightened to come to work,” Bramley said. (source)

    A few weeks after the city reported it was receiving threats, this story broke…

    The city of Dunedin has hired a crisis PR firm after coming under fire from the public for moving to foreclose on a homeowner who could not pay nearly $30,000 in fines for tall grass.

    I-Team Investigator Kylie McGivern found a month-long city contract with the firm, Sachs Media Group, will cost taxpayers $25,000. (source)

    Let’s get this straight: the city is threatening to take a man’s home because his grass was tall. The city faces public scrutiny and backlash for its actions. The city then adds insult to injury by spending $25,000 in taxpayer money to try to save face.

    Have we reached peak government stupidity yet?

    Ron Sachs, CEO of Sachs Media Group, told the I-Team the following:

    “The city’s doing its job the way it’s supposed to do. And it’s making sure your neighborhood is protected and your community quality of life is protected, and the reason they’ve asked for our help is to help them message most effectively the facts and the truth, because some news organizations are not fully and fairly reporting this story.”

    Sachs called Ficken, “a chronic scofflaw, who ignores code enforcement notifications and has enjoyed being a scofflaw, being a bad neighbor who doesn’t even live in the home in question.” (source)

    Ari Bargil, Ficken’s attorney, defended his client:

    “Jim lives in the property, he’s been living there for years. So the extent that the city is suggesting otherwise, it’s just untrue. With respect to previous code violations, I think the city’s putting a really colorful gloss on what actually happened. In every instance in which Jim has received a notice to correct any sort of alleged violation on his property, he’s done it. He was never fined once by the city. He’s been compliant every single time. This is the first time they’ve ever fined him and they decided that they were going to go nuclear,” said Bargil. (source)

    John Stossel spoke with Ficken and Bargil:

     

    Governments imposing excessive fines is a widespread problem.

    I have yet to figure out who exactly is harmed by tall grass, but it isn’t the only petty “offense” that governments are fining people for.

    Slapping unsuspecting individuals with ridiculous fines and fees is becoming increasingly common, as IJ reports:

    Ultimately, this case is bigger than Jim. In 2007, the entire amount of fines that Dunedin imposed for code violations was $34,000—only a little more than the amount the city is now demanding for Jim’s lawn alone. A decade later, in 2017, the city was raking in 20 times as much, about $700,000. In fiscal year 2018, it collected almost $1.3 million in total fines.The city’s code‑enforcement attorney—the one who refused to negotiate with Jim—calls the system a “well‑oiled machine.”

    It represents a larger trend: governments imposing crippling and excessive fines and fees and then using abusive tactics to collect. For example, Florida is considering taking away the restored voting rights of felons who haven’t been able to pay court fees. Nationwide, about forty states will take away your driver’s license if you owe certain fees to the government. In the most egregious cases, a city might even give a private prosecutor a financial incentive to go after minor code violations and then charge residents for their own prosecutions (source)

    It seems that governments seek out opportunities to steal property.

    Consider the following examples.

    In 2011, Eileen Battisti lost her home over an unpaid $6.30 tax bill. Yes, you read that figure right. No, it is not a typo. When Battisti’s husband died, she used the proceeds from his life insurance policy to pay off the mortgage but struggled to keep up with some other bills. She missed a property tax deadline by six days but eventually paid the original bill of $833.88 plus the penalty and late fees. However, she was unaware that additional interest of $6.30 had accrued – that amount was not included on the last bill she received.

    In 2010, Battisti was late again with her county tax payments. She again settled up, paying interest and penalty in full for 2010. The $6.30 from 2008 remained unpaid and Battisti claims that she was not made aware of the balance. By 2011, the amount due from the 2008 tax bill had ballooned to $255.84. County officials proceeded to put Battisti’s home up for sale.

    Battisti’s home was eventually sold at sheriff’s sale for nearly $120,000. After taxes, interest and costs deducted from the sale, Battisti was entitled to just $108,039 from the proceeds. She was not entitled to her home. (source)

    When I first heard about Battisti’s case several years ago, it was quite the wake-up call. For the first time, I realized that we really do not have any true property rights here in the US.

    Thankfully, in 2014, the Pennsylvania Supreme Court ruled that Battisti was entitled to her home because she was not given clear notice of the amount due. But can you believe this case had to be taken all the way to the state’s highest court – and that it took 3 years for Battisti to get her home back?

    Last month, a woman in New Jersey was facing the prospect of losing her house in Cranford – that she has lived in since the 1940s – because of delinquent property taxes. Rose Estwanick is a 106-year-old widow who suffers from a plethora of physical ailments as well as dementia. Estwanick’s daughter created a GoFundMe campaign for her mother, in which she shared the tragic details of the situation:

    Having checked with our municipal tax office, we cannot defer property taxes. The State of New Jersey has no hardship exemptions for centenarian homeowners on social security income. We have one option available to avoid the Cranford Township Tax Sale scheduled for September 18, 2019: Make a minimum PAYMENT OF $8,367.18. (source)

    On the bright side, Estwanick’s fundraising campaign has raised over $22,000 so far, exceeding the $12,000 goal her daughter established.

    All of these cases shed light on a troubling reality: we truly do not own anything.

    As Daisy Luther eloquently states in Are We Really Free? Maybe It’s Time for a Personal Declaration of Independence:

    How independent are any of us, really? We like to think we live in the “free-est” nation in the world, but do we really?  Think about it.

    You never own your home outright, even when the mortgage is paid off. Every year, you must make your extortion payment to the city or trust me, you won’t be living in that house for long.

    The same thing with your car. If you don’t pay your annual extortion payment on your vehicle and pay a hundred bucks for a tiny sticker that gives you permission to drive it, it will be promptly towed away by the city with the government’s blessing. Then, like a hostage negotiation gone wrong, you’ll have to pay even more money to cover their theft and storage of YOUR vehicle.

    On a regular basis, you must pay a fee and ask the government for permission to do any number of things, such as driving a car, traveling outside the country, running a business, adding another bathroom to your home, or even catching a fish for dinner.

    Permits and licenses are big revenue generators from start to finish – and if you proceed without asking permission, they will extort more money from you in the form of fines. If you refuse to pay the fines (or if you can’t) they’ll kidnap you and lock you in a cage, where you’ll be forced to perform manual labor for 10 cents an hour for whatever length of time the legal authorities feel is sufficient to teach you a lesson.

    There are places in our nation where you can’t use your property the way you want. There are areas where you cannot collect the water that falls on your land. There are places where you aren’t allowed to detach your home from the grid. There are places that dictate where your vegetable garden can grow (or even if you’re allowed to have one), places that won’t allow you to hang your clothes out to dry, and places that make it illegal to sleep in your car.

    The bottom line is, some places in the United States are freer than others, but we’re all still serfs paying fealty to lords. (source)

    Perhaps a little – no, a lot – of rebellion is in order.

    What if people started refusing to pay these exorbitant fines?

    What if people started helping each other – reaching out to each other to offer help, mowing each other’s tall grass, and offering other forms of assistance?

    What if we all worked together to protest massive government overreach and showed tyrants that we aren’t going to put up with their coercion and bullying tactics anymore?

    There is power in numbers.

    This struggle may be a moral one, or it may be a physical one, and it may be both moral and physical, but it must be a struggle. Power concedes nothing without a demand. It never did and it never will.

    Find out just what any people will quietly submit to and you have found out the exact measure of injustice and wrong which will be imposed upon them, and these will continue till they are resisted with either words or blows, or with both.

    The limits of tyrants are prescribed by the endurance of those whom they oppress. – Frederick Douglass

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 8th August 2019

  • Ukraine's Zelensky Presses Putin For Peace Talks After Four Soldiers Killed

    Significant escalating clashes between pro-Kiev forces and Russian-backed separatists in the contested Donetsk region has resulted in the deaths of four Ukrainian soldiers, government officials said Wednesday. 

    Ukraine’s Defense Ministry issued a statement saying pro-Russia separatists opened fire at Ukrainian military positions on August 6, which killed the soldiers in a hail of mortars, machine guns, and assault rifle fire.

     “We say with sadness that, as a result of the enemy’s attacks today, according to the information in our possession, four of our heroes sustained injuries, to which they succumbed,” the statement said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky called Russian leader Vladimir Putin on Wednesday following the deadly incident, via UNIAN

    President Volodymyr Zelenskiy condemned the attack as an attempt to “undermine” Ukraine’s push for a peaceful resolution, which has been a key and popular part of the newly elected “outsider” president’s platform, who had won an unexpected landslide victory last April after pledging to end the war in Donbass.

    Zelenskiy further called on EU countries as well as Russia to “meet as quickly as possible to resume negotiations.” Though since the conflict began in April 2014 there’s been an estimated over 13,000 people killed in the conflict in eastern Ukraine, Tuesday’s flare up in intense fighting marked the highest daily casualty toll since a truce was declared three weeks ago. 

    Ukraine’s president spoke to President Putin by phone Wednesday, reportedly urging him to pressure Donbass fighters into holding firm to peace talks. 

    “I said that this doesn’t bring us closer to peace,” Zelenskiy described of the call.

    “I beg you to influence the other side so that they stop the killing of our people.”

    A July 22 ceasefire agreement inked in Minsk – agreed to by Ukrainian and Russian envoys – however, (like other short-lived ceasefires) witnessed both sides accuse the other of breaching the terms nearly from the start. 

  • How Brexit Is Leading A Resurgent Irish American Influence In US Politics

    Authored by Liam Kennedy via The Conservation,

    Observing the build up of Irish and Irish American energies in Washington DC in preparation for St Patrick’s Day in March, the Economist’s Lexington column marvelled that the Irish Taoiseach is the only world leader guaranteed an annual meeting with the US president. As Ed Luce wrote in the FT: “No one who sampled Washington’s manic schedule of St Patrick’s day events … could miss the formidable display of Ireland’s influence.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And yet that influence has often been missed, or simply dismissed as “shamrock diplomacy”, particularly by British observers. It’s ironic, then, that this influence may play a significant part in the diplomatic shenanigans around Brexit, and in post-Brexit relations between Britain, Ireland and the US, after strong political groups in Congress warn they are ready to block any US-UK trade deal in the event of a threat to an open Irish border as the UK seeks to leave the EU.

    Ireland’s soft power in the US has long been hidden in plain sight, drawing on the appeal of an ethnic identity that around 35m Americans claimed in the last national census. It has close ties to the Irish American leadership at the heart of American politics and to the Irish American lobby in Washington. The power of this lobby, as with any ethnic lobby, is contingent on both US domestic affairs and international interests. Today, it is showing signs of flexing diplomatic muscles long thought dormant.

    Nationalism and independence

    The main issues that have historically concerned the Irish American lobby are support for Irish independence, the conflict in Northern Ireland, and increasing quotas for Irish immigrant entry to the US.

    These issues reflect the scale and nature of Irish emigration to, and patterns of settlement in, the US. Of the more than 6m people who journeyed from Ireland to the US between 1840 and 1900, most settled in northern and eastern urban centres. From immiserated and often traumatic beginnings in the US, the Irish aggregated power and identity in these urban centres over time, via the catholic church, machine politics and union leadership.

    Nationalism was a core feature of American life for many Irish emigrants and their offspring. From the Untied Irish Exiles in the early 1800s to Clan na Gael in the early 1900s, Irish American political culture maintained a strong investment in the imagined freedom of the old country. With reciprocal interest from organisations in Ireland, a transnational culture of political activism developed that eventually fed into the successful struggle for Ireland’s independence in the early 20th century.

    Much of this activism worked through civil society organisations. But in 1917, following President Woodrow Wilson’s declaration of war against Germany and the need to defend the rights of small nations, several political resolutions pressed US support for Irish independence. These pressures to address “the Irish question” reached a head with a full floor discussion in Congress in March 1919, which passed a resolution calling on the US delegation at the Versailles peace conference in Paris to make Irish self-determination an urgent matter.

    The temperature of Irish nationalism in the US cooled in the later 1920s. Ireland still promoted itself in the US after this but its neutrality meant it had difficulties getting its voice heard. Successive US presidents and administrations deferred to British perspectives, most notably on Northern Ireland.

    The Troubles

    The eruption of violent conflict in Northern Ireland in the late 1960s fuelled a resurgence of ethnic consciousness in Irish America and politicised portions of it in favour of a militant nationalism. Through the 1970s, there was a small but significant swell in support for the claims and activities of the IRA.

    This militancy galvanised moderate Irish American political leaders to promote support for constitutional nationalism and to lobby in Washington for US intervention in Northern Ireland. The Four Horsemen – Senator Edward Kennedy, Speaker Tip O’Neill, Senator Daniel Moynihan and Governor Hugh Carey – had some success in pressing President Jimmy Carter to make a symbolic statement on Northern Ireland in 1977, which broke the silence of American administrations.

    In 1981, they helped form Friends of Ireland, a bipartisan group of senators and representatives, which played a significant role in the Anglo-Irish Agreement in 1985 and advanced the idea that a political solution was possible.

    Carter’s symbolic line would later be bulldozed by Bill Clinton as he led a major shift in US policy towards Northern Ireland as president. This shift was facilitated by a lobby group of influential Irish Americans, which pressed Clinton to intervene in Northern Ireland and contributed to back-channel diplomacy involving covert discussions with the IRA and efforts to connect Sinn Féin with US policy makers.

    There can be no doubt that the Good Friday Agreement of 1998 has the fingerprints of Irish America on it. It was a high-water mark for its Washington lobbyists. But for the next 20 years Northern Ireland would slip off the agenda and focus shifted principally to economic relations between Ireland and the US. After the passing of the Four Horsemen’s generation of leadership and the post-9/11 deterrence to new Irish emigrants, Irish America no longer functioned as a recognisable political block and had drifted from its once strong association with the Democratic Party.

    Brexit

    But Brexit and Donald Trump – in different but complexly related ways – have galvanised Irish America and re-energised Washington lobbying. On Brexit, there is now consistent messaging around the need to defend the Good Friday Agreement in relation to any trade deal between the UK and the US. Former members of Congress and US ambassadors to Ireland, and the leaders of major Irish American organisations now belong to the Ad Hoc Committee to Protect the Good Friday Agreement, created in January 2019.

    There is powerful support from the House Speaker Nancy Pelosi, who took it directly to the UK and Irish governments when she said in April that if the Brexit deal undermined the Good Friday Accord there would be “no chance” of a trade agreement between the US and the UK.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Another powerful voice is Congressman Richard Neal, a long time spokesman for Irish interests, stretching back to his involvement in the Northern Irish peace process. His voice carries some authority in Washington as chair of the influential Ways and Means Committee in Congress, which will oversee any post-Brexit trade deal between the US and the UK.

    Competing interests

    Underlying this coordinated messaging is a complex of political drives and interests. While there can be no doubting Pelosi’s and Neal’s commitment to protecting the Good Friday Agreement, their forthright comments on the makings of a trade deal between the UK and the US are also a form of opposition to President Donald Trump.

    This opposition is about more than Brexit but neither is it simply domestic political partisanship. It also reflects a deeper ideological struggle over American identity and the US’s role in the world. Trump supports Brexit, viewing it as a weakening of the European Union’s regulatory power, aligning it with his worldview of “America First” in which all international relations are transactional. Pelosi and Neal view Brexit as a threat to the liberal internationalism that has guided US foreign policy since the end of World War II and now seems imperilled by Trump.

    In this regard, Ireland finds itself in the midst of a transatlantic struggle between advocates of nationalism and globalisation. With its government having pinned its colours to the forces of globalisation and the merits of continued EU membership it too has to politick carefully with its powerful neighbours as it designs its future post-Brexit.

  • China's H-6K Heavy Bomber Could Soon Air-Launch Hypersonic Missiles For Pre-Emptive Attacks 

    As an economic war deepens between China and the US, China Central Television (CCTV) said on Tuesday that the Xian H-6 heavy bomber could be armed with hypersonic missiles that can strike targets up to 1,864 miles away within minutes, reported Global Times.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Together with Chengdu J-20 fifth-generation stealth fighters, H-6Ks could deliver pre-emptive hypersonic missile attacks deep in enemy territory, military analysts said.

    “In a war, our main objective is to launch attacks on an enemy’s deep and vital positions, paralyzing their facilities. This is what we especially excel at,” said H-6K pilot Li Ping via a CCTV report.

    Wang Ya’nan, the chief editor of Aerospace Knowledge magazine, told Global Times that H-6Ks aren’t stealth bombers and cannot penetrate heavily armed aerospace; it’s the plane’s ability to air-launch cruise missiles that allows it to strike high-value targets deep in enemy territory.

    “The H-6K can remain within a safe zone, launch its hypersonic missiles that can reach targets 2,000 kilometers [1,242 miles] away,” Ya’nan said, noting that these missiles are difficult to intercept due to their stealth capabilities.

    “With China developing hypersonic weapons [missiles that fly at least five times the speed of sound] in recent years, its attack range and speed could become even greater than a conventional cruise missile, potentially capable of taking out targets deep within hostile territories 3,000 kilometers [1,864] away within just a few minutes,” Ya’nan predicted.

    He said each H-6K could carry six hypersonic missiles, and with ten bombers, could attack 60 high-value targets at once.

    During an attack, J-20s will defend H-6Ks so that they can effectively launch superfast missiles that will hit targets within minutes.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hypersonic missiles are already being tested by the People’s Liberation Army, can travel over Mach 5 and evade the world’s most advanced missile defense shields.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    CCTV said H-6Ks are undergoing constant war training exercises with fifth-generation stealth fighters.

    The rapid advance of hypersonic technology in China has eroded America’s dominance over its rivals.

    A dangerous new global paradigm of power being shifted from West to East has started. In other words, China is attempting to become the world’s next superpower, threatening the US, the status quo power, could ultimately end up in a shooting war.

    The world is falling into Thucydides’s Trap: prepare for war.

  • Paul Craig Roberts Slams The FBI's "Open Invitation To Tyranny"

    Authored by Paul Craig Roberts,

    The FBI has published a document that concludes that “conspiracy theories” can motivate believers to commit crimes.

    Considering the growing acceptance of pre-emptive arrest, that is, arresting someone before they can commit a crime that they are suspected of planning to commit, challenging official explanations, such as those offered for the assassinations of John F. Kennedy, Robert Kennedy, and Martin Luther King or the official explanation for 9/11, can now result in monitoring by authorities with a view to finding a reason for pre-emptive arrest.  Presidents George W. Bush and Obama created the police state precedents of suspension of habeas corpus and assassination of citizens on suspicion alone without due process.  If Americans can be preemptively detained indefinitely and preemptively assassinated,  Americans can expect to be preemptively imprisoned for crimes that they did not commit. 

    As Lawrence Stratton and I explained in our book, The Tyranny of Good Intentions, the historic achievement of forging law into a shield of the people is being reversed in our time as law is being reforged into a weapon in the hands of the government. 

    The FBI document says that conspiracy theories “are usually at odds with official or prevailing explanations of events.”  Note the use of “official” and “prevailing.”  Official explanations are explanations provided by governments.  Prevailing explanations are the explanations that the media repeats.  Examples of official and prevailing explanations are: Saddam Hussein’s weapons of mass destruction, Assad’s use of chemical weapons, Iranian nukes, Russian invasion of Ukraine, and the official explanation by the US government for the destruction of Libya.  If a person doubts official explanations such as these, that person is a “conspiracy theorist.”  

    Official and prevailing explanations do not have to be consistent with facts.  It is enough that they are official and prevailing.  Whether or not they are true is irrelevant.  Therefore, a person who stands up for the truth can be labeled a conspiracy theorist, monitored, and perhaps pre-emptively arrested. 

    Consider 9/11.  No forensic investigation of 9/11 was ever officially conducted.  Instead the destruction of the buildings was blamed on Osama bin Laden, and scenarios and simulations were created to support the allegation, not to find the truth.  Architects, engineers, scientists, pilots, and first responders on site cannot reconcile the official prevailing explanation with the facts.  The scientific and testimonial evidence that they have produced is dismissed as “conspiracy theory.”  It is those experts who stand on the evidence who are defined as conspiracy theorists, not those who created the story of Osama bin Laden’s 9/11 conspiracy.

    Consider Russiagate.  Here we have an alleged conspiracy between Trump and Russia that was the official prevailing explanation.  Yet, to believe in the Russiagate conspiracy did not make one a conspiracy theorist as this conspiracy was the official prevailing explanation.  But to doubt the Russiagate conspiracy did make one a conspiracy theorist.

    What the FBI report does, intentionally or unintentionally, is to define a conspiracist as a person who doubts official explanations.  In other words, it is a way of preventing any accountability of government.  Whatever the government says, no matter how obvious a lie, will have to be accepted as fact or we will be put on a list to be monitored for preemptive arrest.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In effect, the FBI’s document reduces the First Amendment, that is, free speech, to the right to repeat official and prevailing explanations.  Any other speech is a conspiratorial belief that can lead to the commission of a crime.

    Every American should be greatly concerned that the government in Washington does not see this FBI document as an open invitation to tyranny, repudiate it, and demand its recall.

  • NASA Circling DC-8 Jet Around San Andreas Fault Sparks Conspiracy Theories

    NASA appears to have flown a Douglas DC-8 observation plane, packed with scientific equipment, over the San Andreas fault, a tectonic boundary that extends 745 miles through California.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The plane was spotted flying extremely low to the ground over Altadena and Southern California on July 22, several weeks after California’s Searles Valley was struck with a magnitude 6.4 and 7.1 within 24 hours around July 4/5.

    NASA spokeswoman, Kate Squires, told CBS Los Angeles (CBSLA) that the plane was conducting a mission to study the effects of fire smoke on air quality. However, conspiracy theory-websites don’t buy the government’s explanation of why the aircraft was zig-zagging over the faultline.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Department said the plane, with call sign NASA817, took off from Palmdale Regional Airport, an airport in Palmdale, California, before flying 2,000 miles over Central California and Nevada and then landing at Boise Airport, Idaho.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Metro reported Californians were startled by the plane because it was flying at such a low altitude.

    “It was scary, a little bit. You didn’t know if was going to land,” CBSLA reporter Jasmine Viel, who was commuting when the plane flew over her, said.

    “Everyone kind of stopped in their cars, looking up. It was big and loud.”

    Conspiracy websites point to the planes flight path, appears to have followed some parts of the San Andreas fault.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Secureteam10’s Tyler Glockner suggested in a video that the plane was monitoring seismic activity across the fault. Glockner said the government could be gearing up for the next big earthquake.

    “A registered NASA aircraft was noticed doing zig-zag flying patterns near and over the San Andreas fault line,” he said in the clip.

    “It’s almost as if it is scanning the ground as if to try and get more data about what is happening underneath. What is going on? Is something occurring? What do they know, are they gearing up for something? Do they know the Big One is coming?”

    Conspiracy site allnewspipeline.com said the plane’s activity suggests NASA and the US government are hiding something from the public.

    One Twitter user the plane is “possibly scanning for data and information about the new supervolcano that is slowly forming in Southern California.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And possibly the US government is preparing for a nuclear disaster in Southern California because if the next big earthquake strikes, there are currently five nuclear reactors right along the fault.

    A Natural News investigation into the geolocation of nuclear power facilities in California reveals that five nuclear facilities were built in close proximity to the San Andreas fault line, with some constructed right in the middle of earthquake zones that have up to a 50% chance of a severe earthquake every 30 years.

    One nuclear power plant – the Diablo Canyon Nuclear Power Plant which produces 2,160 megawatts — was constructed on the coast, making it extremely vulnerable to the very same kind of ocean water surge that destroyed the Fukushima-Daiichi facility which suffered a 2011 meltdown in Japan.

    So what exactly is the US government preparing for in Southern California? Is it the next big earthquake that could spark a nuclear disaster?

  • CDC Shuts Down Military Lab Studying Ebola, Plague Amid Fears It's Getting Out Through Wastewater

    Authored by Daisy Luther via The Organic Prepper blog,

    We may not have to wait for a traveler from the Democratic Republic of Congo to visit the United States for an Ebola outbreak. It just might be brought to us by our own military along with the plague and other horrifying germs.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The laboratory at Fort Detrick, the  U.S. Army Medical Research Institute of Infectious Diseases, has been sent a cease-and-desist order by the Center for Disease Control and Prevention after a second inspection showed sloppy handling of deadly germs and viruses.

    The CDC inspected the military research institute in June and inspectors found several areas of concern in standard operating procedures, which are in place to protect workers in biosafety level 3 and 4 laboratories, spokeswoman Caree Vander Linden confirmed in an email Friday.

    The CDC sent a cease and desist order in July.

    After USAMRIID received the order from the CDC, its registration with the Federal Select Agent Program, which oversees disease-causing material use and possession, was suspended. That suspension effectively halted all biological select agents and toxin research at USAMRIID, Vander Linden said in her email. (source)

    At this time “no infectious pathogens, or disease-causing material, have been found outside authorized areas.” The New York Times reports that the CDC could not provide more specific details due to “national security reasons.”

    What was USMRIID doing wrong?

    The laboratory, which is located in Frederick, Maryland, studies different deadly bugs for biological warfare purposes. They have failed inspection specifically by the Federal Select Agent Program, which oversees the possession, use and transfer of biological select agents and toxins that could potentially pose a severe threat to public, animal or plant health.

    CDC spokeswoman Kathryn Harben wrote in an email that the Federal Select Agent Program doesn’t comment directly on whether a program is registered or what specific enforcement actions are taken.

    “As situations warrant, [Federal Select Agent Program] will take whatever appropriate action is necessary to resolve any departures from regulatory compliance in order to help ensure the safety and security of work with select agents and toxins,” Harben said in the email.

    The suspension was due to multiple causes, including failure to follow local procedures and a lack of periodic recertification training for workers in the biocontainment laboratories, according to Vander Linden. The wastewater decontamination system also failed to meet standards set by the Federal Select Agent Program, Vander Linden said in a follow-up email.

    The suspension was due to multiple causes, including failure to follow local procedures and a lack of periodic recertification training for workers in the biocontainment laboratories, according to Vander Linden. The wastewater decontamination system also failed to meet standards set by the Federal Select Agent Program, Vander Linden said in a follow-up email.

    “To maximize the safety of our employees, there are multiple layers of protective equipment and validated processes,” she said.

    Vander Linden could not say when the laboratory would be able to continue research.

    “USAMRIID will return to fully operational status upon meeting benchmark requirements for biosafety,” she said in an email. “We will resume operations when the Army and the CDC are satisfied that USAMRIID can safely and consistently meet all standards.” (source)

    The problems started with a flood in 2018.

    It’s important to note that the USAMRIID facility was flooded in May of 2018.

    In May 2018, storms caused a flood at the Fort Detrick facility, seriously damaging its 10-year-old steam sterilization plant, which provides high-tech wastewater management. The plant was offline for months, and the incident resulted in upgraded biosafety procedures. But as Vander Linden told the Frederick News-Post, the new protocols significantly increased “operational complexity” at the facility. The CDC inspection found that the “new procedures were not being followed consistently,” along with the discovery of “mechanical problems with the chemical-based decontamination system, as well as leaks [inside the lab]. (source)

    Imagine.

    A lab with all sorts of deadly viruses flooded, and most of us never heard a single thing about it. And ever since, the wastewater leaving the lab may or may not have been properly treated by steam sterilization.

    What is the lab at Fort Detrick studying?

    The USAMRIID is the Department of Defense’s (DoD) lead laboratory for medical biological defense research. Their mission is to “provide leading-edge medical capabilities to deter and defend against current and emerging biological threat agents.” Their vision is to “advance medical biological defense to protect our military and the nation.”

    So they study biological warfare from both an offensive and defensive standpoint.

    The local news outlet, The Frederick News-Post said:

    At the time of the cease and desist order, USAMRIID scientists were working with agents known to cause tularemia, also called deer fly or rabbit fever, the plague and Venezuelan equine encephalitis, all of which were worked on in a biosafety level 3 laboratory. Researchers were also working with the Ebola virus in a biosafety level 4 lab, Vander Linden said.

    Of the pathogens, Ebola, bacteria Yersinia pestis (plague), and bacterium Francisella tularensis (tularemia) are on the list of the Health and Human Services select agents and toxins. The three are considered Tier 1 agents, which pose a severe public health and safety threat.

    Venezuelan equine encephalitis also falls under the Federal Select Agent Program, according to the Code of Federal Regulations. (source)

    Nifty. Just imagine that stuff getting out with the facility’s wastewater.

    There’s no word on when operations will resume.

    I imagine the good people of Frederick, Maryland aren’t too thrilled to be in the same neighborhood as a laboratory which is sloppily studying all these deadly bugs. This is reminiscent of the rumors about Plum Island and ticks weaponized with Lyme disease, which lawmakers have recently been investigating. And it’s certainly no wonder the people of Manhattan, Kansas didn’t want the research facility being built there.

    Every time I see a story like this it reminds me of books like The Stand and movies like Outbreak.  All it takes is one careless laboratory accident – you know, like not sanitizing the wastewater before it leaves the facility – to start something that simply cannot be contained. It looks like all those folks prepping for a deadly pandemic may not be so crazy after all.

  • "Carry" Trade: Armed Men Steal $2.5 Million In Gold Coins From Mexico's Mint

    Talk about a “carry trade.”

    Mexico’s Federal Mint Headquarters was looted yesterday during the day, with armed thieves making off with invaluable items, including gold coins, from a vault, according to Reuters and the South Wales Guardian. The incident happened at a “Casa de Moneda” branch located in Mexico City, which as we reported last week has succumbed to the deadliest violence on record

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    City Public Security Secretary Jesus Orta Martinez was quoted on Mexican news as saying that that three armed men disarmed security guards at the offices and, in a scene right out of the movie Heat, “went straight to the vault, which was open.”

    “The line of investigation…is that there were deficiencies in the security protocol,” he continued.

     “It is striking that they went directly to the vault, and that they easily removed, or stole, coins… and commemorative watches.”

    The armed robbers were described  as “clean cut, young looking men” and are said to have stolen gold coins, watches and other valuables. One robber reportedly filled a backpack with 1,567 gold coins, each of which are valued at about $1,610, according to Mexican bank Banorte. This would put a price of at least $2.5 million on the robbery. Local Mexican media is reporting that the stolen items were worth up to 50 million pesos, or about $2 million U.S.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But regardless if the take was $2 million or $2.5 million, it’s been a successful “carry trade” for the robbers in more ways than one. Gold futures skyrocketed again on Wednesday, up about 2.2% to $1516 near the U.S. equity market cash close while spot continued its three day, $70 run, finally breaking the $1500 mark. 

    Mexico first printed 50 peso gold coins in 1921 to commemorate 100 years of independence. They’re now bought and sold by investors as their value changes with the price of gold. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Coincidentally, the same “Casa de Moneda” branch was broken into last year while the building was under renovation. The robbery marks the latest in an increasing string of crime in Mexico City, where record lawlessness has hit the city. Since the new leftist government took charge of Mexico City in 2018, critics have claimed that violence has “spun out of control.”

    We also reported just weeks ago that Mexico City’s new government alleged that the city had been under-reporting crime statistics. 

    A Mexican media report of the robbery, including security footage, can be seen here:

  • The Mainstream Media Wants The Mifsud Story To Just Go Away

    Authored by Brian Cates via The Epoch Times,

    While many mainstream media journalists have been spinning fantasies for more than two years, based on Russian collusion stories being handed to them by anonymous sources, crack reporter John Solomon of The Hill has been pursuing real leads and uncovering actual evidence.

    Now, Solomon is reporting that an audiotape containing professor Joseph Mifsud’s deposition has been given to both U.S. Attorney John Durham’s investigators and to the Senate Judiciary Committee.

    “I can report absolutely that the Durham investigators have now obtained an audiotape deposition of Joseph Mifsud, where he describes his work, why he targeted George Papadopoulos, who directed him to do that, what directions he was given, and why he set that entire process of introducing Papadopoulos to Russia in motion in March of 2016, which is really the flashpoint the starting point of this whole Russia collusion narrative,” Solomon told Fox News’ Sean Hannity.

    “I can also confirm that the Senate Judiciary Committee has also obtained the same deposition,” he said.

    Mifsud, who I have written about extensively in previous columns, is the key that turns the lock to the lid of this Pandora’s box that we refer to as “Spygate.”

    So I’m wondering why Solomon appears to be the only mainstream reporter pursuing this Mifsud story.

    I suspect it’s because many DNC Media outlets, after having fallen deeply and passionately in love with the Trump-Russia collusion hoax, are reluctant to call attention to something that would be the final nail in its coffin.

    The last thing the mainstream media wants right now would be for Mifsud to go on the record with both Durham’s investigative team and with Congress to say he was working for the FBI and was only pretending to be a Russian agent.

    If Mifsud was an FBI asset sent to entrap Papadopoulos, then there are no real Russian agents anywhere in this entire Trump-Russia collusion story.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Foreign policy advisor to US President Donald Trump’s election campaign, George Papadopoulos goes through security at the US District Court for his sentencing in Washington, DC on Sept. 7, 2018. (Andrew Caballero-Reynolds/AFP/Getty Images)

    Ponder what that means for a minute.

    You can’t save the Russian collusion narrative, if you can’t find any real Russians anywhere in the story. The FBI under James Comey will then be seen as having engaged in an operation to entrap people, and “Russian agents” turn out to be fakes working for the FBI and who were making fake offers of Russian help to the Trump campaign.

    Some of these news media outlets are still – at this late date – claiming there’s some life left in the Russian collusion narrative. Mifsud is literally the last dying hope for these people that somewhere in all of this there is a real Russian asset and real collusion. They literally need Mifsud to be a real asset of the Putin government. And if Mifsud goes on the record to officially affirm he was working for the FBI, then the media’s last dying hope is gone forever.

    To hear the mainstream media tell it, Mifsud turning out to be a fake Russian agent working for the FBI is a “conspiracy theory” created by “right-wing zealots” such as Reps. Devin Nunes (R-Calif.) and Jim Jordan (R-Ohio).

    To have to admit that the story was actually right, while they themselves were still peddling the Trump-Russia collusion hoax, would be a most bitter pill for many of these ‘legitimate’ news outlets to swallow.

    Which likely explains why Solomon appears to be just about the only mainstream reporter pursuing the Mifsud story. If there are any other major news outlet reporters out there avidly pursuing the facts about Mifsud and his reported contacts and testimony to Justice Department investigators, they’re being pretty quiet about it.

    What are the mainstream news reporters who are ignoring the Mifsud story telling themselves, anyway?

    “I can’t pursue this new information on Mifsud, because it’s taking the story where I don’t want it to go!”?

    That’s a thought process that happens only to a political activist disguised as a reporter. No real reporter would ever think that way.

    And yet when it comes to recent developments about Mifsud, a key player in this Trump-Russia collusion narrative, many mainstream reporters appear indifferent at best, or outrightly hostile at worst to these latest developments.

    While many of these mainstream media reporters have been desperately trying to find some way to save the Trump/Russian collusion narrative, the last thing they want to have to report is that the supposed key Russian agent that started this whole Spygate thing wasn’t really a Russian agent, but was instead an FBI asset pretending to be a Russian agent.

    These selfsame media reporters have spent more than two years mocking the idea that Mifsud is an FBI asset as something straight out of the right-wing fever swamp of convoluted nonsense conspiracy theories. This is why so many political activists masquerading as journalists are desperately hoping that somehow the Mifsud story will just go away and die on its own.

    My instinct says they’re going to be massively disappointed soon.

  • Trump's Blockade Begins: Venezuela Says Food Shipment Blocked In Panama Canal

    Venezuela’s Vice President Delcy Rodriguez has denounced what state media is describing as a ship seizure by the US in the Panama Canal Wednesday.

    The ship is reportedly packed with 25 thousands tons of Soya and was entering the narrow vital central America waterway, when its progress was halted in an event which Maduro government officials have condemned as a “serious aggression” that impedes the country’s “right to food”. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Panama Canal. Image source: Shutterstock

    Though in the initial hours of Wednesday’s allegation major international media outlets had yet to confirm the claim, Rodriguez tweeted a statement, saying, “Venezuela denounces before the world that a boat that holds 25 thousand tons of Soya, for food production in our country, has been seized in the Panama Canal, due to the criminal blockade imposed by Donald Trump.”

    “Venezuela calls on the UN to stop this serious aggression by DonaldTrump’s govt against our country, which constitutes a massive violation of the human rights of the entire Venezuelan people, by attempting to impede their right to food,” the vice president added.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    State media subsequently explained that the undisclosed owner of the vessel was informed by the insurance company that it must cease moving the cargo through the canal.

    The serious allegation comes after on Monday President Trump signed an executive order imposing a full economic embargo against Venezuela after a week ago the White House began signaling the US would seek to “quarantine” and fully “blockade” the Maduro regime if the socialist leader doesn’t immediately hand over power of his own accord. 

    The executive order freezes all government assets in the United States and prohibits all transactions by any Venezuelan officials, in what constitutes the first major expansion of sanctions targeting a nation in the western hemisphere in over three decades. 

    John Bolton had denounced Maduro as leading a “rogue state” on par with Cuba, Syria, Iran and North Korea following Trump’s signing the order.

    “The Maduro regime now joins that exclusive club of rogue states,” Bolton said at a one-day conference in Peru of more than 50 governments aligned against Maduro. — AP

    “We are sending a signal to third parties that want to do business with the Maduro regime: Proceed with extreme caution,” Bolton said on Tuesday in Peru. “There is no need to risk your business interests with the United States for the purposes of profiting from a corrupt and dying regime.”

    The executive order states, “All property and interests in property of the Government of Venezuela that are in the United States … are blocked and may not be transferred, paid, exported, withdrawn, or otherwise dealt in.”

    Given the new sanctions by US Treasury fall short of a full trade embargo, the US is not outright targeting urgent supplies like food, thus it’s not clear whether the alleged halting of the Soya transporting ship is the result of direct US action.

    However, it’s likely that maritime insurance companies and private shipping firms will become increasingly skittish in dealing with Venezuela. 

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 7th August 2019

  • Where Inflation Is Highest And Lowest Around The World

    High inflation rates can hurt any country’s economy and point to underlying problems in economic policy. Currently, Iran, Turkey and Nigeria are three countries where high inflation rates are putting a strain on citizens and businesses, with effects ranging from exorbitant food prices, rising rents and falling sales on non-necessary items.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But, as Statista’s Katharina Buchholz notes, very low inflation, as Singapore, Ireland and Japan are experiencing at the moment, has its own set of problems. While low inflation will encourage consumers to make purchases, it can lead to less earnings for companies and decreased hiring and it also means people don’t get the benefit of paying off their debt quicker with the help of a little inflation. Ultimately, low inflation can lead prices into a downwards spiral, causing deflation and a deterioration of prices equally bad as an inflation crisis.

    According to data complied by the World Bank, countries currently in price deflation around the world were Ecuador (-0.2 percent), the Maldives (-0.1 percent), Rwanda (-0.3 percent) and Burundi (-2.8 percent).

    Infographic: Where Inflation is Highest and Lowest Around the World | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    On the other hand, inflation in Venezuela has recently gone to extreme levels, causing a so-called hyperinflation which is inflation spiraling out of control at a 50 percent increase (and often much more) per month. Venezuelan inflation for 2018 was literally off the charts at approximately 1 million percent, according to the International Monetary Fund.

  • Russia, Turkey, Iran: Adversaries Of The West's NATO Alliance

    Authored by Con Coughlin via The Gatestone Institute,

    Germany’s point-blank refusal to support Washington’s proposal for a maritime protection force in the Arabian Gulf to protect shipping from attacks by Iran is yet another example of Berlin’s diplomatic and economic sabotage of the Western alliance.

    Following the recent upsurge in Iranian aggression in the all-important Strait of Hormuz, the Gulf shipping artery through which flows one-fifth of the world’s energy needs, Washington has sought international backing for Operation Sentinel, its naval operation to protect shipping in the region.

    This search follows a series of Iranian attacks, including the shooting down of a US Navy drone operating in international waters in the Strait of Hormuz, as well as a number of attacks against merchant shipping, such as last month’s seizure of the British-registered oil tanker Stena Impero.

    But while Washington has responded to Iran’s deliberate escalation of tensions in the region by deploying an aircraft carrier battle group, as well as troops, missiles, and fighter aircraft, its appeal to other nations to support its effort have received a muted response.

    In particular, Washington would like to see Britain, France and Germany — the three European signatories to the 2015 nuclear deal with Tehran — provide tangible support for the mission.

    From Washington’s perspective, the fact that Europe is far more reliant on the Gulf for its energy supplies than is the US, whose energy imports from the region today are negligible, it seems only fair that Europe, as well as other beneficiaries such as Japan, pay their fair share towards ensuring no further Iranian disruption of Gulf shipping takes place.

    To date, though, only Britain has deployed warships to the Gulf — a frigate and a destroyer — while France is considering its options.

    Germany, however, the country that enjoys Europe’s largest economy and is therefore more than capable of contributing to the American initiative, has bluntly rejected a State Department request to support the mission.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pictured: U.S. President Donald Trump and German Chancellor Angela Merkel at a press conference on April 27, 2018 in Washington, DC. (Photo by Mark Wilson/Getty Images)

    In an attempt to shame the Germans into joining the operation, Washington’s request was made public through the US Embassy in Berlin earlier this week.

    “We’ve formally asked Germany to join France and the UK to help secure the Straits of Hormuz and combat Iranian aggression,” an embassy spokeswoman announced.

    “Members of the German government have been clear that freedom of navigation should be protected… Our question is, protected by whom?”

    The US ploy, though, has fallen on deaf ears in Berlin, where there is considerable opposition within German Chancellor Angela Merkel’s ruling coalition to becoming involved for fear that it might exacerbate tensions with Iran. Germany, like the rest of Europe, is still wedded to the naive notion that the Iranian nuclear deal can be saved, irrespective of the Trump administration’s decision last year to withdraw from the agreement.

    Olaf Scholz, the German vice-chancellor, who is deputising for Mrs Merkel while she is on vacation, responded by confirming that his country would not take part in a US-led naval taskforce; he warned about the danger of the world “sleepwalking into a much larger conflict”.

    Germany’s outright rejection of Washington’s request is likely to inflame tensions further between Washington and Berlin. U.S. President Donald J. Trump is already at odds with German Chancellor Angela Merkel on a range of issues, from Germany’s obstinate refusal to meet its Nato funding commitments to its pursuit of closer energy ties with Russia through the construction of the controversial Nord Stream 2 gas pipeline.

    Mr Trump is highly critical of the project. He argues that it will make Europe, and especially Germany, too dependent on Moscow for its energy needs, which could undermine the resolve of the Nato alliance to take a robust stand against Moscow in any future confrontation.

    Moreover, Germany’s refusal to support the Western alliance in combating Iranian aggression in the Gulf comes at a time when Nato is facing another major dilemma over the future participation of Turkey as a member.

    This follows the decision by Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdogan to press ahead with the purchase of Russian S-400 anti-aircraft missile systems in the face of strong opposition from Washington, which has responded by cancelling Ankara’s continued involvement in the F-35 stealth fighter programme.

    So, at a time when the Western alliance is already struggling with how to respond to Turkey’s deepening military ties with Russia, Germany’s refusal to fulfil its obligations to protect shipping in the Gulf will be interpreted by adversaries of the West such as Moscow and Tehran as yet further evidence of what would doubtless please them very much: deepening divisions within the Western alliance.

  • India's Auto Market Crashes: 200,000 Job Losses In 3 Months, One Million At Risk

    A downturn in the Indian automobile industry has led dealerships to cut at least 200,000 jobs in the last three months amid an unprecedented sales decline, reported India Today.

    The Federation of Automobile Dealers Associations (FADA) warned that the automobile downturn would continue to cycle down through 2H19, leading to more job losses with dealerships and across the entire industry.

    “The majority of job cuts have happened in the last three months…It started around May and continued through June and July,” FADA President Ashish Harsharaj Kale told Press Trust of India.

    Kale said, “Right now most of the cuts which have happened are in front-end sales jobs, but if this (slowdown) continues, then even the technical jobs will be affected because if we are selling less then we will also service less, so it is a cycle.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    When asked about job losses, he said, “Close to about two lakh [200,000].”

    “It is a guesstimate that our members have already cut 7-8% of the jobs in most of the dealerships as the degrowth has been very high,” he added.

    Around 2.5 million Indians were employed directly through 26,000 automobile showrooms operated by 15,000 dealers. Dealerships indirectly employ another 2.5 million, he added.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The 200,000 job cuts in the last three months exceeded the 32,000 layoffs when 286 dealerships closed across the country in the 18 months ended April this year, he said. Job losses in the auto industry point to an Indian economy that is quickly deteriorating through summer.

    Figures from the Society of Indian Automobile Manufacturers (SIAM) show vehicle wholesales plunged by 12.35% to 6,085,406 units in April-June versus 6,942,742 units in the same period last year.

    Automakers such as Maruti Suzuki Ltd, Tata Motors Ltd, Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd (M&M), Ashok Leyland Ltd and Honda Motorcycle & Scooter India Ltd have closed manufacturing facilities in the last month as demand for vehicles comes to a screeching halt.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    July figures show passenger car sales crashed by 29%, making it the worst month for the automobile industry in two decades.

    Automakers aren’t alone. Auto part makers in India such as Exide Industries, Continental Automotive Components (India), ZF, Brose India Automotive Systems, Schaeffler India, Brembo Brakes India, Kalyani Maxion Wheels, Varroc Group, Eaton, IAC India have adjusted production to slowing conditions or closed facilities to avoid a dangerous inventory build-up.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Last month, Bosch Ltd, the largest parts maker in India, published a memo that outlined how it suspended operations at its Gangaikondan plant in Tamil Nadu for a week in late July to “avoid unnecessary build-up of inventory.” 

    Ram Venkataramani, President, Automotive Component Manufacturers Association of India (ACMA), said the 15% to 20% cut in auto production had triggered an auto crisis in India, could lead to at least one million people being laid off.

    The current slowdown in the India economy is cyclical and isn’t expected to turn back up for the next several years. Industrials have been the first domino to fall, and next will be Indian consumers.

  • We're All Enemies Of The State: Draconian Laws, Precrime & The Surveillance State

    Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “The whole aim of practical politics is to keep the populace alarmed (and hence clamorous to be led to safety) by an endless series of hobgoblins, most of them imaginary.” – H.L. Mencken

    We’ve been down this road many times before.

    If the government is consistent about any one thing, it is this: it has an unnerving tendency to exploit crises and use them as opportunities for power grabs under the guise of national security.

    As David C. Unger, a foreign affairs editorial writer for the New York Times, explains, “Life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness have given way to permanent crisis management: to policing the planet and fighting preventative wars of ideological containment, usually on terrain chosen by, and favorable to, our enemies. Limited government and constitutional accountability have been shouldered aside by the kind of imperial presidency our constitutional system was explicitly designed to prevent.”

    Cue the Emergency State, the government’s Machiavellian version of crisis management that justifies all manner of government tyranny in the so-called name of national security.

    Terrorist attacks, mass shootings, “unforeseen economic collapse, loss of functioning political and legal order, purposeful domestic resistance or insurgency, pervasive public health emergencies, and catastrophic natural and human disasters”: the government has been anticipating and preparing for such crises for years now.

    It’s all part of the grand plan for total control.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The government’s proposed response to the latest round of mass shootings—red flag gun laws, precrime surveillance, fusion centers, threat assessments, mental health assessments, involuntary confinement—is just more of the same.

    These tactics have been employed before, here in the U.S. and elsewhere, by other totalitarian regimes, with devastating results.

    It’s a simple enough formula: first, you create fear, then you capitalize on it by seizing power.

    For instance, in his remarks on the mass shootings in Texas and Ohio, President Trump promised to give the FBI “whatever they need” to investigate and disrupt hate crimes and domestic terrorism.

    Let that sink in a moment.

    In a post-9/11 America, Trump’s promise bodes ill for whatever remnants of freedom we have left. With that promise, flippantly delivered without any apparent thought for the Constitution’s prohibitions on such overreach, the president has given the FBI the green light to violate Americans’ civil liberties in every which way.

    This is how the Emergency State works, after all.

    Although the damage wrought by these power grabs has been most evident in recent presidential administrations—under Trump, Obama, Bush and Clinton—the seeds of this present madness were sown, according to Unger, in 1940, when President Roosevelt, the “founding father of modern extraconstitutional presidential war-making, the military-industrial complex, and covert federal surveillance of lawful domestic political activity,” declared a national emergency.

    So what does the government’s carefully calibrated response to this current crisis mean for freedom as we know it? Compliance and control.

    For starters, consider Trump’s embrace of red flag gun laws, which allow the police to remove guns from people “suspected” of being threats, will only add to the government’s power.

    As The Washington Post reports, these laws “allow a family member, roommate, beau, law enforcement officer or any type of medical professional to file a petition [with a court] asking that a person’s home be temporarily cleared of firearms. It doesn’t require a mental-health diagnosis or an arrest.

    Be warned: these laws, growing in popularity as a legislative means by which to seize guns from individuals viewed as a danger to themselves or others, are yet another Trojan Horse, a stealth maneuver by the police state to gain greater power over an unsuspecting and largely gullible populace.

    Seventeen states, plus the District of Columbia, now have red flag laws on their books. That number is growing.

    In the midst of what feels like an epidemic of mass shootings, these gun confiscation laws—extreme risk protection order (ERPO) laws—may appease the fears of those who believe that fewer guns in the hands of the general populace will make our society safer.

    Of course, it doesn’t always work that way.

    Anything—knives, vehicles, planes, pressure cookers—can become a weapon when wielded with deadly intentions.

    With these red flag gun laws, the intention is to disarm individuals who are potential threats.

    We need to stop dangerous people before they act”: that’s the rationale behind the NRA’s support of these red flag laws, and at first glance, it appears to be perfectly reasonable to want to disarm individuals who are clearly suicidal and/or pose an “immediate danger” to themselves or others.

    However, consider what happened in Maryland after a police officer attempted to “enforce” the state’s new red flag law, which went into effect in Oct. 2018.

    At 5 am on a Monday, two police officers showed up at 61-year-old Gary Willis’ house to serve him with a court order requiring that he surrender his guns. Willis answered the door holding a gun. (In some states, merely answering the door holding a gun is enough to get you killed by police who have a tendency to shoot first and ask questions later.) Willis initially set his gun aside while he spoke with the police. However, when the police attempted to serve him with the gun confiscation order, Willis reportedly became “irate” and picked up his gun again. At that point, a struggle ensued, causing the gun to go off. Although no one was harmed by the struggle, one of the cops shot and killed Willis.

    According to the Anne Arundel County police chief, the shooting was a sign that the red flag law is needed. What the police can’t say with any certainty is what they prevented by shooting and killing Willis.

    Therein lies the danger of these red flag laws, specifically, and pre-crime laws such as these generally, especially when you put the power to determine who is a potential danger in the hands of government agencies, the courts and the police.

    After all, this is the same government that uses the words “anti-government,” “extremist” and “terrorist” interchangeably.

    This is the same government that, in 2009, issued a series of Department of Homeland Security reports on Rightwing and Leftwing “Extremism,” which broadly define extremists as individuals, military veterans and groups “that are mainly antigovernment, rejecting federal authority in favor of state or local authority, or rejecting government authority entirely.”

    This is the same government that, as first reported by the Wall Street Journal, tracks military veterans returning from Iraq and Afghanistan and characterizes them as extremists and potential domestic terrorist threats because they may be “disgruntled, disillusioned or suffering from the psychological effects of war.”

    This is the same government that keeps re-upping the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA), which allows the military to detain and imprison American citizens with no access to friends, family or the courts if the government believes them to be a threat.

    This is the same government that has a growing list—shared with fusion centers and law enforcement agencies—of ideologies, behaviors, affiliations and other characteristics that could flag someone as suspicious and result in their being labeled potential enemies of the state.

    For instance, if you believe in and exercise your rights under the Constitution (namely, your right to speak freely, worship freely, associate with like-minded individuals who share your political views, criticize the government, own a weapon, demand a warrant before being questioned or searched, or any other activity viewed as potentially anti-government, racist, bigoted, anarchic or sovereign), you could be at the top of the government’s terrorism watch list.

    Moreover, as a New York Times editorial warns, you may be an anti-government extremist (a.k.a. domestic terrorist) in the eyes of the police if you are afraid that the government is plotting to confiscate your firearms, if you believe the economy is about to collapse and the government will soon declare martial law, or if you display an unusual number of political and/or ideological bumper stickers on your car.

    According to the FBI’s latest report, you might also be classified as a domestic terrorism threat if you espouse conspiracy theories, especially if you “attempt to explain events or circumstances as the result of a group of actors working in secret to benefit themselves at the expense of others” and are “usually at odds with official or prevailing explanations of events.”

    Additionally, according to Michael C. McGarrity, the FBI’s assistant director of the counterterrorism division, the bureau now “classifies domestic terrorism threats into four main categories: racially motivated violent extremism, anti-government/anti-authority extremism, animal rights/environmental extremism, and abortion extremism.”

    In other words, if you dare to subscribe to any views that are contrary to the government’s, you may well be suspected of being a domestic terrorist and treated accordingly.

    Where many Americans go wrong is in assuming that you have to be doing something illegal or challenging the government’s authority in order to be flagged as a suspicious character, labeled an enemy of the state and locked up like a dangerous criminal.

    That is not the case.

    All you really need to do is question government authority.

    With the help of artificial intelligence, a growing arsenal of high-tech software, hardware and techniques, government propaganda urging Americans to turn into spies and snitches, as well as social media and behavior sensing software, government agents are spinning a sticky spider-web of threat assessments, behavioral sensing warnings, flagged “words,” and “suspicious” activity reports aimed at snaring potentialenemies of the state.

    It’s the American police state’s take on the dystopian terrors foreshadowed by George Orwell, Aldous Huxley and Phillip K. Dick all rolled up into one oppressive pre-crime and pre-thought crime package.

    What’s more, the technocrats who run the surveillance state don’t even have to break a sweat while monitoring what you say, what you read, what you write, where you go, how much you spend, whom you support, and with whom you communicate. Computers guided by artificial intelligence now do the tedious work of trolling social media, the internet, text messages and phone calls for potentially anti-government remarks—all of which is carefully recorded, documented, and stored to be used against you someday at a time and place of the government’s choosing.

    This is the world that science fiction author Philip K. Dick envisioned for Minority Report in which the government is all-seeing, all-knowing and all-powerful, and if you dare to step out of line, dark-clad police SWAT teams will crack a few skulls in order to bring the populace under control.

    In Dick’s dystopian police state, the police combine widespread surveillance, behavior prediction technologies, data mining and precognitive technology to capture would-be criminals before they can do any damage: precrime.

    In the film Minority Report, the technology that John Anderton, Chief of the Department of Pre-Crime in Washington, DC, relies on for his predictive policing proves to be fallible, identifying him as the next would-be criminal and targeting him for preemptive measures. Consequently, Anderton finds himself not only attempting to prove his innocence but forced to take drastic measures in order to avoid capture in a surveillance state that uses biometric data and sophisticated computer networks to track its citizens.

    With every passing day, the American police state moves that much closer to mirroring the fictional pre-crime prevention world of Minority Report.

    For instance, police in major American cities have been using predictive policing technology that allows them to identify individuals—or groups of individuals—most likely to commit a crime in a given community. Those individuals are then put on notice that their movements and activities will be closely monitored and any criminal activity (by them or their associates) will result in harsh penalties. 

    In other words, the burden of proof is reversed: you are guilty before you are given any chance to prove you are innocent.

    Dig beneath the surface of this kind of surveillance/police state, however, and you will find that the real purpose of pre-crime is not safety but control.

    Red flag gun laws merely push us that much closer towards a suspect society where everyone is potentially guilty of some crime or another and must be preemptively rendered harmless.

    Again, where many Americans go wrong is in naively assuming that you have to be doing something illegal or harmful in order to be flagged and targeted for some form of intervention or detention.

    In fact, U.S. police agencies have been working to identify and manage potential extremist “threats,” violent or otherwise, before they can become actual threats for some time now.

    In much the same way that the USA Patriot Act was used as a front to advance the surveillance state, allowing the government to establish a far-reaching domestic spying program that turned every American citizen into a criminal suspect, the government’s anti-extremism program renders otherwise lawful, nonviolent activities as potentially extremist.

    In fact, all you need to do these days to end up on a government watch list or be subjected to heightened scrutiny is use certain trigger words (like cloud, pork and pirates), surf the internet, communicate using a cell phone, limp or stutterdrive a car, stay at a hotel, attend a political rally, express yourself on social mediaappear mentally ill, serve in the militarydisagree with a law enforcement officialcall in sick to work, purchase materials at a hardware store, take flying or boating lessons, appear suspicious, appear confused or nervous, fidget or whistle or smell bad, be seen in public waving a toy gun or anything remotely resembling a gun (such as a water nozzle or a remote control or a walking cane), stare at a police officer, question government authority, or appear to be pro-gun or pro-freedom.

    Be warned: once you get on such a government watch list—whether it’s a terrorist watch list, a mental health watch list, a dissident watch list, or a red flag gun watch list—there’s no clear-cut way to get off, whether or not you should actually be on there.

    You will be tracked wherever you go.

    You will be flagged as a potential threat and dealt with accordingly.

    This is pre-crime on an ideological scale and it’s been a long time coming.

    The government has been building its pre-crime, surveillance network in concert with fusion centers (of which there are 78 nationwide, with partners in the corporate sector and globally), data collection agencies, behavioral scientists, corporations, social media, and community organizers and by relying on cutting-edge technology for surveillance, facial recognition, predictive policing, biometrics, and behavioral epigenetics (in which life experiences alter one’s genetic makeup).

    If you’re not scared yet, you should be.

    Connect the dots.

    Start with the powers amassed by the government under the USA Patriot Act, note the government’s ever-broadening definition of what it considers to be an “extremist,” then add in the government’s detention powers under NDAA, the National Security Agency’s far-reaching surveillance networks, and fusion centers that collect and share surveillance data between local, state and federal police agencies.

    To that, add tens of thousands of armed, surveillance drones and balloons that are beginning to blanket American skies, facial recognition technology that will identify and track you wherever you go and whatever you do. And then to complete the picture, toss in the real-time crime centers being deployed in cities across the country, which will be attempting to “predict” crimes and identify so-called criminals before they happen based on widespread surveillance, complex mathematical algorithms and prognostication programs.

    Hopefully you’re starting to understand how easy we’ve made it for the government to identify, label, target, defuse and detain anyone it views as a potential threat for a variety of reasons that run the gamut from mental illness to having a military background to challenging its authority to just being on the government’s list of persona non grata.

    There’s always a price to pay for standing up to the powers-that-be.

    Yet as I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, you don’t even have to be a dissident to get flagged by the government for surveillance, censorship and detention.

    All you really need to be is a citizen of the American police state.

  • Beijing Threatens 'Reverse Sanctions' If Huawei Excluded From Indian 5G Network

    Just as relations between India and China were beginning to improve, New Delhi has found itself caught in the middle of Washington and Beijing’s war over the future of 5G, according to a recent Reuters report.

    Like many countries, India is just beginning the bidding process to find a provider to build out its 5G infrastructure. But thanks to rumors that New Delhi might shut Chinese telecoms giant Huawei out of the bidding process due to Washington’s insistence that Huawei could present a threat to national security – making India vulnerable to espionage directed by China’s Ministry of State Security – China’s Foreign Ministry recently summoned Vikram Misri, India’s ambassador to Beijing, to express its “concerns” about Washington’s campaign to block Huawei equipment from being used in 5G networks around the world.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    During the meeting, Chinese officials said they could impose “reverse sanctions” on Indian firms operating on the mainland if India doesn’t allow Huawei to participate in the bidding process, according to a readout of the conversation shared with Reuters.

    Neither the Indian foreign ministry nor the Chinese foreign ministry responded to Reuters’ requests for comment.

    Indian companies have a far smaller presence in China than in other major economies. But still, Indian companies including Infosys, TCS, Dr Reddy’s Laboratories Reliance Industries and Mahindra & Mahindra operate in the manufacturing, healthcare, technology and financial services space on the mainland.

    Now, the row over Huawei threatens to escalate and sour relations between the world’s two most populous countries just as they were getting over their territorial disputes over Arunachal Pradesh.

    India is expected to hold trials for installing its next-generation 5G cellular network in the next few months. But it has not yet decided whether it will invite the Chinese telecoms giant to participate, telecoms minister Ravi Shankar Prasad has said.

    Prasad recently told parliament that six proposals have been received for 5G technology trials, including from Huawei. He didn’t name the other companies, but there are only a handful of companies in the world who have the capabilities that would allow them to participate, including Finland’s Nokia, Sweden’s Ericcson and South Korea’s Samsung.

    And although India’s intelligence service has been looking for evidence that Huawei could use its equipment as an embedded spy network, so far, it has found no evidence of this.

    Sources from within India’s government told Reuters that one solution might be using different providers for hardware and software.

    Since winning re-election, Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi has felt the brunt of the Trump Administration’s protectionist bent: Like Turkey, it recently lost its special status granted by the Department of Commerce, which raised tariffs on Indian-made goods entering the US. And thanks to Modi’s flirtations with Russia (it recently agreed to buy the Russia S-400 missile defense system, which could open it up to US sanctions under CAATSA), it’s already in hot water with Washington.

    President Xi is presently planning a visit to India in October that was intended as a sign of the improving relations between the two countries. If the dispute over Huawei continues to escalate, he could cancel. If that happens, the dispute over Huawei will officially have gone international.

  • You Can 'Major' In Social Justice At This Nearly $70,000/Year California College

    Authored by Adam Sabes via Campus Reform,

    Dominican University in California has added a new major, wholly focused on social justice that will begin accepting students in the fall.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The school created the major after a “growing number” of students became interested in social justice careers, according to a university news release. Dominican will be combining courses from its minors entitled “Performing Arts and Social Change” and “Community Action and Social Change” for the major.

    Students who major in social justice will have the chance to “examine the links between well-being, social justice, and diverse worldviews.”

    Additionally, students will “analyze social injustices and work toward positive social change.”

    The major starts off with a class titled “Theory and Practice for Community Action and Social Change,” which “provides foundational frameworks for analyzing oppression, power, and privilege.”

    Other courses that students can take range from “Prophets, Psalms, & Social Justice” to “Liberation Theologies.”

    Dominican University suggests that possible careers for those studying social justice include “Journalist/Photographer/Filmmaker,“ ”Community Organizer,” “Educator,” “Political Campaign Staffer,” and even a “Socially Engaged Artist.”

    The new major is being funded in part by a $30,000 grant from the Wabash Center for Teaching and Learning in Religion.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A spokesperson from the California Federation of College Republicans commented on the major to Campus Reform.

    “While we feel this program is for psuedo-educational purposes and pushes a certain political agenda, students will be spending $67,385 each academic year ($269,540 after four years) on a bachelor’s degree in social justice,” the spokesperson said.

    “The United States is on the precipice of our $1.5 trillion student loan debt bubble bursting; therefore, it is clearly not wise for students to take out nearly $300,000 in student loans just to study social justice.

    The $67,385 per year cost cited by the CFCR spokesperson includes tuition, room and board, books, and other fees. 

    Dominican University is not the first school to push social justice initiatives, as Campus Reform has reported. 

    Hamline University in Minnesota has a social justice major boasting classes like “gender politics” and “sexuality, gender identity, and the law.” Tuition for the 2019-2020 academic year at that school is $41,734.

    The University of Michigan took the issue further and opened up an entire “social justice-themed” high school where UMich grad students will have the opportunity to teach.

  • Pentagon's Next Dystopian Surveillance Exercise Will Launch Spy Balloons Over These States

    The Guardian reported Friday that the US military is conducting a surveillance exercise across six midwest states using surveillance radars attached to high-altitude balloons.

    Sierra Nevada Corporation, an aerospace and defense company, filed for a Special Temporary Authorization (through July 12 to Sept. 01) with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) to fly 25 solar-powered spy balloons, will be launched from South Dakota and will drift 250 miles through an area covering Minnesota, Iowa, Wisconsin, and Missouri, before landing in central Illinois.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Defense Department’s Southern Command (Southcom) approved the exercise in mid-July, which is being supervised by Sierra Nevada.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The spy balloons will travel with wind currents, expected to reach altitudes of up to 65,000 feet, will “provide a persistent surveillance system to locate and deter narcotics trafficking and homeland security threats,” the FCC filing said.

    The balloons are carrying next-generation radars, designed for the modern battlefield to track vehicles day or night, through any weather.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Arthur Holland Michel, the co-director of the Center for the Study of the Drone at Bard College in New York, told The Guardian, “What this new technology proposes is to watch everything at once. Sometimes it’s referred to as ‘combat TiVo’ because when an event happens somewhere in the surveilled area, you can potentially rewind the tape to see exactly what occurred, and rewind even further to see who was involved and where they came from.”

    Southcom, which is responsible for security and intelligence operations in the Caribbean and Central and South America, could roll out these spy balloons across the Mexico-US border to identify and intercept drug shipments headed for the US.

    Civil liberties advocates were shocked at what they read in the FCC filing:

    “The deployment of this kind of surveillance capability in the United States is incredibly alarming,” Mana Azarmi, policy counsel for the Center for Democracy and Technology, told Common Dreams.

    “Persistent government surveillance, such as that facilitated by this technology, raises many civil liberties concerns and should not be permitted in the absence of a warrant.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Advance technology programs like the Pentagon’s balloon exercise “pose a grave threat to basic human rights, freedom of expression, and civil liberties,” Fight for the Future Deputy Director Evan Greer told Common Dreams. “These programs are not about stopping the violence; they’re about social control.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The government is testing wide-area surveillance systems, intended for war zones, on Americans is a massive privacy violation, the ACLU said.

    “Even in tests, they’re still collecting a lot of data on Americans: who’s driving to the union house, the church, the mosque, the Alzheimer’s clinic,” Jay Stanley, senior policy analyst for the organization, told The Guardian. “We should not go down the road of allowing this to be used in the United States and it’s disturbing to hear that these tests are being carried out, by the military no less.”

    Greer told Common Dreams that the spy balloons is the latest example of new surveillance infrastructure that the government is creating, with the help from defense and technology companies.

    “From police partnerships with Amazon’s Ring doorbells to these privately contracted spying balloons,” Greer said, “a dystopian surveillance state is being built in plain sight, by government agencies with authoritarian dreams and corporations willing to trample our rights to turn a profit.”

    About four years ago, has since been discontinued, Baltimore was one of the first major cities in the US to have spy blimps flying overhead with surveillance equipment.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    If the upcoming tests with Sierra Nevada and Southcom go well, these spy balloons could enter series production in the near term and be ready for deployment on the Mexico-US border and in warzones across the world. However, as shown in Baltimore, these balloons could also be surveilling major US cities in the early 2020s. 

  • Forget Iran, Maximum Pressure Has Shifted To China

    Authored by Tom Luongo,

    In the past week the pressure on China by the U.S. has escalated daily. Since the trade delegation came back from China with lunch barely digested the Trump Administration has gone into over drive on demonizing China here at home.

    From finally declaring China a currency manipulator after years of threats on Monday the latest is now a planted story in Axios that Vice-President Mike Pence bringing forth a list of Chinese officials to sanction for Human Rights violations under the Global Magnitsky Act.

    This is based on a lie, of course. A lie helped along by Bob Fu, the head of ChinaAid, an NGO working, nominally, to alleviate the horrors of the Chinese government. Or, at least, that’s what you’re supposed to believe.

    Vice President Mike Pence has signaled that the Trump administration is open to using the Global Magnitsky Act to sanction top officials in Xinjiang, China, where more than 1 million Uighur Muslims are being held in internment camps, according to a Chinese religious freedom advocate who met with Pence at the White House Monday.

    Notice how Axios still states this as fact, that the Chinese are running 1 million people in concentration camps, even though the story was quickly debunked as the rogue statement by U.N. committee member, Gay MacDougall, who claimed this 1 million number was real.

    It’s not true, because if it was someone credible would have confirmed it. But it’s a lie that has been breathlessly repeated for the past year to create the illusion of reality so that now Pence can pile on to further inflame the ‘China is evil’ story to hapless Trump supporters giddy at their chosen savior’s tough stance on China.

    That tough stance on China in economic areas will require even more farm subsidies as China now refuses to buy our soybeans, corn and other agricultural products as a result of Trump’s asinine trade war.

    Because Trump cares about farmers. Yeah, right. Trump cares about getting re-elected.

    But it is in Hong Kong where things are really dangerous from a geopolitical perspective.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China has had to respond to the riots in Hong Kong with a firm hand and is being backed into a dangerous situation to quell the unrest. The stink of outside influence is very strong.

    And it very well could turn into a military intervention in Hong Kong, which will be denounced by the U.S. and the U.K. as a violation of the “1 country, 2 systems” agreement the British left in place until 2047.

    See the pattern? This human rights abuse stuff is 1 part truth and 2 parts fiction. It’s an operation on multiple fronts to demonize China.

    It’s became clear that to me a long time ago that even if Trump wanted to de-escalate tensions with China he has neither the temperament nor the control of his own administration to do so.

    His response to the Fed’s shallow rate cut and policy statement was childish. Forcing down equity prices and creating chaos in the currency markets is not the work of a ‘stable genius.’ Then blaming China for what was a predictable market reaction to what he did was moronic.

    If you raise tariffs and retard trade, the exchange rate between the two countries has to adjust. Period.

    To then pile on three days later with the nonsensical and mostly symbolic designation of China as a currency manipulator is just sad.

    And now this report about sanctions to stoke up more China hatred among Americans of all political persuasions, while honestly bad actors, both within his administration and abroad, are stoking up chaos. And this upcoming speech by Pence that Axios is talking about is a dead giveaway that they are not done yet.

    The more I think about it the more Monday was some form of geopolitical coup attempt. The multiple annoyances coming from the Trump administration are one thing. But doing so at the same time the Indian government took the dramatic step to reorganize Kashmir/Jammu using the pretext of recent terrorism and the ongoing riots in Hong Kong to foment a color revolution there is irresponsible.

    And that has the fingerprints of someone else.

    Look around and you’ll see the level of chaos is rising rapidly but it all has one through-line. The post-WWII established order is, bluntly, freaking out about their inability to control the narratives and maintain control.

    My working thesis at this point, and this is conjecture based on my intuitions, not journalism, is that the through-line here revolves around what can best be termed the British Deep State.

    British oligarchy has deep roots in India, Israel, Hong Kong, Saudi Arabia and the U.S. intelligence and diplomatic corps. It has deep animosity towards Russia, China and Iran, far deeper than the U.S. does.

    This is policy that goes back more than one hundred and fifty years. The City of London is the primary domestic obstacle to Brexit.

    Hong Kong is a key cog in the West’s ability to control China’s growth, so destabilizing it now makes sense. The Hong Kong dollar is pegged tightly to the U.S. dollar and the arbitrage trade between offshore and onshore yuan is the source of a lot of ‘tail wagging the dog’ in financial markets.

    It makes even more sense if China’s new extradition law was aimed at bankers and prop traders guilty of currency manipulation of the offshore Yuan trade than it is about ‘human rights abuses.’

    The key to color revolutions is that there is a nugget of animosity towards the government being protested. But someone is always ashamed of the government they live under, as any decent man should (to quote H.L. Mencken). But that nugget is then stoked into something ugly the minute there is a catalyst by outside actors for political and economic gains.

    The extradition law is perfect for that.

    And it seems to me that this ratcheting up of tensions world wide began the moment President Trump refused to go to war with Iran over shooting down that Global Hawk drone in June.

    Because that war was handed to Trump on a silver platter. And he was supposed to react to it just like he reacted to past British intelligence operations in Syria; with bombs and sanctions.

    Iran was in some way simply a stalking horse for the real target, China.

    Why are we still talking about the Skripals when their story has been debunked completely? The Brits. Why are we still dealing with the aftermath of RussiaGate, an operation that began within British intelligence and coordinated with multiple U.S. departments and NGOs on behalf of Hillary Clinton to oust Donald Trump from power?

    You know the answer to that.

    And that feeds into what Matthew Ehret was saying the other day at Strategic Culture Foundation about what Trump’s role is in all of this. Ehret’s thesis is that the ‘special relationship’ between the U.S. and the U.K. is faltering, and good riddance.

    I’m not sure I agree with that but I do agree that Trump is a wild card here.

    It is Trump, in his blundering manner, that is making that happen because he isn’t, for all of his myriad faults, a “British asset.”

    According to Ehret:

    He [Trump] has reversed a regime change program active since 9/11. He has fought to put America into a cooperative position with Russia. He has undone decades of WTO/City of London free trade. He has called for rebuilding productive industries following through by reviving the protective tariff. To top it off, he has been at war with the British-directed deep state for over three years and survived. Now that [John] Bolton has been outed as an ally of Sir Darroch, there is an open acknowledgement that Trump is gearing up to replace the neocon traitor as we speak.

    One can only hope that he’s right about this. Since Trump’s refusal to go to war in June, he has stepped up his attacks on China in ways that tell me Bolton isn’t done just yet and that Trump may not be fully under their control, but he’s also not anywhere close to a free actor.

    For now we have to realize that what is happening here is beyond left or right, it’s beyond patriotism. And we should remain extremely vigilant about who are and who are not our friends. Because if you look at events closely you’ll see that those definitions you’ve been spoon-fed are dubious at best.

    *  *  *

    Join my Patreon and Install Brave if you want help breaking free of the control systems all around you.

  • Air Force Set To Deploy Drone Killing Laser Weapon On Military Dune Buggies

    Raytheon published a company press release last week that detailed how it “will deploy two prototype high energy laser weapon systems” to the Air Force for a 12-month in-field operation against enemy drones.

    The $23 million contract for two of Raytheon’s High Energy Laser Weapons Systems (HELWS) will be used by the Air Force in an unknown warzone overseas, most likely Syria for about one year.

    “What we really want to do is figure out how we can deploy these systems in an environment where our warfighters work and train every day,” said Evan Hunt, director of high energy laser and counter-UAS at Raytheon.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The HELWS uses directed energy weapon technology to take down drones instantly. The laser weapon is connected to Raytheon’s Multi-spectral Targeting System, for the most precise and cheapest cost per kill ratio of any system on the modern battlefield.

    Both HELWS systems have been mounted onto Polaris MRZR all-terrain vehicles, which are diesel-powered and can endure almost any kind of terrain, will allow fast-moving special forces to defend against enemy quadcopters during covert operations.

    “Every day, there’s another story about a rogue drone incident,” Stefan Baur, vice president of Raytheon Electronic Warfare Systems, told The Washington Post.

    “These threats aren’t going away, and in many instances, shooting them with a high energy laser weapon system is the most effective and safest way to bring them down.”

    The 10-kilowatt lasers allow special forces to combat drones without wasting ammunition, experts have said this is one of the best ways in eliminating remotely operated quadcopter drones operated by ISIS that are generally used for reconnaissance missions, but in some cases, are used as suicide drones against Western forces.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    HELWS will also be effective against armed-drone swarms that have become a popular tactic by ISIS in the last five years.

    “The fact that it’s a laser weapon allows you to put energy in target at the speed of light. It can be an instantaneous heating event,” said Michael Jirjis, who leads the Air Force’s directed energy experimentation projects, told The Post.

    Jirjis said the test will be the first “operational field assessment” of HELWS.

    He said this is the first Air Force deployment “for an operational field assessment of lasers for counter UAS and the first time we have the entire AF Enterprise intimately engaged across the acquisition community, test centers, operators, and headquarters.”

    The Air Force’s modernization effort to combat small drones used by ISIS is due to recent aerial attacks by quadcopters on American forces.

    “Our ground forces have not come under attack from enemy aircraft since the Korean War 65 years ago,” the Air Force said in a 2018 video presentation at an event hosted by the Mitchell Institute for Aerospace Studies.

    These small quadcopters are one of the most significant threats to US troops operating in the Middle East.

    ISIS didn’t possess quadcopter technology ten years ago, as this is a rapidly evolving threat that has to be countered or could severely hinder American operations on modern battlefields across the Middle East and Africa.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 6th August 2019

  • China Threatens France For Giving Political Asylum To Wife Of Jailed Ex-Interpol Chief

    Chinese officials have threatened to cease all police cooperation with France for giving political asylum to the wife of ex-Interpol chief Meng Hongwei, according to AFP

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There hasn’t been any official request to suspend the cooperation but an informal expression of intent,” said an AFP source, confirming a weekend report by French daily Le Monde that the security attache in France’s Beijing embassy has been informed of the impending decision. 

    Tensions between Paris and Beijing have been fraught since the September 2018 disappearance of Interpol president Meng Hongwei, shortly after he left for China from the international police agency’s headquarters in Lyon, southeast France.

    After several days with no word on his whereabouts, China disclosed that he had been arrested, and in June a court in northern China revealed that Meng had pleaded guilty to bribery.

    His wife Grace and their two children, who have remained in France, were given police protection after she expressed concerns about kidnapping attempts, and later applied for asylum, a request that was granted in May. –AFP

    A Chinese foreign ministry spokesman denounced the asylum as an “abuse of French legal procedures,” while the French Interior Minister declined to comment. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In June, the Chinese court said that Meng – a former vice minister of public security – pleaded guilty to accepting $2.1 million in bribes between 2005 and 2017. 

    Critics of Meng’s arrest, however, have suggested that the ex-Interpol chief was caught up in an anti-graft campaign in which they have accused President Xi Jinping of trying to remove his political enemies. 

    A few weeks after his disappearance, Interpol was forced to accept Meng’s resignation as its first Chinese president.

    His wife, Grace, sued the agency last month, saying it had failed to protect her family and was “complicit in the internationally wrongful acts of its member country China.” Interpol has rejected the allegations. –AFP

    Last year while Meng’s whereabouts were unknown, Grace made an emotional appeal – telling journalists in October she had not heard from her husband since September 25 when he sent her a WhatsApp emoji with a knife. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

  • The Latest UN Horror Show: Christian Refugees Ignored

    Authored by Uzay Bulut via The Gatestone Institute,

    • Jordan is supposed to be their transit country; they are seeking resettlement to other countries via the Office of the United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR) and the Australian Special Humanitarian Program.

    • The registration with the UNHCR gives them the protective status of refugee as they await resettlement. Yet, the process of resettlement takes at minimum several months and sometimes even years due to the growing refugee backlog….. “The majority of those stuck in limbo have been waiting more than two years—some since the rise of ISIS in 2014,” according to the report.

    • Since January, the process has become even slower and more difficult. The UNHCR has not even granted newcomers refugee status since. They just give them an appointment date, then they cancel the date and give them a new one. So we all keep waiting.” — Lorance Yousuf Kazqeea, a Christian originally from Baghdad, has been an asylum seeker in Jordan with his wife and two children since September 2017; to Gatestone Institute.

    • “You can contact the local UNHCR office in your country and demand answers – why Iraqi Christians have been waiting for resettlement for years and why the West continuously rejects them.” — Juliana Taimoorazy, founding president of the Iraqi Christian Relief Council, which has been active in Jordan since 2015; to Gatestone Institute.

    Since the 2014 invasion and genocide by the Islamic State (ISIS) in Iraq, at least 16,000 Assyrian Christians from Iraq have become refugees in Jordan. Most are still suffering economically and psychologically there, under extremely difficult circumstances.

    These Assyrian Christians are in Jordan on a temporary basis with plans to emigrate to a third country. However, as they have not been given official work permits by the Jordanian government, they largely rely on their savings, remittances sent by relatives abroad or aid from charity organizations and churches. Jordan is supposed to be their transit country; they are seeking resettlement in other countries via the Office of the United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR) and the Australian Special Humanitarian Program.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pictured: The Za’atari refugee camp in Jordan. (Photo by Jeff J Mitchell/Getty Images)

    The indigenous people of Iraq, the Assyrians, have been severely persecuted for decades. According to a 2017 report by the Assyrian Confederation of Europe:

    “Assyrians represent one of the most consistently targeted communities in Iraq throughout its modern history. This has included the state-sanctioned massacre at Simele in 1933; Saddam Hussein’s Anfal campaign, which included the targeting of Assyrians villages; ruthless campaigns of terror to which Christians were subjected after the U.S. invasion in 2003; and finally, the recent tragic chapter authored by the Islamic State (IS) jihadist organization.”

    Hence, Assyrian Christians have been forced to leave their ancestral homeland and seek asylum elsewhere including Jordan. After arriving in Jordan, they register with the UNHCR Registration Center in Amman and receive a special registration card.

    The registration with the UNHCR gives them the protective status of refugee as they await resettlement. Yet, the process of resettlement takes at minimum several months and sometimes even years, due to the growing refugee backlog. Assyrians live as urban refugees, meaning they face many challenges and lack access to many humanitarian services because they live largely in isolation.

    On June 20, the Assyrian Policy Institute (API) published a report entitled, “Lives on Hold: Assyrian Refugees in Jordan,” in which the authors conducted interviews with many Assyrian Christian refugees in Jordan. The root causes for the emigration of Assyrians from Iraq since 2014, according to the report, include “the lasting instability and devastation, lack of trust in various security actors, lack of livelihood opportunities, loss of property, fears of demographic change, and fears of future violence targeting Assyrians.”

    “Assyrian refugees have endured many traumatic experiences due to their exposure to war, ethno-religious persecution, political oppression, forced displacement, and genocide. According to the Refugee Health Technical Assistance Center, refugee trauma often precedes the primary war-related events that causes them to flee.

    “Prior to their departure from Iraq, Assyrian refugees may have experienced imprisonment, torture, forced displacement, physical assault, rape, kidnapping, religious persecution, loss of property, loss of livelihood, family separation, and extreme fear.”

    Yet, the trauma of Assyrian Christians has not ended in Jordan, where they have been forced to flee. “The majority of those stuck in limbo have been waiting more than two years—some since the rise of ISIS in 2014,” according to the report. “Their wait for resettlement is characterized by limited information, uncertainty about their futures, and a growing sense of hopelessness.”

    When asked about what factors drive them to seek resettlement in a third country, the Assyrian refugees cited the following reasons: “safety, religious freedom, respect for human rights, equal educational and economic opportunities, and family reunification”.

    Among the most serious problems Iraqi Christian refugees in Jordan face are:

    “A recent study conducted by the Government of Jordan found that nearly forty percent of urban refugees cannot afford needed medicines or access health care services. More than thirty percent of households interviewed by the API reported at least one household member suffered from a chronic disease or disability, noting that they struggled to access affordable medicine or care.

    “Access to education for Assyrian refugee children in Jordan is limited; many parents fear their children will become part of a lost generation.

    “Assyrian refugees from Iraq are unable to access the required work permit in order to be employed legally in Jordan due to the restrictive administrative process and the prohibitively expensive filing fees.

    “Assyrians are also suffering from what have been termed the ‘silent killers:’ waiting, boredom, hopelessness, and isolation. Like most displaced peoples, feelings of weariness and frustration are widespread. Life is monotonous for many Assyrian refugees, as they spend years awaiting resettlement with little to do on a daily basis. While the long wait for a visa is anticipated, there is no guarantee of resettlement.

    “Nearly half of the households that remain in Jordan reported that their applications for resettlement via the Australian Special Humanitarian Program had been rejected since the time of their initial interview with the Assyrian Policy Institute (between December 2017 and January 2018). If an application is denied, there is no opportunity for an appeal, however, applicants do have the option of reapplying.”

    Lorance Yousuf Kazqeea, a Christian originally from Baghdad, for instance, has been an asylum seeker in Jordan with his wife and two children since September 2017, and is still trying to immigrate to the United States. He told Gatestone:

    “The greatest challenge for us here is that Iraqi Christian refugees can’t work legally. I was an IT (information technology) specialist in Baghdad. Many Christians from Iraq used to have a good job or business there. But we have lost everything. How are we supposed to support our families now? We rely on aid from charity organizations, churches and family members outside of Jordan. And in special and rare cases refugees get monthly salaries from the UNHCR.

    “Christians from Iraq want to move to the West for safety and stability. But since January, the process has become even slower and more difficult. The UNHCR has not even granted newcomers refugee status since. They just give them an appointment date, then they cancel the date and give them a new one. So we all keep waiting.”

    The UNHCR was approached by Gatestone for a comment but has not replied.

    Juliana Taimoorazy, founding president of the Iraqi Christian Relief Council, which has been active in Jordan since 2015, told Gatestone:

    “Assyrian refugees in Jordan have lost everything in Iraq. One of the victims that our organization has been trying to help – a Christian mother in her 50s – used to have a hair salon in Iraq. ISIS terrorists attacked her, knifed her, destroying her abdominal area. The terrorists then set fire to her salon, home and everything else she owned. She and most of her family had to migrate to Jordan to seek asylum. They then applied for resettlement in Australia but were refused four times. However, their situation is even more tragic now. Her youngest children contracted an eye virus and are losing their eyesight gradually. Every 6 months, they have to renew the treatment and get new glasses. Her oldest daughter died recently in Iraq. Her teenage daughter, who was an excellent student in Iraq, has been unable to go to school for the last four years because she does not have the appropriate paperwork to go to school in Jordan. And because of that, she is suffering from severe depression. Around 50.000 Assyrians that have had to leave Iraq and have become refugees in Jordan, Turkey and elsewhere have similar painful stories.”

    Taimoorazy made a plea to help the Christian victims of ISIS:

    We’ve been told ISIS has been militarily defeated, but will we leave the victims of ISIS alone? The aftermath of the ISIS genocide in Iraq is more important for the world to pay attention to. The victims are still suffering.

    “The past atrocities… are unfolding before our eyes every day. Because of the refugee situation they are in, the Christian victims of ISIS have still not been liberated. For example, at least three children from one family are about to lose their eyesight because the parents are not able to provide money for their treatment. And their hope is diminishing. But we have more power than we are willing to admit. You can contact the local UNHCR office in your country and demand answers – why Iraqi Christians have been waiting for resettlement for years and why the West continuously rejects them. Western NGOs and churches can also have a local representative in Jordan. Every single individual can make a difference. The wounds of the victims of ISIS are still bleeding. Let us not stand on the sidelines.”

  • Drone Strike By Pro-Haftar Forces On Public Assembly Kills Over 40 In Libya

    Pro-Haftar forces in Libya have been accused of yet another mass atrocity, this time in an airstrike on a public building in southwestern Libya, according to new reports, following an attack on a migrant center in Tripoli July 3rd which killed 44 people and wounded some 180. Al Jazeera is reporting a new drone strike Monday killed at least 40 people who were attending a wedding ceremony in the town of Murzuq:

    Reports said forces loyal to strongman Khalifa Haftar launched the attack on Sunday in the town of Murzuq. Al Jazeera learned that the victims were attending a wedding when the attack took place.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Illustrative file photo: Reuters

    Hours later the AFP said the drone attack was carried out on a town hall meeting where over 200 people were present, but details remain unclear. 

    The air strike left “42 dead and more than 60 injured, 30 of them critically” in Qalaa neighborhood, according to eyewitness statements made  to the AFP.

    Tripoli’s GNA government immediately called for a full investigation and is connecting to downed drone to the mass casualty airstrike. Recently there’s been growing evidence that UAE and Turkish-supplied drones have been operational in the hands of Haftar forces. 

    International monitors now count nearly 1,100 killed since Haftar’s bid to take Tripoli began on April 4; however, the current chaos and proxy war still unfolding in the North African country has been largely ignored in American media.

    Since longtime Libyan strongman Muammar Gaddafi’s overthrow and field execution by UK and UK backed-rebels in 2011, which was facilitated by a US-NATO bombing campaign, the country has existed in chaos and anarchy, with up to three and sometimes four governments vying for control over the population.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The European Union last week reiterated calls for the warring sides to establish a “permanent truce” amid Haftar’s offensive. The “rogue general” is backed by the UAE, France, and more recently the US, and others. The UN has also repeatedly condemned the ongoing violence, which has lately seen reports of fast rising death tolls, including of migrants attempting to cross the Mediterranean to Europe by boat. 

    Haftar already controls well over half the geographic territory and oil resources of Libya, after his LNA forces advanced against different factions for more than the past two years, and as of the spring began deploying MiG-21 and MiG-23 fighter jets against GNA forces outside Tripoli. It appears the LNA is also frequently deploying drones. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Libyan military leader Khalifa Haftar. Image source: AFP/Getty

    Likely, as airstrikes increase in the heavily populated suburbs outside Tripoli where fighting has continued through the summer, headline grabbing mass casualty events due to air power will continue. 

  • The Declining Empire Of Chaos Is Going Nuts Over Iran

    Authored by Federico Pieraccini via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    The transition in recent years from a unipolar to a multipolar world order has created international tensions that seem to threaten to escalate into clashes between regional and global powers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In 2014 we were almost at the point of no return in Ukraine following the coup d’etat supported and funded by NATO and involving extremist right-wing Ukrainian nationalists. The conflict in the Donbass risked escalating into a conflict between NATO and the Russian Federation, every day in the summer and autumn of 2014 threatening to be doomsday. Rather than respond to the understandable impulse to send Russian troops into Ukraine to defend the population of Donbass, Putin had the presense of mind to pursue the less direct and more sensible strategy of supporting the material capacity of the residents of Donbass to resist the depredations of the Ukrainian army and their neo-Nazi Banderite thugs. Meanwhile, Europe’s inept leaders initially egged on Ukraine’s destabilization, only to get cold feet after reflecting on the possibility of having a conflict between Moscow and Washington fought on European soil.

    With the resistance in Donbass managing to successfully hold back Ukrainian assaults, the conflict began to freeze, almost to the point of a complete ceasefire, even as Ukrainian provocations continue to this day.

    Tensions were then focussed on Syria, where a mercenary army of at least 200,000 men, armed and trained by the US, UK, Israel, France, Turkey, Jordan, Saudi Arabia, Qatar and the United Arab Emirates, almost managed to completely topple the country. Russian intervention in 2015 managed to save the country with no time to spare, destroying large numbers of terrorists and reorganizing the Syrian armed forces and training and equipping them with the necessary means to beat back the jihadi waves. The Russians also ensured control of the skies through their network of Pantsir-S1, Pantsir-S2, S-300 and S-400 air-defence systems, together with their impressivejamming (Krasukha-4), command and control information management system (Strelets C4ISR System) and electronic-warfare technologies (1RL257 Krasukha-4).

    As the Americans, British, French and Israelis conducted their bombing missions in Syria, the danger of a deliberate attack on Russian positions always remained, something that would have had devastating consequences for the region and beyond. It is no secret that US military planners have repeatedly argued for a direct conflict with Moscow in a contained regional theater. (Clinton called for the downing of Russian jets over Syria, and former US officials claimed that some Russians had to “pay a little price”.)

    Since Trump became president, the rhetoric of war has soared considerably, even as the awareness remains that any new conflict would sink Trump’s chances of re-election. Despite this, Trump’s bombings in Syria were real and potentially very harmful to the Syrian state. Nevertheless, they were foiled by Russia’s electronic-warfare capability, which was able to send veering away from their intended target more than 70% of the latest-generation missiles launched by the British, French, Americans and Israelis.

    One of the most terrifying moments for the future of humanity came a few months later when Trump started hurling threats and abuses at Kim Jong-un, threatening to reduce Pyongyang to ashes. Trump, moreover, delivered his fiery threats in a speech at the United Nations General Assembly.

    Trump’s dramatic U-turn following his historic meeting with Kim Jong-un (a public relations/photo opportunity) began to paint a fairly comical and unreliable picture of US power, revealing to the world the new US president’s strategy. The president threatens to nuke a country, but only as a negotiating tactic to bring his opponent to the negotiating table and thereby clinch a deal. He then presents himself to his domestic audience as the “great” deal-maker.

    With Iran, the recent target of the US administration, the bargaining method is the same, though with decidedly different results. In the cases of Ukraine and North Korea, the two most powerful lobbies in Washington, the Israeli and Saudi lobbies, have had little to say. Of course the neocons and the arms lobbyists are always gunning for war, but these two powerful state-backed lobbies were notably silent with regard to these countries, less towards Syria obviously. As distinguished political scientist John J. Mearsheimer has repeatedly explained, the Israel and Saudi lobbies have unlimited funds for corrupting Democrats and Republicans in order to push their foreign-policy goals.

    The difference between the case of Iran and the aforementioned cases of Ukraine, Syria and North Korea is precisely the direct involvement of these two lobbies in the decision-making process underway in the US.

    These two lobbies (together with their neocon allies) have for years been pushing to have a few hundred thousand young Americans sent to Iran to sacrifice themselves for the purposes of destroying Iran and her people. Such geopolitical games are played at the cost of US taxpayers, the lives of their children sent to war, and the lives of the people of the Middle East, who have been devastated by decades of conflict.

    What readers can be assured of is that in the cases of Ukraine, Syria, North Korea and Iran, the US is unable to militarily impose its geopolitical or economic will.

    The reasons vary with each case, and I have previously explained extensively why the possibilities for conflict are unthinkable. With Ukraine, a conflict on European soil between Russia and NATO was unthinkable, bringing to mind the type of devastation that was seen during the Second World War. Good sense prevailed, and even NATO somewhat refused to fully arm the Ukrainian army with weapons that would have given them an overwhelming advantage over the Donbass militias.

    In Syria, any involvement with ground troops would have been collective suicide, given the overwhelming air power deployed in the country by Russia. Recall that since the Second World War, the US has never fought a war in an airspace that was seriously contested (in Vietnam, US air losses were only elevated because of Sino-Soviet help), allowing for ground troops to receive air cover and protectionA ground assault in Syria would have therefore been catastrophic without the requisite control of Syria’s skies.

    In North Korea, the country’s tactical and strategic nuclear and conventional deterrence discourages any missile attack. Any overland attack is out of the question, given the high number of active as well as reserve personnel in the DPRK army. If the US struggled to control a completely defeated Iraq in 2003, how much more difficult would be to deal with a country with a resilient population that is indisposed to bowing to the US? The 2003 Iraq campaign would really be a “cakewalk” in comparison. Another reason why a missile attack on North Korea is impossible is because of the conventional power that Pyongyang possesses in the form of tens of thousands of missiles and artillery pieces that could easily reduce Seoul to rubble in a matter of minutes. This would then lead to a war between the US and the DPRK being fought on the Korean Peninsula. Moon Jae-in, like Merkel and Sarkozy in the case of Ukraine, did everything in his power to prevent such a devastating conflict.

    Concerning tensions between the US and Iran and the resulting threats of war, these should be taken as bluster and bluff. America’s European allies are heavily involved in Iran and depend on the Middle East for their oil and gas imports. A US war against Iran would have devastating consequences for the world economy, with the Europeans seeing their imports halved or reduced. As Professor Chossudovsky of the strategic think tank Global Research has so ably argued, an attack on Iran is unsustainable, as the oil sectors of the UAE and Saudi Arabia would be hit and shut down. Exports would instantly end after the pipelines going West are bombed by the Houthis and the Strait of Hormuz closed. The economies of these two countries would implode and their ruling class wiped out by internal revolts. The state of Israel as well as US bases in the region would see themselves overwhelmed with missiles coming from Syria, Lebanon, the Golan Heights and Iran. The Tel Aviv government would last a few hours before capitulating under the pressure of its own citizens, who, like the Europeans, are unused to suffering war at home.

    Because a war with Iran would be difficult to de-escalate, we can conclude that the possibility of war being waged against the country is unlikely if not impossible. The level of damage the belligerents would inflict on each other would make any diplomatic resolution of the conflict difficult. While the powerful Israeli and Saudi lobbies in the US may be beating the war drums, an indication of what would happen if war followed can be seen in Yemen. Egypt and the UAE were forced to withdraw from the coalition fighting the Houthis after the UAE suffered considerable damage from legitimate retaliatory missile strikes from the Yemen’s Army Missile Forces.

    An open war against Iran continues to be a red line that the ruling financial elites in the US, Israelis and Saudis don’t want to cross, having so much at stake.

    With an election looming, Trump cannot risk triggering a new conflict and betraying one of his most important electoral promises. The Western elite does not seem to have any intention of destroying the petrodollar-based world economy with which it generates its own profits and controls global finance. And finally, US military planners do not intend to suffer a humiliating defeat in Iran that would reveal the extent to which US military power is based on propaganda built over the years through Hollywood movies and wars successfully executed against relatively defenceless countries. Even if we consider the possibility of Netanyahu and Bin Salman being mentally unstable, someone within the royal palace in Riyadh or the government in Tel Aviv would have counseled them on the political and personal consequences of an attack on Iran.

    It is telling that Washington, London, Tel Aviv and Riyadh have to resort to numerous but ultimately useless provocations against Iran, as they can only rely on hybrid attacks in order to economically isolate it from the rest of the world.

    Paradoxically, this strategy has had devastating consequences for the role of the US dollar as a reserve currency together with the SWIFT system. In today’s multipolar environment, acting in such an imperious manner leads to the acceleration of de-dollarization as a way of circumventing sanctions and bans imposed by the US.

    A reserve currency is used to facilitate transactions. If the disadvantages come to exceed the benefits, it will progressively be used less and less, until it is replaced by a basket of currencies that more closely reflect the multipolar geopolitical reality.

    The warmongers in Washington are exasperated by their continuing inability to curb the resilience and resistance of the people in Venezuela, Iran, Syria, North Korea and Donbass, countries and regions understood by the healthy part of the globe as representing the axis of resistance to US Imperialism.

  • 22% Of Millennials Say They Have No Friends

    A staggering 22% of millennials (aged 23 – 38) surveyed by YouGov say they have no friends, while less than 1/3 say they have at least 10 friends.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile 30% of Millennials say they ‘always or often feel lonely.’

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to the New York Daily News

    Even if younger Americans are overstating their isolation, the jarring numbers reflect long-term rising trends in loneliness. Studies have indicated that loneliness has myriad negative mental and physical health effects.

    “Strong social relationships support mental health, and that ties into better immune function, reduced stress and less cardiovascular activation,” Debra Umberson, a professor of sociology at the University of Texas, told Time magazine in 2015.

    Oddly, 25% of Millennials surveyed also said they don’t have any acquaintances. 

    Is social media to blame? As the Daily News points out, “a 2018 study out of the University of Pennsylvania linked usage of apps like Facebook and Instagram to social isolation. “Using less social media than you normally would leads to significant decreases in both depression and loneliness,” the study’s author, psychologist Melissa Hunt, said at the time.”

    Meanwhile, according to Vox, many 30-somethings have a hard time making new friends as they get older, as their lives become busier and friends move away. 

    More recently, in a 2016 paper, researchers in Germany found a peak of loneliness in a sample of 16,000 Germans at around age 30, another around age 50, and then increasing again at age 80.

    “We don’t quite know why this is happening,” said Maike Luhmann, a psychologist who researches loneliness at Ruhr-Universität Bochum and co-authored the paper. –Vox

    “So most of the previous research has focused on old age, and for good reason, because it’s when loneliness levels are high,” said Luhmann, who said the larger point was that “researchers have ignored that loneliness can happen at any time.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Is loneliness hazardous to your health?

    According to a 2015 meta-review of 70 studiesloneliness has been linked to higher blood pressure and heart disease – and increases risk of dying by 26%. 

    As long as we then do what we should do — reconnect with people — then loneliness is a good thing,” said Luhmann, adding “It becomes a bad thing when it becomes chronic. That’s when the health effects kick in. And it becomes harder and harder to connect with other people the longer you are in the state of loneliness.”

    Of course, who needs friends when you’ve got $12 avocado toast?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile – the next generation has problems of its own: 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

  • America Is Not Going To Be A Free And Open Society Any Longer

    Authored by Michael; Snyder via The Economic Collapse blog,

    Whenever a tragic act of violence makes national headlines, the calls to give up more of our freedoms and liberties in exchange for the promise of increased security become deafening. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But if we take another step toward becoming an authoritarian society every time something horrible happens, eventually we won’t have any of the basic liberties and freedoms that previous generations of Americans fought so hard to secure for us. 

    Unfortunately, voices like mine are becoming increasingly rare, and the American people seem to want a society that will shelter them from anything that could possibly go wrong.  Of course there has never been such a society in all of human history, and we won’t be able to create one either.  No governmental system can eliminate the problem of evil, and bad things sometimes happen to good people.  And without a doubt, the mass shootings that we witnessed over the weekend were absolutely horrific.  In less than 24 hours, 29 American lives were lost between these two mass shootings, and this has greatly shaken the entire nation

    On Sunday, Americans woke up to news of a shooting rampage in an entertainment district in Dayton, Ohio, where a man wearing body armor shot and killed nine people, including his own sister. Hours earlier, a 21-year-old with a rifle entered a Walmart in El Paso and killed 20 people.

    In a country that has become nearly numb to men with guns opening fire in schools, at concerts and in churches, the back-to-back bursts of gun violence in less than 24 hours were enough to leave the public stunned and shaken.

    Sadly, these are not isolated incidents.  As our society has become less moral, we have seen an escalation of violence all over the country.

    According to USA Today, so far in 2019 there have been more mass shootings than days in the year…

    As gunfire ripped through America in an unprecedented 24 hours, a bleak milestone in a nation pocked by gun violence was marked: There have been 251 mass shootings in 2019, according to the Gun Violence Archive.

    shooting spree early Sunday at an entertainment district in Dayton, Ohio – which left at least nine dead and more than two dozen injured – notched an even darker statistic: It occurred on the 216th day of the year, meaning there have been more mass shootings than days so far this year.

    As I have been warning for years, the thin veneer of civilization that we all take for granted is steadily disappearing.

    At one time, you could walk down the streets in most communities in America without worrying that someone would suddenly gun you down, but that is no longer a safe assumption.

    And in some areas, things are getting really, really bad.  Just check out what happened in Chicago over the weekend

    In Chicago at least three people have been killed and 37 more injured since Friday evening in shootings within city limits, including 22 people shot Sunday in less than four hours, the Chicago Sun-Times reported.

    In particular, a mass shooting that took place near a children’s playground was particularly tragic

    As The Epoch Times’ Jack Phillips reportsat least seven people were shot and wounded on Aug. 4 as they gathered near a children’s playground on Chicago’s West Side. The people gathered at 1:20 a.m. as they stood in the park on the 2900 West Roosevelt Road when a person opened fire from a black Chevy Camaro, said Chicago Police.

    So why didn’t this mass shooting get the same kind of coverage that the other mass shootings received?

    Could it be that it is because it didn’t neatly fit the agenda that the mainstream media is trying to promote?

    The city of Baltimore is another major American city where violence is completely and utterly out of control.  In fact, there is only one nation on the entire planet that has a higher homicide rate than Baltimore

    Only one country in the world has a higher per capita homicide rate than the city of Baltimore.

    According to WorldAtlas, the murder capital of the globe is Honduras — where there are 90.4 homicides per 100,000 people.

    Baltimore, with 56 homicides per 100,000 people, edges out the number two spot ahead of Venezuela, where there are 53.7 homicides per 100,000 people.

    As the violence across our country continues to escalate, the calls to restrict our 2nd Amendment rights are going to become overwhelming.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But taking away our 2nd Amendment rights is not going to solve the problem.  Instead, it will just take the guns out of the hands of law-abiding citizens.

    The truth is that the El Paso shooter picked a gun-free zone for a reason.  When they know that their targets will be sitting ducks, that just makes things even easier for the mass shooters.

    And the bad guys will always find ways to get guns.  Just look at the city of Chicago – they have some of the harshest gun laws in the entire nation, but they also lead the country in gun deaths.

    Unfortunately, logic doesn’t tend to work with those that love authoritarianism.  Whenever something happens, they want the government to do “something”, and that “something” almost always involves eroding our most basic rights.

    I wish that it wasn’t true, but this is where our country is heading.  Americans have been trained to believe that the government should take care of them from the cradle to the grave and should do all that it can to shield them from everything bad that can possibly happen in life.

    Sadly, every time such a totalitarian “utopia” has been attempted throughout human history, it has always ended very badly, and that will be the case here as well.

  • Cathay Pacific Airline Admits Spying On Passengers With Seatback TV Cams And Airport Surveillance

    Passengers on Hong-Kong-based Cathay Pacific have been warned that their movements and preferences will be recorded by the airline via seatback in-flight entertainment screens equipped with cameras, according to News.com.au

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Seatback entertainment system camera (via news.com.au)

    What’s more, the airline says the data will be stored indefinitely, or “as long as necessary.” 

    Their new policy was introduced last week, according to Forbes, which explains that images taken from CCTV on the plane as well as at airports could be held by the airline.

    The policy explains that they collect “information such as previous travel arrangements, feedback about your experiences, details of lost luggage and other claims, your use of our in-flight entertainment system and in-flight connectivity, your images captured via CCTV in our airport lounges and aircraft”. –News.com.au

    According to the report, this may allow Cathay Pacific to “build an extremely detailed database of passengers, including what they look like, what they do at the airport and what programs they watch on the plane.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Moreover, the airline says that while they will do their best to make sure the information is secure, “no data transmission over the internet … can be guaranteed to be secure from intrusion.” 

    So – ‘sorry if we get hacked’ in other words. 

    While the information could be used to personalise your experience and comply with local laws, your details could also be shared with “third party partners for marketing purposes”.

    The change in policy follows a major data breach last year where 9.4 million Cathay Pacific passengers had their data stolen.

    Data that was accessed included passport numbers and identity cards. –News.com.au

    In-flight cameras made headlines earlier this year when passengers spotted the surveillance devices on airlines such as United, Delta, American Airlines and Singapore Airlines. They have all said the cameras weren’t active, and were simply a part of the screens they bought. While some passengers began covering up the cameras, the airlines were eventually forced to do so to “reassure customers.” 

    “We will retain the personal data as long as is necessary to fulfil business needs. The information that is no longer needed is either irreversibly anonymised or securely destroyed,” said a Cathay Pacific spokesperson to Sun Online Travel, adding “In line with standard practice and to protect our customers and frontline staff, there are CCTV cameras installed in our airport lounges and on-board aircraft for security purposes. All images are handled sensitively with strict access controls. There are no CCTV cameras installed in the lavatories.”

     

  • UN Report Shows US Forces Kill More Afghan Civilians Than ISIS & Taliban…Combined

    Authored by Matt Agorist via TheFreeThoughtProject.com,

    The war in Afghanistan has reached new levels of insanity as a UN report shows US forces are killing more civilians than ISIS and Taliban combined.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For the last several decades, the US government has openly funded, supported, and armed various terrorist networks throughout the world to forward an agenda of destabilization and proxy war. It is not a secret, nor a conspiracy theory—America arms bad guys. The situation has gotten so overtly corrupt that the government admitted in May the Pentagon asked Congress for funding to reimburse terrorists for their transportation and other expenses. Seriously. But that was just the tip of the iceberg. A new report from the United Nations shows the US and its allies in Afghanistan have killed more innocent men, women, and children than the group they claim are the bad guys, the Taliban.

    The now 18-year-old quagmire in Afghanistan is raising serious questions and once again, it appears that the civilians are taking the brunt of the hit — not the ostensible enemy.

    According to a report in the NY Times:

    In the first six months of the year, the conflict killed nearly 1,400 civilians and wounded about 2,400 more. Afghan forces and their allies caused 52 percent of the civilian deaths compared with 39 percent attributable to militants — mostly the Taliban, but also the Islamic State. The figures do not total 100 percent because responsibility for some deaths could not be definitively established.

    The higher civilian death toll caused by Afghan and American forces comes from their greater reliance on airstrikes, which are particularly deadly for civilians. The United Nations said airstrikes resulted in 363 civilian deaths and 156 civilian injuries.

    “While the number of injured decreased, the number of civilians killed more than doubled in comparison to the first six months of 2018, highlighting the lethal character of this tactic,” the United Nations report said, referring to airstrikes.

    Naturally, the US military calls this report by the UN anti-American propaganda.

    “We assess and investigate all credible allegations of noncombatant casualties in this complex environment, whereas others intentionally target public areas, use civilians as human shields and attempt to hide the truth through lies and propaganda,” Colonel Sonny Leggett, a spokesman for the United States military, said.

    The line between the ostensible “good guys” and the “bad guys” has gotten so blurred that the good guys are now openly supporting the bad while simultaneously killing more innocent people than the bad ones. It’s a story straight out of The Onion, but in real life.

    While the idea of the US government paying to support terrorists or killing more civilians than terrorists may seem like a crazed notion it has become so overt in recent years that legislation was specifically introduced for the sole purpose of banning the the flow of money to terrorist organizations.

    However, given the insidious history of the American empire and its creation and fostering of terrorist regimes across the globe, it should come as no surprise that the overwhelming majority of politicians would refuse to sign on to a law that requires them to ‘Stop Arming Terrorists.’ And, in 2017, that is exactly what happened.

    The text of the bill was quite simple and contained no hidden agendas. It merely stated that it prohibits the use of federal agency funds to provide covered assistance to: (1) Al Qaeda, Jabhat Fateh al-Sham, the Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant (ISIL), or any individual or group that is affiliated with, associated with, cooperating with, or adherents to such groups; or (2) the government of any country that the Office of the Director of National Intelligence (ODNI) determines has, within the most recent 12 months, provided covered assistance to such a group or individual.

    The only thing the bill did was prohibit the US government from giving money and weapons to people who want to murder Americans and who do murder innocent men, women, and children across the globe. It is quite possibly the simplest and most rational bill ever proposed by Congress. Given its rational and humanitarian nature, one would think that representatives would have been lining up to show their support. However, one would be wrong and in the five months after it was proposed, just 13 members of Congress signed on as co-sponsors.

    Not only is the United States refusing to stop arming terrorists, but now they are becoming more violent than the terrorists they claim to fight. At what point do the American people wake up to this insanity?

    Sadly, it appears that the American people couldn’t care less about innocent men women and children being slaughtered with their tax dollars on the other side of the planet. They only seem to pay attention to the area when one of these people — whose seen their children blown to a fine red mist by a US drone strike — acts out in a retaliatory way. But instead of understanding that this is blowback caused by US foreign policy, Boobus Americanus thinks these people simply “hate our freedom.”

    Terrorism is necessary for the state. War, is the health of the state.

    Without the constant fear mongering about an enemy who ‘hates our freedom’, Americans begin questioning things. They challenge the status quo and inevitably desire more freedom. However, when they are told that boogeymen want to kill them, they become immediately complacent and blinded by their fear.

    While these boogeymen were once mostly mythical, since 9/11, they have been funded and supported by the US to the point that they now pose a very real threat to innocent people everywhere. As the horrific attacks earlier this year in Sri Lanka  illustrate, terrorists are organizing and spreading.

    Terrorists groups have been exposed inside the UK as well for having ties to the British government who allowed them to freely travel and train with ISIS-linked groups because those groups were in opposition to Muammar Gaddafi, who the West wanted to snub out.

    It’s a vicious cycle of creating terrorists, killing innocence, and stoking war. And, unless something radical happens, it shows no signs of ever reversing.

    The radical change that is necessary to shift this paradigm back to peace is for people to wake up to the reality that no matter which puppet is in the White House, the status quo remains unchanged.

    Trump is proving that he can lie to get into power and his supporters ignore it. If you doubt this fact, look at what Trump did by calling out Saudi Arabia for their role in 9/11 and their support for terror worldwide prior to getting elected. He now supports these terrorists and his constituency couldn’t care less.

    This madness has to stop. Humanity has to stop being fooled by rhetoric read from teleprompters by puppets doing the bidding of their masters. If Americans aren’t shaken out of this stupor by the idea that the US military and its allies are now killing more innocent people than the Taliban and ISIS — combined — perhaps

  • Indian Rupee Plunges Most In Six Years Amid Trade War And Kashmir Chaos 

    The Indian rupee (INR) plunged the most in six years amid turmoil in both global equity and currency markets to start the week.

    The rupee fell to 70.74 against the US dollar, could test 71.50 level in the coming weeks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What sparked the overnight currency chaos was China allowing its yuan to pass 7-per-dollar level for the first time since 2008 after President Trump last week escalated the trade war by slapping a 10% tariff on an additional $300 billion of Chinese imports.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The weakness in the rupee was also intensified by uncertainty over Kashmir, a nationwide economic slowdown, and increasing foreign capital outflows.

    Cabinet members met with Prime Minister Narendra Modi on Monday to address currency volatility and a deteriorating situation in Kashmir along the Line of Control (LoC).

    India removed the special status of Jammu and Kashmir, a move that is expected to increase the deteriorating security situation in the region, Bloomberg noted.

    Home Minister Amit Shah told parliament on Monday that Prime Minister Modi scrapped Article 370 of the constitution that granted a degree of autonomy to Kashmire to draft its laws except in communications, defense, finance, and foreign affairs.

    “The worries over the political situation in Kashmir and the yuan depreciation are weighing on the currency,” said Paresh Nayar, currency and money markets head at FirstRand Ltd. in Mumbai.

    On Monday evening, India’s Upper House passes a bill splitting Jammu and Kashmir into two different administrative states. 

    Leading up to Monday’s government order, intense fighting between India and Pakistan flared up late last week through the weekend.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pakistan Prime Minister Imran Khan on Sunday requested the international community to mediate the developing crisis as India continues to strengthen its military forces in Kashmir.

    Khan accused India on Saturday of shelling and using cluster bombs on civilians across densely populated areas on the LoC. He asked the United Nations to monitor the situation.

    Several Indian television news outlets have reported that Indian military reinforcements are arriving in the Himalayan territory amid threats of conflict with Pakistan.

    The India Times reported Saturday that Indian Armed Forces had deployed howitzer artillery pieces in response to what they say Pakistan has broken ceasefire agreements.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, an economic slowdown has plagued Prime Minister Modi’s economy, as new data from the Reserve Bank of India showed disbursed retail loans were at their lowest level in 1H19 in more than five years.

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 5th August 2019

  • In Stunning Upset, Germany's Far-Right AfD Set To Defeat Merkel's CDU In The Country's East

    In a stunning development for German politics, Germany’s anti-immigrant, nationalist party Alternative for Germany, or AfD, has taken the lead in the east of the country ahead of Chancellor Angela Merkel’s Christian Democrats (CDU), just a month before regional elections in the eastern states of Saxony and Brandenburg, an opinion poll showed on Sunday.

    The AfD is currently polling at 23%, ahead of Angela Merkel’s Christian Democratic Union, or CDU, which is at 22%, according to a poll carried out by Bild. The far-left Die Linke is in third place at 14% while the Greens are at 13% and the center-left Social Democrats (SPD) on 11%.

    The eastern states of Brandenburg and Saxony hold regional elections on Sept. 1, followed by Thuringia a month later.

    As shown in the map below, the AfD has taken a leadership position in Germany’s formerly communist, and more economically backward eastern states. The good news for Europe’s establishment is that in the west of the country, the AfD remains further back, and last polled in fourth position at 12%, with the CDU at 27%, the Greens 25% and SPD 13% in the Kantar Emnid poll of 1,419 conducted from July 25-31.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The AfD barged on the scene in 2017, when it entered Germany’s national parliament for the first time as the third largest party, helped by voter anger at Merkel’s decision to welcome asylum seekers from the Middle East and Africa.

    As Reuters notes, an inevitable defeat for the SPD in Brandenburg, where it has won all of the last six elections there since German reunification in 1990, and the CDU in Saxony would put more pressure on the coalition partners to rethink their alliance in national government, while further derailing the German political establishment.

    As Bloomberg adds, the former communist east that saw massive right-wing protests last year is now back in focus as voters in three states go to the polls this fall. In Saxony and Brandenburg, Merkel’s Christian Democrats and their junior partner, the Social Democrats, are set to lose for the first time since reunification in 1990 to the upstart AfD.

    That could not only implode her fragile coalition but upend a political landscape dominated by two parties since World War II.

    While the AfD looks set to sweep in the East, it still has a ways to go at the national level, with the poll showing the AfD up one percentage point at 14%, the SPD down a point at just 13%, the CDU steady at 26%, the Greens on 23%, the Free Democrats on 9% and the Linke on 8%.

  • River Of Radiation: Life Near The World's 3rd-Worst Nuclear Disaster

    Before Fukushima and Chernobyl, the worst-ever nuclear disaster was a massive leak from a plant in the eastern Urals. RT went to see how people live in areas affected by the fallout from the USSR’s risky rush to the nuclear bomb.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Chernobyl and Fukushima are the two names that are most likely to come to mind when one thinks about nuclear disaster, and rightfully so. People in the US will likely recall the Three Mile Island accident, while Britons may say the “Windscale fire.”

    The name “Kyshtym” will probably mean nothing to the wider public, despite it belonging to the third-worst nuclear accident in history.  An RT Russian correspondent traveled to the area to speak with locals, some of whom personally witnessed the 1957 disaster, to find out what living in such a place feels like.

    Bomb at any cost

    Kyshtym is the name of a small town in what is now Chelyabinsk Region in Russia, located in an area dotted by dozens of small lakes. A 15-minute car ride east will bring you to another town called Ozyorsk. Six decades ago, you wouldn’t find it on any publicly available map because it hosted a crucial element of the Soviet Union’s nascent nuclear weapons program, the Mayak plant.

    The Soviet leadership considered building up a stockpile of weapons-grade plutonium to be a high priority, while environmental and safety concerns came as an afterthought. Some of the less-dangerous radioactive waste from Mayak was simply dumped into the Techa River, while the more-dangerous materials were stored in massive underground tanks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Prisoner labor was used in construction of the Mayak facility in the 1940s. Archive photo from Mayak website (po-mayak.ru)

    The sealed steel containers, reinforced with meter-thick concrete outer walls, were considered strong enough to withstand pretty much anything. In September 1957 this assumption was proven wrong, when one of the tanks exploded with an estimated power of 70-100 tons of TNT. This happened due to an unrepaired cooling system, which allowed radioactive waste to build heat and partially dry up, forming a layer of explosives, an investigation later found. An accidental spark was then enough to blow off the 160-ton lid of the tank, damage nearby waste storages, and shatter every window pane within a 3km radius.

    A plume of radioactive waste was ejected high into the air. Some 90 percent of the material fell right back, contaminating the area and adding to the pollution in the Techa River, but some was atomized and traveled northeast with the wind. A 300km long, 10km wide stretch of land running through three Russian regions is what’s left by the fallout. The worst-affected part of it was designated a natural reserve a few years after the disaster.

    Cover up

    The disaster was covered up in the Soviet media, which reported that the strange lights in the night sky – actually a glow caused by ionization from radioactive waste – was a rare event related to the aurora. The locals knew something was wrong, of course, due to the evacuation of two dozen nearby villages and the large-scale decontamination work that was to be carried out over the next several years.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Clipping of a Soviet newspaper with a headline titled ‘Aurora in the Southern Urals’, explaining why the polar lights phenomenon could be seen far away in the Urals. ©Wikimedia

    “My father and many locals were mobilized for the liquidation effort,” Lyudmila Morozova, a survivor of the disaster, told RT.

     “They plowed all land half a meter deep. In the evenings, Father’s friends would come to our home to wash in the banya.”

    Later, the military came to get radiation readings in it. Afterwards, soldiers demolished the banya and took away not only the house but even the layer of soil on which it was built.

    Officially, the scale of the disaster remained a state secret until the late 1980s.

    Poisoned river

    The Techa River remains contaminated now, long after Mayak stopped dumping waste in it. The radiation is relatively low, however: standing next to it is no worse than traveling on an airplane. Thousands of people cross it every day via a bridge road that connects Chelyabinsk and Ekaterinburg – the two nearest provincial capitals.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A bridge road over the Techa River connecting Chelyabinsk and Ekaterinburg. ©Aleksandr Fyodorov / RT

    The only inhabited village down the river is called Brodokalmak and is about 85km downstream from Ozyorsk, and 50km away from the bridge crossing. Locals are well aware of the river’s waste-dumping past, but it doesn’t stop them from fishing.

    “I’m not catching the fish for myself, it’s for the pet,” said Aleksey Morozov, who told RT that he spent his entire life in the village.

    “We didn’t have any two-headed kittens so far. The toxins accumulate in the bones, so all you need to do is dispose of fish bones,” he explained.

    A dosimeter that RT crew brought for the trip shows he is right. His catch is only slightly more radioactive than regular background radiation. The readings under the bridge were 35 times higher. The radioactive isotope, strontium, tends to accumulate in bones, just as Aleksey said. It has mostly gone into sediment on the bottom of the river, and is relatively safe if undisturbed.

    Ghost village

    Halfway between the bridge and Brodokalmak is another village, Muslyumovo. It was inhabited until about a decade ago, when Rostatom, the Russian nuclear monopoly, offered to relocate its 2,500 residents. Now it’s a ghost village.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Walls of an abandoned mill in Muslyumovo. ©Aleksandr Fyodorov / RT

    Unlike Chernobyl’s Pripyat, Muslyumovo was left orderly over time. Most of the valuables, including entire wooden houses, were taken by owners, but brick walls were left behind. Floors are littered with discarded papers from some business owner’s inventory.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Discarded papers in Muslyumovo. ©Aleksandr Fyodorov / RT

    Rostatom officials say the relocation was not really necessary and the company agreed to fund it mostly to quell down public fears. The sentiment against nuclear power is understandably strong in the general area. This was part of the reason that the company decided not to complete a nuclear power station, which was supposed to be built 10km east of Ozyorsk.

    Triple exposure

    Another place that had a close brush with Mayak’s waste is Metlino, a town about 25 minutes east from Ozyorsk. Some residents were unfortunate enough to have been exposed to radiation three times in their lives, according to Lyudmila Krestinina, who heads a lab at a local radiation research medical center.

    First, they lived on the Techa River when it was used to dump waste. Then the disaster happened, and the cloud went past, close enough for some fallout but not close enough for it to become a major risk. The third time happened in 1967.

    “There was drought and the Karachay bog, where waste was dumped from the Mayak, caught fire. The wind brought radioactive smoke over Metlino,” she said.

     “Now the contamination level has decreased several times, but it’s still higher than background radiation.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Mayak vehicles carry earth to cover the contaminated Karachay dump in November 2011. ©Sputnik / Aleksandr Kondratyuk

    The bog used to be a lake in the early days of Mayak, which started to dry up in the 1960s. The 1967 incident prompted major landscaping work to cover its shallow parts with earth and provide greater water supply. This solution was ultimately deemed unfeasible, so the rest of the lake was covered as well. The work ended just four years ago.

    Less carcinogenic than smoking

    Metlino’s past exposures don’t dissuade Rosatom’s own specialists from living there. The company is currently developing a new project for its senior staff working at Mayak in the town.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Drone view of Metlino. ©Aleksandr Fyodorov / RT

    The health impact form the Kyshtym disaster is difficult to put in numbers. Some 80,000 people were potentially affected by the fallout and the wider Mayak activities had been monitored for years. Krestinina, the radiation center specialist, estimates that those exposed were about 2.5 percent more likely to develop some form of cancer, compared to people who didn’t have such an experience.

    Andrey Vazhenin, chief oncologist of Chelyabinsk Region, said that today living in the regional capital, a major industry center, is actually more dangerous than on the Techa riverside.

    “Radiation is not the worst carcinogenic factor. Smoking and alcohol pose a significantly higher risk,” he told RT.

  • Russia To Test Next-Generation Stealth Bomber Next Month 

    As Cold War 2.0 looms between Russia and the US, Moscow upped the ante last week with the announcement of a new next-generation stealth strategic bomber.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    TASS News reports the Tupolev PAK DA bomber is being developed for Russia’s Aerospace Force will undergo trials at the Flight Test and Development Center in the city of Zhukovsky outside Moscow next month.

    “There are big plans ahead for testing and further developing the heavily upgraded Tu-22M3M, Tu-160 and Tu-95MS aircraft along with large-scale work for testing the prospective complex of long-range aviation [PAK DA],” Tupolev CEO Alexander Konyukhov said during a meeting at the 70th anniversary of the Zhukovsky Test Flight and Development Center.

    Head of the Defense and Security Committee in the upper house of Russia’s parliament Viktor Bondarev said the PAK DA stealth bomber is expected to replace Tu-22M3, Tu-95MS, and Tu-160 bombers.

    Procurement of the new planes to Russia’s Aerospace Force is expected to start in 2025 through 2030. There is no word on if the bombers will carry hypersonic weapons.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russia’s announcement of a new stealth bomber comes as new reports from Western media indicate the US Air Force’s next-generation stealth bomber could be operational in the mid-2020s and could fly as early as 2021.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Computed generated images of the Tupolev PAK DA recently surfaced on YouTube account Military Update, shows several minutes of the aircraft’s design.

    There are limited details on the test next month at Zhukovsky. Government and Tupolev officials didn’t say if an actual airframe is being tested. Carefully worded statements from the company say the development work is nearing completion and deliveries are expected by 2025.

    An earlier announcement said flight tests were expected in 2019.

    Konyukhov also the Zhukovsky flight center will be used for development on the medium-haul military transport plane, and also a supersonic passenger jet “jointly with the leading sectoral research institutes and enterprises.”

    On Saturday, we reported that the Sukhoi Aircraft Company, part of Russia’s United Aircraft Corporation, has started series production of Su-57 fifth-generation fighter jets and will soon be delivering these planes to the country’s Aerospace Force.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Deputy Prime Minister Yuri Borisov, told TASS last week that production of the stealth jets has started, with expected production ramps through the 2020s.

    “A state contract was signed at the Army 2019 international arms exhibition between the Defense Ministry of Russia and the Sukhoi Company for the delivery of a batch of Su-57 fifth-generation fighter jets. The Sukhoi has started to fulfill its contractual obligations,” the vice-premier’s office reported.

    The state contract requests the delivery of 76 Su-57s to Russia’s Aerospace Force by 2028.

    Russia’s procurement plans of stealth bombers and current acquisitions of stealth fighter jets reflect the military’s modernization effort.

    Russia, along with China, is in great power competition with the US. In securing its domestic and foreign interests, Moscow has moved swiftly to overhaul its military capabilities by replacing out-of-date Soviet-era weapons with next-generation weapons. Low oil spot prices and economic sanctions from Washington, however, are impeding President Putin’s task of bringing new weapon systems online on quick notice.

  • Could The US Be Gearing Up For A Return To The Gold Standard?

    Authored by Alex Deluce via GoldTelegraph.com,

    There may be readers who weren’t even born when the U.S. still had a gold-backed dollar. Since the gold standard was abolished in 1971, the value of the dollar has decreased annually by 3.96 percent. You would need over $600 today to purchase the same goods you purchased for $100 in 1973. Still, a dollar is a dollar, right? No, it is not. It is just a piece of paper.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Is there a chance the U.S. could return to the gold standard and provide real value to the U.S. currency? Judy Shelton and Christopher Waller are President Trump’s pick for Federal Reserve governors. As it happens, Ms. Shelton is a believer in the gold standard and a critic of current Federal Reserve policies. She believes that the Fed has become unnecessarily involved in trade policies instead of adhering to its function of regulating the monetary system. Returning to the gold standard is not a popular idea these days when economists support the limitless printing for currency, high debt, and inflation. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ms. Shelton would have been considered mainstream 35 years ago. Today, she is thought of as unorthodox. In 2018, she wrote in an article published by the conservative thinktank, Cato Institute,

    If the appeal of cryptocurrencies is their capacity to provide a common currency, and to maintain a uniform value for every issued unit, we need only consult historical experience to ascertain that these same qualities were achieved through the classical international gold standard.”  

    She also authored a book, Fixing the Dollar Now. In it, she advocates for linking the dollar to a benchmark of value, preferably gold. More than four decades ago, the currency of all major countries, such a Britain, Japan, France, Russia, and others were linked to gold. In 1933, the dollar was linked to $35 worth of gold. In 2019, the value of the dollar is less than one-thirtieth of that. 

    The gold standard helped the U.S. prosper for 180 years. The signers of the U.S. Constitution included this requirement in Article 10.

    No State shall enter into any Treaty, Alliance, or Confederation; grant Letters of Marque and Reprisal; coin Money; emit Bills of Credit; make any Thing but gold and silver Coin a Tender in Payment of Debts; pass any Bill of Attainder, ex post facto Law, or Law impairing the Obligation of Contracts, or grant any Title of Nobility.

    Almost two hundred years later, such a concept is deemed unorthodox. Ideologies change, and not always for the better. 

    The reason the Founding Fathers included a monetary policy in the Constitution is that they wanted money to be as far away as possible from any human intervention. This was achieved by linking the dollar to gold. Gold is a stable commodity, and thus ensures a stable U.S. currency.

    Countries today link their currency to some other, stronger currency, such as the dollar or the euro. This means that these countries have no control over their own currency and are at the mercy of an arbitrary link. But as the dollar and euro weaken, so do the currencies that have linked themselves to it. This serves as a disruption of all global economies.

    “Stable money” provides us with logical economic guidelines. Market forces become the determining factor of what is produced and where capital is spent. For example, if the price of oil becomes too high, the consumer will reduce oil consumption while companies will either increase their production of oil or seek other sources. When market forces rule, everyone benefits. 

    Market forces have largely been replaced by government interference and manipulation. The cost of a loaf of bread is what the government says it will be. (See Venezuela for an extreme example.) To manipulate prices, the government, or the Fed, needs to manipulate the value of the dollar. The loaf of bread purchased a year ago for $2.00 now costs $2.50. Same bread, manipulated price. When market forces rule, the price of a loaf of bread would be determined by consumer choice. Under central banking rules, the price would be manipulated by some artificial whim.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One of the easiest ways to manipulate money is through easy credit. Print unlimited currency with no intrinsic value and you create a mountain of debt. This will inevitably lead to inflation and higher prices. If the dollar were once again linked to gold, only a certain amount of money, backed by gold, could be printed. Debt, inflation and higher prices would almost immediately go into a tailspin. Money cannot be manipulated under the gold standard. Perhaps that is why so many economists fear to return to such a standard.

    Judy Shelton will be duly criticized for her opinions. Stable money is a new concept for a new generation of bankers and economists. But gold has been around for thousands of years and will undoubtedly outlast these new thinkers.

  • With Hong Kong Crippled By Mass Stirke, Lam Says She Won't Resign, Condemns Protesters For Creating "Very Dangerous Situation"

    While the world is transfixed by the fireworks unleashed by the plunge in China’s yen to a record low, the real geopolitical hotspot for China remains Hong Kong, and there things are getting progressively uglier following Monday morning’s press conference by Karrie Lam who once again said she will not resign, and warned that “some people” have put Hong Kong in a very dangerous situation as protesters’ actions challenge the “one country, two systems” model and threaten prosperity by seeking to ruin the city by calling for “revolution” or the “liberation of Hong Kong.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In a press conference in which Lam was flanked by eight top officials, including chief secretary, chiefs of finance, commerce, transport, security, health and civil service as well as home affairs undersecretary, she said she is taking responsibility by staying on to serve, arguing that resignations by her or others won’t help (several million protesters would beg to differ). Her solution: “Upholding the rule of law is the way out”, by which she means the people conceding to Beijing’s demands.

    “Such extensive disruptions in the name of certain demands or uncooperative movement have seriously undermined Hong Kong’s law and order, pushing our city, the city we all love and many of us helped to build, to the verge of a very dangerous situation,” Carrie Lam says.

    “The government will be resolute in maintaining law and order of Hong Kong and restoring confidence” she said, adding that “we all love Hong Kong and have made various contributions to its stability and prosperity … it’s time to say no to chaos and violence.”

    The only problem is that the only ones who are eager to say “no to chaos and violence” are various Triad-linked thugs, and of course, the Chinese People’s Liberation Army, which according to report is massing on the Hong Kong border, just waiting for the green light to, well, “liberate.”

    Additionally, Lam said that protests have already deviated from the original demand, Lam said. She didn’t say much on calls for an independent inquiry into police action and recent events. The General Chamber of Commerce has joined protesters in calling for an inquiry.

    In a surprising reversal from prior periods when China would sternly ignore the events in Hong Kong, today even the People’s Daily tweeted account has been following every twist in the much anticipated Lam presser, quoting her verbatim as mainland China’s attention is now squarely focused on how Beijing will quell the Hong Kong rebellion.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, financial Secretary Paul Chan warned Hong Kong risks a recession on protests and outside factors like trade.

    He may be on to something: on Monday, a paralysing citywide strike as part of the escalating anti-government protests forced Hong Kong airport authorities to cancel some 230 flights on Monday morning. Air traffic controllers have called in sick en masse, echoing the actions of an estimated 500,000 Hongkongers from more than 20 business sectors.

    The number of flights that can take off, or land, has been affected as a result, and authorities said only one of the two runways would be in operation from midday on Monday until 6am on Tuesday. Only 34 flights would be permitted per hour during that, instead of up to the 68 per hour that normally take off from the city’s international airport, according to SCMP, with flights across Asia bearing the brunt of the cancellations.

    Trains and planes are also being disrupted, with multiple subway lines suspended or delayed and hundreds of flights canceled. 

    Finally, as Bloomberg notes, Hong Kong Police will start holding daily press briefings from today and there will be a cross-departmental briefing by the government.

    Of course, after weeks of protests and with today’s crippling strike, the last thing Hong Kong stock investors needed was for the yuan to break 7 per dollar on Monday, however that’s what they got, and between the trade and now currency war, and the ongoing tensions in Hong Kong, as well as the paralyzing strike, the pace of equity losses accelerated ahead of the midday break, with the MSCI Hong Kong Index tumbling 3.3% and the bottom is not yet in sight.

    But all that pales in comparison to the USD-pegged HG dollar, which in sympathy with the offshore yuan has tumbled, sliding as much as 0.11% to 7.8354 Monday, its lowest since June 12. Will it plunge further and validate Kyle Bass’s thesis of massive capital outflows and a banking sector crisis, it remains to be seen.

     

  • Russian Assets In America: A Field Guide

    While the media likes to make a fuss about shady ‘Russian hackers’ and ‘Russian bots’ subverting democracy, did you know that America is actually full of Russian assets plying their trade openly? RT exposes the worst of the worst…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If the mainstream media is to be believed, the Kremlin’s network of hackers and bots could give the Illuminati a run for its money. When its operatives aren’t electing British prime ministers, embarrassing American politicians on debate night and flogging dildos to undermine democracy, they’re overseeing a team of assets earning their borscht openly in the United States.

    Thankfully, the intrepid detectives in the American press have named and shamed these double agents. We’ve compiled a list here.

    Mitch McConnell, alias: Moscow Mitch McTreason

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An Internet meme of Senate Majority Leader Mitch McConnell that has been widely shared online.

    Cleverly posing as a Republican Senator from Kentucky since 1985, Mitch McConnell was outed as a Russian asset by the Washington Post last week when he shot down a trio of bills that would have supposedly beefed up American election security from foreign interference. 

    Never mind that McConnell opposed the bills based almost entirely on partisan disagreements with the Democrats, the Post exclaimed “Mitch McConnell is a Russian asset,” and MSNBC’s Joe Scarborough dubbed the southern Republican “Moscow Mitch.” 

    With his nefarious plan exposed, #MoscowMitchMcTreason had no choice but to shrug, and continue about his day.

    Asset Rank: 3/10, far too easily exposed

    *  *  *

    Lindsey Graham, alias: Leningrad Lindsey

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An Internet meme shows US Senator Lindsey Graham photoshopped into an image of the Russian honor guard. © Twitter / @HotPockets4All / Matt Johnson

    #LeningradLindsey began trending after the South Carolina lawmaker helped push a controversial asylum bill through the Senate Judiciary Committee on Thursday. Though the bill had nothing to do with Russia, the nickname stuck.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Cleverly, Leningrad Lindsey has spent his career on Capitol Hill posing as a Russia-baiter. Graham has repeatedly called for Russia to “pay a price” for allegedly meddling in the 2016 presidential election, and co-sponsored an anti-Russia “sanctions bill from hell.” With a record like that, nobody would suspect that he was secretly a Russian asset all along.

    Note too that Leningrad does not exist any more. Perhaps Graham’s treachery dates back to the communist era? Either that or Letnerechenskiy Lindsey didn’t have the same ring to it.

    Asset rating: 10/10, excellent cover

    *  *  *

    Donald Trump

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    FILE PHOTO: Donald Trump and Vladimir Putin meet in Helsinki © Reuters / Leonhard Foeger

    There is absolutely zero need to spell out the case against President Donald Trump. He’s clearly a Russian asset, and has been since Soviet times. He rigged the 2016 election, paid Russian hackers to give Hillary Clinton’s emails to WikiLeaks, had Russian dressing on his salad that one time, and remains in constant telepathic contact with Vladimir Putin.

    However, were it not for the brave detective work of CNN, MSNBC, Buzzfeed, Hollywood actresses and late night comedians, Trump might just have gotten away with it. The collusion was so well hidden that not even an FBI probe and a two-year-long investigation by Special Counsel Robert Mueller could find a trace of it.

    Asset rating: Yuge, the biggest

    *  *  *

    Hamburgers, aka: Stalin’s Sandwiches

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A McDonald’s restaurant in Russia © Flickr / Sandra Cohen-Rose and Colin Rose

    Ahh hamburgers, the cornerstone of the American diet. President Trump is known for his fondness for the handheld calorie-bombs, which set alarm bells ringing at Washington Post headquarters.

    Lo and behold, the Post found out that “even one of Trump’s favorite foods has a hidden Russia connection.” The storygoes that then-Soviet food minister Anastas Mikoyan visited the US in 1936 and brought home some hamburger-making machines. The Russians took to the American staple with glee, and after putting a few of their own twists on them, renamed them “Mikoyan cutlets.”

    Though the Post didn’t elaborate any further, the Russian plot is visible if you read between the lines. In his infinite duplicitousness, Vladimir Putin clearly funds the American hamburger industry in a bid to fatten and weaken the American people. If two years of Russophobic coverage have taught us anything, it’s that no story is too far-fetched to be true.

    Asset rating: $2.99, would you like fries with that?

    *  *  *

    The Washington Post, aka: The Moscow Meddler

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    FILE PHOTO: Washington Post owner Jeff Bezos © Reuters / Joshua Roberts

    There is precisely zero evidence to suggest that the Washington Post is a Russian asset. However, that evidentiary standard hasn’t stopped the Post from labeling Trump, McConnell and Ronald McDonald as Russian agents. 

    Based on that logic, we have no reason to disbelieve Donald Trump’s assertion this week that the Capitol’s paper of record is in fact an asset of the Kremlin.

    Asked by reporters on Tuesday to respond to the Post’s ‘Moscow Mitch’ story, President Trump said, “The Washington Post called Mitch McConnell what? I think the Washington Post is a Russian asset by comparison.”

    Asset rating: 10/10, на здоровье Comrade Bezos

    *  *  *

    We hope this guide has laid bare the extent of the Russian operation in America. However, we fear that the stooges exposed here are only the tip of the iceberg. Join us next week when we take a closer look at Barney the Dinosaur, Beyoncé, and Mister Snuffleupagus, all of whom are suspected Russian assets too.

  • A Prepper's Advice: How To Survive A Mass Shooting

    Authored by Daisy Luther via The Organic Prepper blog,

    Mass shootings are happening more and more often in America. Yesterday, there were two mass shootings within 24 hours that claimed the lives of 29 people and injured 52 more. A mass shooting in a Texas Wal-Mart took the lives of 20 people, and a shooting in a popular nightlife area in Dayton, Ohio killed 9 more. Being caught up as a victim in something like this is a hellish nightmare you wouldn’t wish on your worst enemy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A synopsis of the event came from a Facebook live video. (Is it just me or do you find it strange that someone was recording a video and not running like hell?)

    At the start of the video, a woman runs toward the store, past a truck that a shopping cart has run into, with a body lying on the ground beside it. 

    Children were holding a fundraiser at the store and some reportedly were among the casualties.

    At the front of the store, victims’ bodies are shown near a table that appeared to have items for sale. The body of a man in blue jeans and a blue shirt is seen on the ground near the table, lying on his stomach, seemingly dead, as a woman rushes over to help. Near him is a woman, taking cover between a garbage can and the wall.

    A person is shown lying motionless to the left of the table, under a shade covering set up over it, as a woman tries to help. Nearby, by the wall of the building, a man lies on his side in a pool of dark blood, with a bandage on his back. 

    A voice tells him, “Try not to move,” adding, “Stay with me, OK?”

    Wailing is heard in the background, as people tend to others lying injured nearby. (source)

    You have to know what to do before an event like this occurs.

    One factor that allows shooters to get so many victims is that most folks don’t know what to do in such an event. Most people don’t think ahead when they’re going to Wal-Mart or enjoying an evening in a popular pedestrian area.

    But these days, a person has to have a plan anywhere they go, it seems. And they also have to have a survival mindset, practicing the 3 steps of survival repeatedly until it becomes completely natural for them.

    If you are in the first wave of victims, that’s just bad luck, and there isn’t much you can do about that. But if you are not in that first wave, then you have a chance to take action and survive. But you have to know what to do and be able to take those life-saving actions.

    What is not important if you find yourself in the midst of a shooting

    This is an unpopular opinion, but here goes.

    Strictly from a survival point of view, it doesn’t matter who it is doing the shooting or whether it’s a “false flag.” If you were present during these events, it does not aid your survival to know who committed the acts of terror that occurred on 9/11, on the streets of Boston, in London, or in Paris. It doesn’t matter whether the shooting at Sandy Hook was perpetrated by a kid with behavioral issues or by operatives with an agenda. It doesn’t matter that the guy shooting up a Walmart in Texas wrote an anti-Hispanic manifesto.

    If your focus is preparedness and survival, the most important thing you can be doing right now is learning from horrific events.

    Whether you believe these acts are at the hands of Muslim extremists waging jihad, someone who hates Hispanic people, a guy who hates women because he can’t get a date, or a state-sponsored act of terror to clamp down and take away more freedom, the single most important thing you can take away from any of these events is a lesson in survival.

    This article is not a debate about the different conspiracy theories. If you are present during a terror attack, my opinions on the culprit don’t matter and neither do yours. All that matters in those minutes or hours is surviving.

    So let us try not to get bogged down in a debate over how these two shootings within 24 hours make it easy for all the 2020 candidates to pull on the heartstrings about gun control. What matters is whether you can survive in such a scenario.

    Here are the things you need to do before a shooting ever happens.

    First things first, even when you’re there for fun, you must be paying attention. You should always scan an area for exits and potential cover. You should pay attention to the people around you. You should understand what the baseline behavior is for your setting so that if something is not baseline, it immediately catches your attention. Let me explain this further.

    We can maintain a high level of situational awareness merely by being observant. One way to develop your skills is to play something called Kim’s Game.  My friend Scott, at Graywolf Survival, used to use the game to train his soldiers in situational awareness. He wrote:

    Situational awareness is key to understanding your environment so you can know better both your circumstances and your options. There are myriad examples that could be given but would you notice the bulge (called printing) of someone’s ankle from a concealed weapon if you were asked to follow him to barter for goods? Would you remember enough details of the turn of a path you passed two hours ago to be able to find it again? If you were attacked, would you be able to give a good enough description of the subject and getaway vehicle to have him identified?

    Kim’s Game comes from a novel by Rudyard Kipling and is something you can play with your family, anywhere, anytime. Go HERE to learn more about how to play it.

    A higher level of situational awareness can help you in many ways, should you be unfortunate enough to be present during a mass shooting.

    It can help by:

    • Allowing you to identify a threat before it becomes active

    • Allowing you to locate exits and routes to the exits

    • Allowing you to determine sources of cover

    If you can identify a potential threat before it exists, you can sometimes prevent an attack or at the very least, you can protect yourself and your family more effectively. A book by Patrick Van Horne and Jason A. Riley describes this as being on the “left of bang”. The left of bang is a term used to describe the moments before something bad happens, when you have an inkling that something is wrong, but you just can’t put your finger on what it is.

    The book, Left of Bang: How the Marine Corps’ Combat Hunter Program Can Save Your Life, discusses how establishing a baseline can help you to identify a threat. (I can’t recommend this book strongly enough.)

    A baseline is a “normal” for your immediate environment. Once you have a baseline for behavior in a specific environment, then it’s easier to spot anomalies. According to Left of Bang, it’s the anomalies that should put you on high alert. “Anomalies are things that either do not happen and should or that do happen and shouldn’t.”  

    The earlier you’re aware that something is going down, the better your chances are of survival.

    Know what gunfire sounds like.

    A lot of people who were interviewed after the Walmart shooting said that when they first heard the shots, they didn’t realize what it was. They thought it was noise from construction or boxes being dropped. There were precious seconds when people were frozen targets while they tried to wrap their brains around what was actually happening. During an event like this, a pause of a few seconds could mean the difference between life and death. The faster you take action the more likely you are to survive.

    Always have a plan.

    We can’t foresee all eventualities, like this one, for example, but it helps to always have a survival mindset. It has long been a game with my kids (yeah, we’re a strange family) to identify exits and potential weapons if we sit down to eat at a restaurant or go to the movies. Something we focused on in Selco’s Urban Survival Course in Croatia was finding alternative exits in a mall, locating cover, and finding everyday items that could be used as weapons.

    Knowing where to go without having to look for it in the heat of the moment will save time that could be spent acting.  We also look for sources of cover.

    Understand the difference between cover vs. concealment.

    Every NRA course I’ve ever taken discusses the difference between cover and concealment, because in many cases when you are forced to use your own firearm, there’s another person who is ready and willing to shoot back. Concealment is enough to hide you but not enough to protect you from bullets. Cover is something sturdy enough to stop a bullet – a concrete structure like a road divider, the engine block of a car, a refrigerator, a steel door, a brick wall.

    When watching the video playback of the Las Vegas shooting, many people were seeking concealment behind flimsy barriers, and that is not enough to protect yourself in a situation with a high-powered gun and a shooter spraying an area.

    Separate from the crowd.

    In a mass shooting, the shooter is trying to take down as many people as possible, so most likely he will aim at the crowd instead of picking off people who moved away from the bulk of the group.

    One possible strategy would be, then, to get away from the crowd. You and the person/people you are with would be less alluring than a group of a hundred panicked people all huddled together where maximum harm could be achieved.

    Don’t get down or play dead.

    Lots of people crouched down and got as low as they could. In many situations, this would be the best bet, but not this one. The person was shooting from up high, aiming downward. Being still and crouching down wouldn’t do much to protect you from a person firing from this angle, nor would playing dead.

    Action is nearly always a better choice than inaction. As well, getting down would make it more likely that you’d be trampled by a panicked crowd of people trying to get away from the area. Clark County Fire Chief Greg Cassell said after the Las Vegas shooting that some of a “wide range” of injuries included people who were trampled by the panicked crowds.

    Listen for reload.

    In a situation like this, there will be pauses in the shooting when the person stops to either reload or change firearms. That is your opportunity to make a dash for the exits or to take down the attacker. Don’t wait too long to make your move, because it only takes an experienced gunman a few seconds to reload a familiar gun and then your chance is gone.

    There are only 3 courses of action.

    Sometimes regardless of how alert and observant we are, we can’t predict when an attack is about to happen. There might be no indications in your immediate surroundings to alert yourself to the fact that something is going down. You may be blithely unaware until the moment that a perpetrator starts firing.

    If you find yourself suddenly in the midst of a mass shooting, your actions should be one of the following:

    1) Escape. Get as far away from the threat as possible. This is where your early observant behavior comes in handy because you’ll already know the escape routes. If you are in charge of vulnerable individuals like children, your first choice of actions should be to get them to safety if at all possible.

    2) Take cover. If you can’t get away, get behind something solid and wait for your opportunity to either escape or fight back. This is something else you may have observed when doing your earlier reconnaissance.

    3) Take out the threat. If you are armed (and I really hope you are) and/or trained, use your abilities to help remove the threat. But know that sometimes you can’t get a clear shot without putting other people at risk. Understand the power of your firearm and ammunition – will your bullet go through the perpetrator

    The most important thing to consider here is not necessarily which action you will take. It’s that you willtake an action, not just stand there in shock. You can be a victim or you can be a warrior. Unfortunately, modern life seems to have made our survival instincts obsolete but you can overcome this with practice and study.

    Keep in mind that fighting back doesn’t always mean a fancy Krav Maga move that takes down two armed men with one trick maneuver. There are many ways to fight back, and not all of them require physical prowess. Don’t let fear incapacitate you. Your brain is a weapon too.

    Are you going to wait for someone to save you or are you going to save yourself? Don’t be a kamikaze, but look for your opportunity.

    And there comes a point in some of these situations in which survival is unlikely. Don’t go down without a fight.

  • "We're Already Starting To Ration Our Corn" – Perfect Storm Could Send Spot Prices Higher

    Corn is extensively used to feed livestock, but the surge in spot prices has forced US farmers to search elsewhere for low-cost substitutes, reported Reuters.

    The persistent wet weather that swamped the Midwest this spring is now reducing corn yields.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    More recently, dry, hot weather continues over large swaths of the Midwest, is also wreaking havoc on corn yields. Volatile weather as a whole, in 2019, could lead to one of the lowest corn harvests in years.

    The US Department of Agriculture (USDA) last month projected 2019 corn production at 13.88 billion bushels, an 8% drop YoY.

    Agricultural organizations, equipment dealers and factories that convert corn into ethanol have already felt the pressure from farmers because of millions of acres went unplanted due to wet weather across the Central and Midwest, including corn and soybean belts.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Reuters spoke with meat producers who are now rushing to find substitutes to avoid margin compression from skyrocketing corn prices; they’re attempting to stretch out supplies of corn held in storage.

    Experts have warned spot prices of corn could jump once harvesting begins this fall because declining yields will be realized.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Higher prices for corn could translate into higher meat prices, which are already soaring after China’s African swine fever crisis has led to the deaths of hundreds of millions of pigs.

    USDA supermarket data showed retail pork prices had soared 9% YoY versus this time last year, while beef prices are up 2%. Rising food costs are occurring at a time when the overall economy is rapidly slowing.

    The wettest 12 months on record in the Midwest has put thousands of farmers behind the planting season. The number one risk is that corn might not reach full maturity and early frost could devastate crop yields even further.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The USDA shows about 57% of the US corn crop is in good condition, plunging from 75% at this time last year.

    High corn prices have led to margin compression for major meat producers like Tyson Foods, who will ultimately pass on the costs to consumers.

    Cargill said last month its quarterly net profit crashed 67% from last year, partly due to disruptions in the growing season in spring.

    “End users are in a panic,” said Tanner Ehmke, industry research manager for agricultural lender CoBank.

    Crop traders, ethanol plants, and livestock producers “want corn now because of the unknowns on this crop.”

    Jason Britt, president of Central States Commodities, said rains and floods are making farmers “tighter-fisted. Britt said his family’s northern Missouri farm has 100,000 bushels of corn in storage; traders are already offering him a premium for the crop.

    “The circumstances have changed this year, so for us [we need] a larger security blanket,” Mr. Britt said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ohio farmer Jim Heimerl sells 700,000 pigs per year, has swapped out corn with expired pet food, which he acquired in bulk through a broker. Heimerl is feeding the pigs other substitutes, including wheat middlings.

    “We’re already starting to ration our corn out,” he said.

    Corn spot prices chart

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For the first half of August, weather models show cooling weather prevailing through the Central and Midwest. Reuters noted this could further delay crop development at a time when corn needs it the most:

    “1-15 Day Forecast: Model guidance (both GFS & EC) remains consistent showing cool weather prevailing through the first half of August across the Central and Midwest U.S., including the Corn and Soybean belts. As mentioned in previous reports this could further delay crop development and be the potential catalyst of future issues should the season be pushed back even further as a result. Moreover, both models agree on expected rainfall across most areas through 10 days. A widespread pocket of dryness is expected across Wisconsin, Iowa, northern Missouri, Illinois, Indiana, and Ohio. Furthermore, the GFS extends this period of dry weather through the 11-15 day time frame. As mentioned in recent updates, continued dryness across some areas in Illinois, Indiana, and Ohio could become more of a concern for corn and soybeans in key developmental stages if prolonged.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Extended Outlook: The EC extended run from 01 August paints a different picture than the former run from 29 July. This most recent backs off from extensive coolness across the central/Midwest U.S. which was shown in the 29 July scenario, and rather limits lasting coolness to Canada and the far northern U.S. Plains. The rest of the U.S., including the Midwest, is now expected to be warmer than normal when averaged through the next 4 weeks, though this is just one model run. This most recent run also depicts wetter conditions across the Midwest U.S., opposed to the run from 29 July which shows dry conditions across much of the region. Overall, if materialized later in the month this would be a more favorable scenario with warmer and wetter conditions possibly returning.”

    Perhaps a perfect storm of factors mentioned above could result in the second leg up in corn spot prices in the months to come, especially around harvest time in fall.

  • 10 Alarming Things About The Economy That Politicians Won't Tell You

    Authored by Brett Arends via MarketWatch.com,

    The Congressional Budget Office reveals shocking forecasts for immigration, debt and spending for the next 30 years…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    How do you know a politician is lying to you? Simple: His lips are moving.

    Yes, it’s an old one – but none the worse for that.

    The 2020 election season is getting into full swing. Politicians on all sides are ramping up their rhetoric, including their promises, forecasts and accusations.

    But it’s fascinating what you can find out if you just read official documents. Especially some of the fine print.

    And here are 10 remarkable forecasts and assumptions that Washington is making and isn’t telling you. These are all contained in the Congressional Budget Office’s most recent Long-Term Budget Outlook, the cornerstone document of government financial and economic planning.

    1. We’re going to have a lot more immigrants. A lot. They’re expecting a net 22.5 million more immigrants to come to the U.S. over the next 20 years. By 2049, they’re expecting immigration to account for a stunning 87% of annual population growth.

    2. We’re going to have a lot more illegal immigrants. Despite the current bluster and the scandals at the border, the CBO expects we’ll have 2.4 million more illegal immigrants (or “undocumented residents,” or whatever) in 20 years’ time than we have today.

    3. We’re going to be up to our eyeballs in debt. The national debt is expected to skyrocket to an “unprecedented” 144% of gross domestic product by 2049, or twice the level today. That would put the debt just under $100 trillion. The figure today: Around $18 trillion. As recently as 2000: $4 trillion. Oh, and this isn’t even the worst-case scenario: The national debt could exceed 200% of GDP in 30 years’ time, the CBO acknowledges.

    4. We’re going to owe so much money that by 2049 the annual interest on the debt will be about 5% of gross domestic product — roughly the share that we spend today on Social Security. And that’s even if interest rates stay low. Despite rising debt and federal spending, the government is expecting — or hoping — the average rate on federal debt will rise only from today’s lowly 2.4% to 4.2%, still modest by historic standards, by 2049.

    5. This debt, and these deficits, will damage the economy. They will crowd private investment out of the debt markets, reducing income and growth, says the CBO. And as we’ll have to borrow more and more from abroad to finance the government, they’ll lead to bigger and bigger interest payments leaving the country.

    6. Social Security, Medicare, other health programs and net interest are going to soak up so much of the budget that we’re going to have to slash everything else to the smallest share of the economy in 70 years – just 7%. The average over the past 50 years: 11%.

    7. Just to keep the federal deficit to these levels, your taxes will go up. The Obama tax hike on “Cadillac” health-insurance plans will kick in starting in 2022, and the 2017 Trump tax cuts will expire in 2025.

    8. Most working stiffs can say goodbye to any other tax cuts. Uncle Sam is explicitly relying on your taxes to go up thanks to “bracket creep,” where income-tax brackets rise only in line with inflation while your income — you hope — rises faster.

    9. While tax rates go up for most people, they won’t for those earning the most. That’s because more and more of their income will be above the Social Security “cap,” saving them an effective 12.4% a year. The cap this year is $132,900.

    10. Meanwhile, working stiffs will be taxed at twice the marginal rate of those who live on dividends. By 2049, says the CBO, labor income will be taxed at a marginal rate of 32%, compared to just 16% for capital income. Good to know, isn’t it?

    It would be great to see some of this stuff come up in the presidential race, wouldn’t it?

Digest powered by RSS Digest